You are on page 1of 186

Distributed by: www.minilablaser.

com

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL MINILAB
FRONTIER
350/370
Trouble Shooting

System Disk Ver.6.0 First Edition


PP3-C916E
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Contents

Image Processing and Electrical Systems.................................................................................. 1


1. Circuit Board Names and Functions of Frontier 350/370 Components .......................................... 1
1.1 Circuit Board Names and Functions of Scanner Components .............................................. 1
1.2 Circuit Board Names and Functions of Printer Components ................................................. 3
2. Frontier 350/370 Image Data Flow and Process Overview ............................................................ 5
2.1 Image Data Flow .................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Pre-scanning.............................................................................................................. 5
2.1.2 Fine-scanning ............................................................................................................ 5
2.1.3 Index Printing ............................................................................................................. 5
2.1.4 DI Writing ................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.5 DI Print ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 CCD20 Board and Peripheral Drive Circuit Boards ............................................................... 7
2.2.1 Scanning sequence, pre-scanning, and light intensity control/scanning .................. 7
2.2.2 CCD section image reading and its process overview.............................................. 8
2.3 Main Functions of the CDS20 Board.................................................................................... 10
2.4 Image Processing Section Overview ................................................................................... 12
2.4.1 Image processing by scanner.................................................................................. 12
2.4.2 DI digital image output process (digitized output/media output) ............................. 14
2.4.3 DI digital image input process (digital print/media print) ......................................... 14
2.5 Image Processing Section Tester Functions and Inspection Descriptions .......................... 16
2.6 CTB20 Board, Light Source/Lens Deck/Carrier Control, and Auto-Focus Algorithm........... 17
2.6.1 CTB20 board and scanner optical/mechanical drive system diagram .................... 17
2.6.2 Light source control ................................................................................................. 17
2.6.3 Lens deck/scanning (CCD) unit, lens position control, and auto-focus algorithm .. 18
2.6.4 AF operation during fine scanning........................................................................... 18
2.6.5 Carrier speed control ............................................................................................... 19
2.7 Dust Detection Algorithm ...................................................................................................... 19
2.7.1 Dust detection function support by carriers............................................................. 19
2.7.2 Dust detection function execution timing................................................................. 19
2.7.3 Detectable dust ........................................................................................................ 20
2.7.4 Detection method..................................................................................................... 20
2.7.5 Checking the CCD output when a carrier dust detection warning is issued ........... 21
2.7.6 Dust detection display.............................................................................................. 21
2.7.7 Reference data creation and display....................................................................... 22
2.8 Flow of Printer Image Processing ........................................................................................ 22
2.8.1 Printer image processing flow and individual circuit board/unit functions............... 22
2.8.2 Test pattern/adjustment pattern handling and troubleshooting ............................... 25
2.8.3 Other printer control functions ................................................................................. 26
3. Power Supply Sequences and Power Supply System.................................................................. 27
3.1 Scanner Power Supply System/Timer Operation Sequence ............................................... 27
3.2 Printer Power Supply System/Printer Power ON/OFF-Related Circuit/Timer Operation
Sequence.............................................................................................................................. 29
3.3 Remote ON/OFF control of scanner-printer ......................................................................... 30
4. Main Control Unit Troubles ............................................................................................................ 31
4.1 Dr. Watson Error and Error Logging ..................................................................................... 31
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

4.2 Blue Panic............................................................................................................................. 31


4.3 Startup Failure or OS Error Occurrence............................................................................... 31
4.4 Keyboard or Mouse Freeze .................................................................................................. 31
4.5 Network Error........................................................................................................................ 32
4.6 Various Communication Errors............................................................................................. 32
4.7 Software Upgrade and Various Parameters......................................................................... 32
5. Image Problem Isolation Procedures and Remedies.................................................................... 34
5.1 When an Error Occurs.......................................................................................................... 34
5.2 When No Error Occurs ......................................................................................................... 34

Film Carrier ................................................................................................................................. 36


1. Overview of Film Carrier Functions and Operations ..................................................................... 36
1.1 Characteristics of Overall Configuration............................................................................... 36
1.2 Operation Overview .............................................................................................................. 36
1.3 NC135Y Carrier Structure (See the attached drawing for details of the structure.) ............ 37
1.4 NC240Y Carrier Structure (See the attached drawing for details of the structure.) ............ 39
1.5 MFC10Y Multiple Film Carrier .............................................................................................. 39
1.6 Supplement........................................................................................................................... 40
2. Associating the DX Code with the 135 Film Frame Position......................................................... 41
2.1 Determining the Frame Positions ......................................................................................... 41
2.2 Analyzing the Barcode to Determine the Frame Number Position ...................................... 41
2.3 Making Up for Barcode Reading Deficiencies...................................................................... 41
2.4 Determining the Frame Number for Each Frame Position................................................... 41
2.5 Adjusting the Frame Numbering Style ................................................................................. 41
3. NC135Y/NC240Y Transport Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................... 43
3.1 NC135Y Transport Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 43
3.2 NC240Y Transport Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 44
4. Frontier 350/370 Image Frame Detection and DX Code Detection .............................................. 45
4.1 Background........................................................................................................................... 45
4.2 Relationship between Film Conditions and Frame Determination Factors.......................... 45
4.2.1 Fogged leading end ................................................................................................. 45
4.2.2 Punched hole ........................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3 Check tape............................................................................................................... 46
4.2.4 Splicing tape ............................................................................................................ 46
4.2.5 Leading frame overlap ............................................................................................. 47
4.2.6 Underexposed leading frame .................................................................................. 47
4.2.7 Intermediate frame pattern (underexposed/super-underexposed) ......................... 48
4.2.8 Intermediate frame pattern (super-overexposed).................................................... 48
4.2.9 Intermediate frame pattern (frame mark) ................................................................ 49
4.3 Panorama Judgment Algorithm ............................................................................................ 50
4.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 50
4.3.2 Currently encountered panorama frames................................................................ 50
4.3.3 Images outside the panorama area......................................................................... 51
4.3.4 Overexposed panorama image frames ................................................................... 52
4.3.5 Underexposed panorama image frame examples .................................................. 52
4.4 135 Barcode Detection ......................................................................................................... 53
4.4.1 Currently used barcodes.......................................................................................... 53
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

4.4.2 Basic idea ................................................................................................................ 54


4.4.3 Data sampling process ............................................................................................ 54
4.4.4 Binarization of tracks ............................................................................................... 55
4.4.5 DX code detection ................................................................................................... 55
4.4.6 FNS code detection ................................................................................................. 58
4.5 135 Perforation Detection..................................................................................................... 59

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies ................ 62


1. Paper Jamming Errors and Error Detection Basis ........................................................................ 62
2. Relationship between D562 Sensor in Subscanning Unit and Distribution .................................. 63
3. Printer Section Sensor Arrangement Diagram .............................................................................. 64
4. Precautions for Clearing Paper Jam Messages............................................................................ 65
5. Frontier 350/370 Paper Jamming Countermeasures [for Operator] ............................................. 66
6. Paper Jam Check List - W2406 (6) Sheet A.................................................................................. 67
7. Paper Jam Check List - W2406 (6) Sheet B ................................................................................. 70
8. Paper Jam Check List - W2601 (7), (8)......................................................................................... 75

Technical Information................................................................................................................. 77
1. MAIN CONTROL UNIT EQUIUM5500 (XL) RECOVERY CD OPERATING PROCEDURE ........ 77
2. NEW MAIN CONTROL UNIT HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 83
3. DATA BACKUP FD ........................................................................................................................ 84
4. CIRCUIT BOARD CHANGE FROM GMB20 TO GMC20 ............................................................. 87
5. SCANNER AIR COMPRESSOR AND FLOW RATE SENSOR .................................................... 88
6. OPTICAL SECTION ND FILTER CONTAMINATION AND UNEVENNESS UPPER/
LOWER PRINT DENSITY ............................................................................................................. 90
7. W-1128 DUST ADHESION-CAUSED ERROR COUNTERMEASURES...................................... 91
8. PRESCAN SCREEN FRAME POSITION SHIFT.......................................................................... 92
9. NC135Y VARIABLE FILM MASK GEAR ENGAGEMENT ERROR.............................................. 94
10. STEPS TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF CARRIER MALFUNCTION (W-1202/W-1214/W-1215) ... 95
11. E-1247 ERROR COUNTERMEASURES...................................................................................... 96
12. MFC10Y FILM SLIDER PAD CLEANING...................................................................................... 97
13. POSITIONAL SHIFT BETWEEN HIGH MAGNIFICATION MODE MONITOR PRINT FRAME
AND ACTUAL PRINT..................................................................................................................... 98
14. OCCURRENCE OF ERROR "E-1424 DOWNLOADING CARRIER PROGRAM FAILED"........ 100
15. NOTES ON PAPER CONDITION SETUP .................................................................................. 101
16. SCANNER-PRINTER COMMUNICATION ERROR HANDLING AND ANALYSIS
PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................... 102
17. LP1500SC/LP2000SC TIMER STOP ERRORS ......................................................................... 113
18. PRINTER SECTION INTERLOCK SWITCH CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTIONS.................. 115
19. CROSSOVER RACK REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS .................................. 121
20. PROCESSING RACK UPPER GUIDE CLEANING.................................................................... 123

Error Countermeasures............................................................................................................ 124


Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

1. Circuit Board Names and Functions of Frontier 350/370 Components

1.1 Circuit Board Names and Functions of Scanner Components


- Scanner section and light source control section
CCD : Light-receiving image pickup device. The Frontier 350/370/390 uses a
3-line CCD. It provides R, G, and B lines, with each line consisting of
5000 pixels.
CCD20 board : This board, which is mounted in the scanning section, drives the CCD,
performs a timing process, and amplifies image signals.
CTB20 board : This board controls/drives the light source, lens, and carrier sections.
Lamp power supply section:
This section supplies constant voltage for the scanning lamp. It supplies
about 29 volts for scanning and about 20 volts for standby.

- Image processing section boards (The letter "G" at the beginning of a board name
represents the word "image".)
CDS20 board : The analog film image derived from scanning by the CCD/CCD20 board
is converted by the CDS20 board to a digital equivalent. The signal from
the CCD constantly flows into this circuit board. It is subjected to
high-speed analog-to-digital conversion at all times in synchronism with
the CCD drive signal.
GFM20 board : "FM" is an acronym for "frame memory". This circuit board stores
images that are derived from scanning.
GIP20 board : "IP" is an acronym for "image processor". This circuit board performs
various image processes such as hyper-tone and sharpness
adjustments and graininess control.
GMB20 board : "MB" stands for "motherboard". This circuit board handles an image
data bus and control signal bus. It cannot be used for single-scan
digitizing. For single-scan digitizing, the GMC board below is required.
GMC20 board : "MC" is a revision of "MB" or a newer version of "MB". The GMC20
board has the same functions as the GMB20 board. However, these
circuit boards differ in the size of the incorporated memory. The GMC20
board can be used as a substitute for the GMB20 board; however, the
GMB20 board cannot be used as a substitute for the GMC20 board
(upper compatible).
GIS20 board : This circuit board carries a SCSI interface. It provides an image/control
signal communication interface with the main control unit (PC).
GLC20 board : This circuit board provides LUT overlay compression. It performs
compression and other image processes for single-scan digitizing and
transfers the resulting data to an external PC.

1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

GLO20 board : This circuit board provides LUT overlay output. It performs an image
output process for the LP. It effects signal conversion to comply with the
IEEE 1394 Specification.

- Console
Power supply section : This section contains an AC control, auxiliary power supply (24 volts,
startup control/fan), and PWR20 board.
DC power supply : Main power supply for the scanner. It supplies 3.3 V, 5 V, ±5 V, 18 V, 24
V, etc.
Main control unit : This section may also be referred to as the PC, main control PC, or
operating control PC. It exercises the scanner main control function,
various operating control functions, communication control function, and
some image process calculation functions.
DIC : The DIC conducts image input/output operations in relation to various
digital media of external computers that are network-connected to the
main control unit.

2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

1.2 Circuit Board Names and Functions of Printer Components


- Printer section
FMA20 board : This is a frame memory access board. It exchanges
IEEE-1394-compliant image signals and control signals with the host
equipment (SP or LPC). It also rotates received images.
FMB20 board : This is a frame memory buffer board. It temporarily stores image
memory print images. One FMB20 board has a memory for 32MB x 3
colors. Up to three boards can be installed.
FMC20 board : This is a frame memory control board. It controls print images (printing
start, image data access, write, LUT processing, etc.).
CTL20 board : This circuit board exercises overall control of the printer. It provides
print control (size, quantity, etc.), printer mechanism control, error
check/control, scanner communication control, and pattern data
creation and control for adjustment/verification. However, it does not
handle print images. It also controls the operation of a weekly timer.
LDD20 board : The Frontier 350/370 basically maintains the laser output constant. The
LDD20 board stabilizes the operation of the exposure section laser by,
for instance, providing temperature control, laser diode (LD) drive
(high-frequency superposition for stable LD operation), drive current
monitoring, and light intensity feedback.
AOM driver, AOM, and laser modulator:
The AOM is an acousto-optic modulator. It applies an ultrasonic wave to
a special optical crystal on which laser light is shed. The beam resulting
from diffraction is then used for printing. The light intensity of the
obtained diffracted beam varies in proportion to the intensity of the
ultrasonic wave application to the AOM. The ultrasonic wave applied to
the AOM is generated by means of oscillation within the AOM driver. Its
intensity varies in proportion to the image data fed from the FMC20
board. Since analog image information is transferred over the
FMC20-AOM-exposure section line for printing purposes, the image
information is easily affected by a poor contact and externally induced
noise. Particularly, grounding is important. If the individual components
are not properly grounded (due, for instance, to grounding wire screw
looseness, lack of toothed lock washers, or corroded component outer
surfaces), pulsating noise is readily induced from various motor drive
circuits in the printer. To avoid such a problem, the external surface of
the AOM driver is specially plated to assure proper grounding.
PDC20 board : This circuit board drives various motors, solenoids, and other parts in
the printer.

3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

- Processor section
CTP20 board : This circuit board provides control over processor drive, replenishment,
and processing temperatures. It carries a backup battery to retain
processor software data and parameters.
PAC20 board : This circuit board drives various motors, heaters, solenoids, and other
parts of the processor.

4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2. Frontier 350/370 Image Data Flow and Process Overview

2.1 Image Data Flow


The flow of image data is schematized below. The image data flow in each circuit board is detailed
later.

2.1.1 Pre-scanning

2.1.2 Fine-scanning

2.1.3 Index Printing

5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.1.4 DI Writing

2.1.5 DI Print

6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.2 CCD20 Board and Peripheral Drive Circuit Boards


2.2.1 Scanning sequence, pre-scanning, and light intensity control/scanning
1) Pre-scanning is conducted at the standard light intensity. In this instance, one order or one
piece is scanned (one frame is scanned during the use of the MFC). The pre-scanning light
intensity and speed are determined according to the original's size (carrier mask) and
maintained constant. In the pre-scanning sequence, the entire information about the original
film is read.
As regards 135 film, film edges, barcode, and all the image frames except for perforation (the
entire film roll) are read. The necessary information about images, barcode, and the like is
then picked up from the read image information. Therefore, if a film slip or other film
transport error occurs during the pre-scanning sequence, a frame detection failure, barcode
reading failure, or other error occurs. If the detected deviation of a perforation detection
interval is greater than predefined, a transport error occurs.

2) The optimum fine scanning information is determined from the image and print magnification
information about each pre-scanned frame.
When the magnification is low and the original's light intensity is high, the light intensity is
lowered by adjusting the light source aperture. When the magnification is high and the
original's density is high, on the other hand, the light source aperture and storage time are
adjusted for optimum results. The storage time is the period of electrical charge storage in
the CCD light receptor cell and can be varied according to the original and other conditions.
The storage time is therefore varied to adjust the CCD sensitivity. Optimization is achieved
to ensure that the CCD output is neither overshadowed by noise nor saturated.

3) In the pre-scanning sequence, the Frontier 350/370/390 fully opens the light source aperture
(to maximize the light intensity) and adjusts the ND filter between the lens and CCD to
prevent the CCD from becoming saturated.

4) The Frontier 350/370/390 employs a line-sensor-based scanning method. Therefore, a


halogen lamp is used as the light source in order to provide a high light intensity for scanning.
The use of a halogen lamp inevitably invokes a considerable temperature rise of the original
surface. Constant-voltage control is exercised to maintain the light intensity at two
predefined levels for standby and scanning. When the film stops or goes on standby, the
light intensity switches to the lower level for film protection and other purposes.

7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.2.2 CCD section image reading and its process overview


The timing signal for CCD20 board image output (R/G/B, analog) is constantly generated after
power ON and continuously forwarded to the CDS20 board together with the image output.
However, the timed interval varies with the stepwise storage time that is determined by the
scanning conditions. For overexposed originals (dark originals) and large-size prints, the storage
time is adjusted (increased) to optimize the resulting output. In the subsequent image processing
section, necessary information is picked up and used for various corrections and imaging.

Since the output from the CCD20 board to the CDS20 board is an analog signal, it is readily
affected by a poor contact. It is already separated by the CCD into three colors (R, G, and B).
Therefore, if an abnormality occurs during a CCD20-to-CDS20 signal transfer, it often affects a
specific color. The three colors can be simultaneously affected mostly by "offset adjustments",
"brightness level abnormalities/improper adjustments", and "scan timing failure". The reset signal
resets the timing generator operation. If this reset signal is improperly timed (due, for instance, to
noise caused by a poor contact or the decrease in the signal level), image abnormalities may
result. An improperly timed reset signal may also cause a dirt detection failure, auto-focusing
failure, or light intensity adjustment failure.

Light intensity and carrier control is exercised by the CTB20 board. This circuit board also
provides film speed control in the fine scanning sequence, changes the light intensity in the
standby/scanning sequence, and controls the lens desk up-down motion (detailed later).

<Descriptions of errors/image abnormalities related to CCD20 board>


(1) X-1186: Occurs when timing signal is not emitted properly and communication with CDS20
fails.
(2) E-1131 (Offset cancellation failed.) Failed to cancel offset: When offset compensation
cannot be performed properly.
(3) Images without gradation, solarized print: Occurs due to abnormal timing or abnormal reset.
(4) W-1128 (Dust adhesion to mirror box or carrier detected during scanner correction .)
E-1132 (Auto focus failed): Failure of light intensity adjustment.

8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Schematic of CCD20 board operations (Figure 6)

CCD Sensor
From CDS20
R G B

Capture signal (storage time) Storage time setup


Timing Generator
Read clock (ASIC) Timing signal
RS422 digital
signal

To CDS20 board
Reset
Offset cancel addition data

An adder is provided
at the front of the
amplifier to cancel the D/A Converter
offset.

+5V
B output
Power supply
To CDS20
Coaxial cable regulation circuit -5V

Analog signal
G output Supplied from the
DC power supply +18V
unit to achieve
regulation
+5V
R output

9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.3 Main Functions of the CDS20 Board


- The signal from the CCD continuously flows into this circuit board. In synchronism with the CCD
drive signal, it is constantly subjected to high-speed analog-to-digital conversion.
For image information acquisition, the timing signal from the CCD20 board is sampled as
needed. The sampled image information is used for darkness signal subtraction in the darkness
correction circuit and for CCD sensitivity variation correction in the brightness correction circuit.
The brightness/darkness correction values are created during pre-operational checkout or the
like and stored in the RAM (the stored values are lost when the power is turned OFF).

- The data is further subjected to density conversion and various other basic conversions such as
negative/positive and exponential/logarithmic conversions until it is formatted so as to facilitate
image processing.

- Mock data is added before the sampling circuit to verify the results of subsequent sectional
corrections, conversions, and other processes. Therefore, the tester in the image processing
section cannot perform circuit board/circuit functionality checkout until the exit of CCD-CDS20
board A/D conversion is reached.

- After completion of brightness correction, density conversion, and darkness correction, the R, G,
and B image data lines are aligned with each other. The CCD of the Frontier 350/370/390 is
designed to read the three lines (R, G, and B lines). Therefore, the individual color lines in the
read image are displaced from each other. The alignment (delay) circuit is used to align the
individual color lines. The amount of delay varies with the film scanning speed and scan
magnification. The results of alignment are indicated by the CCD data display provided by the
maintenance menu.

10
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Subtraction circuit
(CCD cell sensitivity/zero Line alignment by
correction)
the memory
CDS20 Circuit Board (Figure 7) The CCD data
display is based on
the data read from
RAM RAM RAM these memories.
ASIC

CCD output R A/D conversion Sampling Dark Density Brightness Line alignment
(Analog) correction conversion correction (Delay)

RAM RAM RAM


ASIC

CCD output G A/D conversion Sampling Dark Density Brightness Line alignment To GMB20/
(Analog) correction conversion correction (Delay) GMC20

RAM RAM RAM


ASIC

CCD output B A/D conversion Sampling Dark Density Brightness Line alignment
(Analog) correction conversion correction (Delay)

To CCD20 I/O circuit


CCD control
The signals are digitized from
these points. The tester signal is
applied from these points.
From CCD20
Each RAM data can be read/write from GMB20/GMC20 Timing signal

11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.4 Image Processing Section Overview


Basically, there are three processing flows. Further, the DI system provides two methods.
Therefore, four processing flows are summarized below:
(1) Print system in which film (negative/positive) scanning, print image processing, and image
transfer to printer are sequentially performed.
(2) System in which film scanning and print image processing are performed and the resultant
digital output is transferred out via the PC/DI controller.
(3) Single-scan digitizing (optional) in which image processing operations for (1) and (2) are
performed simultaneously in parallel.
(4) Digital printing system in which digital image data fed from the DI system is printed out.

2.4.1 Image processing by scanner


- This process corresponds to (1) above. In digitizing (Figure 8), the GFM20 and GIP20
perform almost the same processing operations.
- The image fed from the CDS20 board is variously processed by the GFM20, GIP20, and
GLO20 boards and forwarded to the printer.
- The GFM20 board makes various corrections such as key corrections and setup calculation
result corrections.
- Various image processes (sharpness, grain control, gradation control, etc.) peculiar to the
Frontier are mainly performed by the hardware on the GIP20 board. The PC/GMB20
(GMC20) gives the intensities and degrees of various processes as parameters.
- As regards index prints, fine-scanned images are converted by the CDS20 to digital
equivalents and directly entered in the PC for storage purposes. Key corrections are applied
to images stored in the PC. If there are any differences between prints and index prints, they
are attributable to the differences in processing.
- After the image information is variously processed, the GLO20 board subjects it to further
processes (8-bit conversion, APS frontprinting synthesis, 1394 conversion, etc.) as required
for the printer.

12
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image processing section (Figure 8) GFM20


Path for prescanning

Print-size image data


From CDS20 Contrac- FM Contrac- Color
tion tion processing
10-bit data for each color Main scanning direction Subscanning
direction

Setup key
* Single scan digitizing correction

INDEX Parameter Data Data

SCAN
MEMORY Pre-/fine-scanned SH
image correction

Data
GMB20/GMC20 Bus
Parameter Parameter

GIP20 GLO20

Hyper Memory Hyper


Sharpness TMS Sharpness 8-bit data for each color from this point

Integration
Grain control Color
Face/ Memory
process 3D LUT Synthesis 1394 To LP
landscape TMR processing
Output-dependent
Setting of Nega,
Hyper Memory Hyper Posi, sRGB, etc. Synthetic
Tone TMT Tone memory
APS front print data

13
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.4.2 DI digital image output process (digitized output/media output)


- The digitized output indicated in Section 2.4-(2) is generated when the dedicated digital output
or dual-scan digitizing mode is used. Image processing is performed using the same print
system as described above. However, the final output destination is not the 1394
interface/printer. The output is finally delivered from the PC to the DI controller via the GIS20
board. Image JPEG compression is performed by the PC.
- For the process indicated in Section 2.4-(3), the dedicated digitizing hardware is added to
enhance the processing capacity because the digitized output capability for the system
described in (2) is low due to PC use for JPEG compression and scanning needs to be
performed separately for printing and digitizing. The image output from the GFM20 is
subjected to parallel processing by the added hardware. JPEG compression and other
processes for digitizing are rapidly performed by the dedicated hardware on the GLC20 board.
The motherboard needs the GMC20.

2.4.3 DI digital image input process (digital print/media print)


- This process is in reverse of digitizing as indicated in Section 2.4-(4). Digital image prints are
read by the PC, forwarded to the GIS20 and GMB20 (GMC20) boards, converted to the 1394
signal equivalents by the GLO20, and transferred to the printer.

14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

SP-to-DI Acquisition Flow (Figure 9)

Case other than single-scan digitizing

GLO20
From CDS20 GFM20 GIP20
3D Synthesis 1394 LP Printer

Image flow for printing


Standard image processing (printing/digitizing only)

GMB20 GIS20 Main Control Unit


GFM20 GIP20 GLC20 (GMC20)

Single-scan digitizing option


Image flow for digitizing

Case of single-scan digitizing (dedicated path)

Print image signal flow from DI (Figure 10)

GLO20

Main Control Unit GIS20 3D Synthesis 1394 LP Printer

3D LUT is used by sRGB.


A bypass is performed otherwise.

15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

I m a g e P ro c e s s i n g a n d E l e c t r i c a l S y s t e m s

2.5 Image Processing Section Tester Functions and Inspection Descriptions

The Frontier 350/370 is provided with a function tester (CD-R), which checks the
functionality/performance of the image processing section.
This tester basically deals with processing circuits for images converted to digital equivalents by the
CDS20 board and checks the associated functions including some functions of the GLO20 board
(before 1394 conversion).

Process Conceptual Diagram and Main C heck Functions (Figure 11)

Control GIS20 GMB20 (GMC20) board


section PC board
SCSI

Image Control Other Various


buses
Analog image
CD-R
CCD20 CDS20 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20 GLC20
board board board board board board
Offset

To printer
1394

GMB20 (GMC20) board CPU RAM address/data line checks


Various other checks including the following:
(1) GMB20 (GMC20) image bus/image control bus checks, and register, reset circuit scanner
control signal circuit, parameter loading, I/O, and other checks
(2) Checks by GFM20 board memory, LUT data line, image data bus, pseudo-image, and other
tests
(3) GIP20 board memory, register, reset, and other line checks and image data bus test
(4) GLO20 board memory, image bus/control bus, register, and circuit checks. The
communication with the printer is checked by examining the components up to the CTL20
board via the 1394 interface.
(5) GLC20 board memory, image bus/control bus, register, and circuit checks
(6) GIS20 board memory, image bus/control bus, register, and circuit checks
(7) CDS20 board brightness/darkness/delay correction/LUT memory checks and data transfer test
(8) CCD20 board offset adjustment function test
Note, however, that this tester may fail to detect troubles caused by a poor contact or other
instability. It is also well to remember that the tester is inoperative if the PC, GIS20 board, or
GMB20 (GMC20) board does not function at all. (In such an instance, an associated error occurs
before the use of the tester due, for instance, to an image abnormality.) Also, note that this function
tester cannot detect illegal calculation parameters and abnormal LUT data.

16
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.6 CTB20 Board, Light Source/Lens Deck/Carrier Control, and Auto -Focus Algorithm

The CTB20 b oard controls and drives the input section optical mechanism. It also has a control
CPU to exchange control and timing signals between the GMB20 (GMC20) board and RS422 serial
circuit. It uses the control information fed from the GMB20 (GMC20) to provide film scanning
magnification control for the carrier and auto-focus control.

2.6.1 CTB20 board and scanner optical/mechanical drive system diagram

Scanner section
CCD-CCD20 board CTB20 board RS422 serial GMB20 (GMC20)
Lens deck board
Filter Optical/mechanical control
Motor driver
Carrier interface
Sensor interface

Carrier
NC135Y/240Y
MFC10Y, etc.

Light source section


Lamp illumination/
cooling system Power supply section
Lamp power
Light intensity
supply
control/filter

Power supply DC power


control section supply
Compressor

2.6.2 Light source control

- The CTB20 board provides OFF-standby illumination (approx. 20 V)-full illum ination (constant
voltage: approx. 29 V) control. In coordination with the film cooling airflow meter, this circuit
board automatically lowers the lamp light intensity (without regard to the scanning sequence) if
the cooling air flow rate is too low during the full illumination state.
NOTE: If the flow meter becomes abnormal, the lamp unexpectedly goes off and comes on
during scanning.
If the film transport is halted for a period longer than predefined when, for instance, the CPU
goes out of control, the CTB20 board automatically turns OFF the lamp (hard circuit).
- As regards the light source aperture, the aperture table creation menus (433 and 434) of the
maintenance mode are used to create and store a table that defines the relationship between

17
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

I m a g e P ro c e s s i n g a n d E l e c t r i c a l S y s t e m s

light intensity and diaphragm position. The data in this table is used to control the light source
intensity in accordance with individual original conditions.
- Two types of turret-type balance filters are provided: N type and P type. They provide optimum
control for each original type (negative/RV changeover, etc.). The actually employed position is
N for negative and sepia films or P for reversal and black-and-white films.

2.6.3 Lens deck/scanning (CCD) unit, lens position control, and auto -focus algorithm

- The Frontier 350/370/390 uses a fixed-focus lens to vary the film -to-CCD surface distance and
adjust the projection magnification in accordance with the original size, print magnification, and
other conditions, thereby assuring that the quality of acquired images is optically highest at all
times. The lens cam mechanism moves the lens up and down within the barrel to adjust the
magnification setting, and the scanner section moves up and down to detect contrast for
focusing purposes.
- For focus calibration purposes, the focusing pulse data (the data about motor pulse steps with
reference to the origin is stored to memorize the focusing position), lens temperature, and other
data are always registered before scanner use, using the com bination of pre-scanning optical
magnification and lens aperture for each carrier (mask included). If these data registrations are
not completed, an error occurs when you mount a carrier in position.
- In the pre-scanning sequence, the original is read using the magnification and focus position
registered for the above calibration purpose. W hen such a magnification is used, the entire
image is acquired in accordance with the original size. In the fine scanning sequence, the
combinations indicated in the following table are used:

Carrier Print size AF timing


First print Immediately after pre-scanning (once per order)
135AFC High magnification Immediately after pre-scanning and during fine scanning; immediately
(e.g., 2L or higher) before the specified fram e
First print Immediately after pre-scanning (once per order)
240AFC Immediately after pre-scanning and during fine scanning; immediately
High magnification
before the specified frame
MFC Small size/High magnification Upon a return to the screen center after pre-scanning (each time)

2.6.4 AF operation during fine scanning

- The predicted pulse data is determined by adding the temperature compensation to the
reference focusing pulse data that is determined for focus calibration. On either side of the
determined predicted pulse point, a focusing point search is conducted over a range of about 1
mm for strips/piece film or about 2 mm for slides.
- For focusing point detection purposes, the green CCD output image is read after
brightness/darkness correction, and the lens cam and image pickup section are moved to
search for a peak at which the contrast is maximized. If the image cannot be identified due to
excessive original darkness, an auto-focus error may occur because the S/N ratio is low and
the contrast peak cannot easily be identified (e.g., super-underexposed reversal film). Further,
if the image is excessively bright with the CCD output saturated (e.g., super-overexposed
positive film), detection may not be achieved because two or more peaks are produced by
harmonics generated by image distortion.

18
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

- Even when an AF operation is performed for an excessively low contrast image pattern (e.g.,
sky) on reversal film, an AF error may occur because the focusing point cannot be located. (In
this instance, the problem may be cleared by reversing the front/rear film positioning orientation
for film insertion.)
- Focusing failures occasionally occurred in the market because the optical axis was displaced
and not properly detected. Such an optical axis displacement occurred because the correct
exposure system position was not stored in the machine memory. To correct this problem, use
the optical axis adjustment jig and exercise the optical magnification calibration (43J) and focus
calibration (43K) functions from the maintenance/adjustment menu.
- Further, the image pickup section has a shutter for preventing the light from reaching the CCD
and providing darkness correction and an ND filter for dimming.

2.6.5 Carrier speed control

Necessary values for c arrier speed control are determined according to the fine-scanning original
conditions, printing conditions, and other conditions. Therefore, the pulley and clutch in the
carrier are controlled to obtain the necessary film transport speed. Details are given in the section
on the carrier.

2.7 Dust Detection Algorithm

The dirt detection function is additionally provided by Frontier 350/370 software versions 3.0 and
later.

2.7.1 Dust detection function support by carriers

The dust detection function is supported by the NC135Y and NC240Y. It is not supported by the
MFC10Y.

2.7.2 Dust detection function execution timing

(1) Pre-operational checkout (scanner correction)


Darkness correction → mask check → dust check → brightness correction (negatives only)
(2) Diurnal new carrier installation
Carrier ID check → darkness correction → mask check → dust check → brightness
correction (negatives only)
(3) Diurnal second or subsequent carrier installation
Carrier ID check → darkness correction → mask check → dust check → brightness data
loading
(4) Maintenance screen brightness correction (same as for CCD data display screen brightness
correction)
Darkness correction → mask check → dust check → brightness correction (negatives and
positives)

19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

I m a g e P ro c e s s i n g a n d E l e c t r i c a l S y s t e m s

2.7.3 Detectable d u s t

(1) Lint or like foreign matter positioned over the slit in the mask (minimum detectable width:
0.01 mm or less).
(2) Dust or dirt on the diffusion plate at the bottom of the mask (minimum detectable dirt
diameter: 0.02 mm or less).
(3) Dust or dirt on the diffusion plate lower surface (the back of the carrier).
Note: Fingerprints on the lower surface will not be detected.
(4) Dust on the mirror box upper surface cannot be detected because it is blurred. It will not
appear as streaks on the reproduced image.

2.7.4 Detection method

The CCD output waveform is passed through a high-frequency bandpass filter to check for local
irregularities.
CCD Output Waveform and Dust Detection (Figure 13)

25000

20000
W aveform of dust on mask
surface

15000 Mask surface detection result

W aveform of dust on diffusion


10000 plate upper surface
W aveform of dust on diffusion
plate lower surface
5000 W aveform of dust on mirror box
surface

-5000
0 100 200 300 400

20
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.7.5 C h e c k i n g t h e C C D o u t p u t w hen a carrier dust detection warning is issued

The CCD output lowered by dust is perceivable.


CCD Data Display Screen Check Result (Figure 14)

Data level decrease by dust

The carrier detachment lever is slightly pulled to remove the carrier halfway to check whether the data
level decrease by dust moves. Since the CCD output decrease point is moved, you can conclude that
dust is in the carrier section (Figure 15).

Moved when the carrier is removed halfway

2.7.6 Dust detection display

When dust is detected, the W -1128 warning message ("Dust adhesion to mirror box or carrier
detected during scanner correction. Remove carrier, then clean mirror box and carrier.") appears
during scanner correction.
In this instance, the scanner correction process does not abort. Dust detection invokes a
message display for warning purposes only. W hen you clear the message by pressing the OK
button, the scanning operation continues.
The operator can decide whether or not to remove the carrier.

21
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

I m a g e P ro c e s s i n g a n d E l e c t r i c a l S y s t e m s

2.7.7 Reference data creation and display

The reference data is the data that corrects CCD pixel sensitivity variations (this reference data is
used to prevent CCD sensitivity variations from being erroneously detected as dust).
(1) W hile the CCD data display screen is open, mount the reference mirror box only (the carrier
is not needed) to create the reference.
(Thoroughly clean the opal glass surface of the reference mirror box.)
(2) After the data is acquired, mount the regular mirror box and carrier in their positions
(thoroughly clean them) while the CCD data display screen is open. Check the carrier for
dust.
(3) W ith a hair or the like attached to the mask section of the carrier, check the carrier for dust. If
dust is not found in Step (2) and is found in Step (3), the results are satisfactory.

Reference data location


Folder : "D:\FujiFilm \Frontier\PARAM \SCAN"
File name : "GomiLight.*" The "*" portion is a number, which is incremented by one upon
each reference data creation.

Invalidating reference data (procedure for disabling the dust detection function when it is
abnormal)
Change the file name as indicated below:
GomiLight.1 → GomiLightbak.1

Do not change the file name to "GomiLight.bak1". You must change the portion preceding the
first period in the file name.
When a reference creation operation has been performed twice, files named "GomiLight.1" and
"GomiLight.2" are created. Therefore, rename them to "GomiLightbak.1" and "GomiLightbak.2".
The dust detection function is disabled after the power is turned OFF then back ON. It is not
disabled simply by changing the file names.

2.8 Flow of Printer Image Processing

2.8.1 Printer image processing flow and individual circuit board/unit functions

1) Print images are delivered to the FMB20 board via the FMC20 circuit and stored. The control
signal is fed to the CTL20 board and processed. W hen an image is received, it is stored in the
FMB20 board with the angle of image rotation specified in 90-degree units.
2) One or more FMB20 boards can be installed. One FMB20 board p rovides an image storage
space for 32MB x 3 colors. Since the ring memory system is employed, received images are
sequentially stored without leading and trailing ends taken into consideration. Therefore, if a
specific area of the memory has a defect, it periodically appears in the stored image data to be
printed. One 89 x 127 image uses about 2MB of memory per color. One 254 x 381 image
uses about 14MB of memory per color. The FMB20 board is connected to the FMC20 board
by the card-edge connector method. Therefore, if a memory read/write operation is abnormal
due, for instance, to a poor contact, peculiarly abnormal images result.

22
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

3) The FMC20 board reads the images stored in the FMB memory for printing purposes. The
read images are then corrected by the printer (write start position and paper LUT corrections)
and subjected to D/A conversion. The resultant output is forwarded to the AOM driver.
Subsequently, the image signal remains in analog format and provides laser light intensity
control and modulation. The R laser light is detected by the exposure unit, and the laser beam
start point detection signal (SOS) is used to exercise write start/end control of individual line
images over the FMC20 board.
4) For various conversions and corrections, the Frontier has LUTs as correction tables. The
scanner has LUTs required for correction calculations in various input devices. The printer
has LUTs for making its unique corrections. Important LUTs of the printer relate to paper
corrections. An adequate number of paper correction LUTs are provided to cover all
magazine IDs. These LUTs are adjusted and set by means of print calibration.
Since these LUTs have a battery backup they remain unaffected even when the software is
reinstalled or upgraded (they basically retain their previous settings).
If any print problem is caused by an abnormality in these LUTs, it persists even after you
replace the circuit boards or reinstall the software. When such a situation is encountered,
effect initialization from the paper condition setup screen.

23
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Printer Im a g e P r o c e s s i n g D i a g r a m ( F i g u r e 1 6 )

Memory F M B 20
FMC20

Buffer Buffer Buffer


FMA20
From SP
Develop- Write operation Read operation Pixel shift Paper LUT-D/A
1394
ment control control control

Test pattern Calibration pattern LUT load


Gradation pattern
Various control operations/
communication information Image/LUT data

CTL20

SOS signal

AOM Driver
Laser Unit (R/G/B)
LDD20

LD current control
ROS temperature control

24
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

2.8.2 Test pattern/adjustment pattern handling and troubleshooting

1) Two calibration patterns are available: one is for a paper width of 210 m m or smaller and the
other is for greater paper widths.
These patterns are generated, output, and written directly by the FMC20 board under CTL20
control and not via the frame memory. Therefore, if you encounter an abnormal image, you
can use these calib ration patterns to determine whether a problem exists.

Calibration Image Data Flow (Figure 17)

2) The test patterns (gradation, step wedge, contact, etc.) are generated by the CTL20, written
into the FMB20 frame memory, and then printed. Therefore, these test patterns can be used
to analyze the problems with a system containing the frame memory.

Test Pattern Image Data Flow (Figure 18)

25
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

2.8.3 Other printer control functions

Printer section
The CTL20 and PDC20 boards provide mechanical control, sensor control, and input/output control, and drive various motors and
solenoids. The CTL20 control program is downloaded from the scanner via the 1394 interface and battery-backup. Further, the printer
DC power supply is provided in the printer section to supply power to the printer and processor.
Processor power transmission section
This section consists of the AC power receiver and the processor control/device drive section, which is based on the CTP20 and PAC20
boards. The CTP20 board provides processor control. The control program is downloaded from the CTL20 board and battery-backed.

Printer (Printer/Processor Section) Conceptual Diagram (Figure 19)

FMC20 board CTL20 board RS422 CTP20 board

FMB20
Sensors

1394
FMA20 Sensors
Densitometer PAC20 board
PDC20 board

SOS signal Operation


AOM panel

Sorter
driver
LDD20 board
Paper transport section
Motor/fan/solenoid
Processor section
Laser Motor/fan/solenoid/heater
unit

Power supply unit (5 V/24 V)


Image flow Control signal Detector signal

26
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

3. P o w e r S u p p l y S e q u e n c e s a n d P o w e r S u p p ly System

3.1 Scanner Power Supply System/Timer Operation Sequence

Fuji's specially designed timer card is mounted in the PC for the scanner. This card starts the timer
operation of the scanner. (The scanner begins to operate in the same sequence at the press of the
scanner start button (green button).)
Upon receipt of the signal from the timer card, the PC turns ON. W hen +5 V power is received from
the PC via the CTB20 board, the 24 VDC auxiliary power in the power receiving section turns ON.
This auxiliary power turns ON the DC power supply system so that the Frontier scanner program is
downloaded into the GMB20 (GMC20) board.
At startup, the system checks whether startup has been triggered by the timer or start switch. If
startup is triggered by the timer, the system performs a startup message process.

Configuration of master control unit timer card (Figure 20)

To PC power
on switching
circuit
Scanner Clock IC
start switch To CN52 of
auxiliary power
(24VDC) via
CTB20 and
PWR20.
OR circuit

V CC 5V
Timer on signal (supplied from
(internal) PC when PC is
turned on)
BAT
(button battery)

27
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Scanner power on connection dialog (Figure 21)


AC 200V

Scanner main
circuit breaker Monitor power supply, 200 VAC
Main Control Unit
DC main power supply, 200 VAC

PC POWER SW

Power
Supply K1

AC 200V AC 200V
Mother Board

CTB20
Auxiliary CN1
PWR4 PWR20 power

CTB4 CTB3
PWR1 PWR3
Timer 3 1
1 17 1
Card
4 2 CN1
2 18 2 2 CN52
1

GND

Scanner component +24V


cooling fans
(24 VDC)

Scanner start switch

28
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

3.2 Printer Power Supply System/Printer Power ON/OFF-Related Circuit/Timer Operation Sequence

The printer has a battery and timer on the CTL20 board. The timer is used to start the printer. The timer operation time is transferred from the
scanner during post-operational checkout. It can also be set when you adjust the timer setting.

Circuit related to power on/off of printer (Figure 22)

RMTON
From
FMA20 Clock Correspondence PAC9 DC
IC with time on timer power

To PS1
RY2

To PS2
RY1

PAC5 RY3
5V_ON
I/O Distribution
To air pump
CP2
PAC8
24V_ON RY15

Circulation
CTL20 CP4
pump
PAC10 Replenishment
CP5 pump
AC200V
Spare
CP6
PAC7 Dryer fan
AC100V

CP1 SSR1
Printer power switch PAC6
Transformer
SSR2
PAC20

29
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

3.3 Remote ON/OFF control of scanner-printer

Remote ON/OFF control refers to control that starts up and shuts dow n the printer by linking it with
the startup of the scanner.

Remote Starts up Conceptual Diagram (Figure 23)

Input device (GLO20) Output device (FMA20)

1394LINK +3.3V
+3.3V
1394LINK
GPIO
GPIO[0]
+12VPS

+12VPS 1394 communication


cable PhotoMOS relay FMA1- 33 To CTL20

+12V power line /RMTON CTL20-33


PhotoMOS
relay
Photo-coupler

1) Remote ON operation
The PhotoMOS relay of GLO20 board is turned on after the scanner is started up and +12V in
the scanner side is supplied to the printer via IEEE1394 communication cable. As a result, the
photo-coupler inside FMA20 board on the printer side is turned on, the power on circuit on
PAC20 board is driven as /RMTON signal asserts the remote on circuit on CTL20, and DC/AC
power is supplied to respective sections inside the printer.
After the power is supplied to the printer and the device is activated, the PhotoMOS relay in the
FMA20 side is turned on and +12V is also supplied from the printer. Supply of +12V from the
scanner is turned off after several seconds.

2) Remote OFF operation


When the PhotoMOS relay is turned off on the printer side, power supply for the printer is shut
down as /RMTON signal negates the remote on the circuit in CTL20.

30
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

4. Main Control Unit Troubles

4.1 D r. Watson Error and Error Logging

This type of error basically occurs when a memory access rule is violated in the PC. More
specifically, it occurs when, for instance, the memory is improperly used by the scanner software
(Frontier software) or an overflow is caused by abnormal image processing calculations.
Substantial improvements are brought about by Version 5. W hen this type of error occurs, the
system records relevant information to indicate what Frontier software execution sequence or
calculation the encountered error occurred in. Therefore, when you view its error log, you can make
an error analysis. To view the error log, open Windows Explorer by performing a special procedure
from the maintenance menu and then copy "drwatson32.log" from the \W innt\System \ directory on
drive C to a floppy disk.

4.2 Blue Panic

This abnormality is basically attributable to a PC hardware problem. It is often caused by a defect or


poor contact (improper assembly) of the CPU, memory, or expansion card in the PC. Anyway, this
abnormality is found in the hardware check that is conducted by the PC before loading of the OS
(Windows NT). This abnormality may also occur when the PC memory is accessed during an
operator intervention. If this abnormality occurs, check to ensure that the units in the PC are in
proper contact. If this cure does not help, replace defective hardware. (This abnormality can be
cleared by replacing the memory or ensuring its proper contact.)

4.3 Startup Failu re or OS Error Occurrence

If startup is not achieved at the press of the start switch because an error occurs from the beginning
or while the W indows opening screen display process is in progress, it is likely that the OS is
damaged due to a certain hard d isk drive trouble. In this instance, the screen displays a message in
white characters on a black background. This problem may frequently be solved by reinstalling the
OS (Windows NT). It is worth trying if a substitute PC is not immediately available. This method
particularly works when a recently released PC (XL type) is used. If a hard BIOS error occurs, you
should replace the PC or take a remedial action in accordance with the on-screen message.

4.4 Keyboard or Mouse Freeze

This problem may often occur when the keyboard or mouse cable is disconnected, broken, or in
poor contact. Both the keyboard and mouse are connected to the PC via the serial ports. If the
keyboard or mouse is disconnected from the PC for some reason after its startup, it looks as if it is
frozen. If you encounter this phenomenon, you must re-establish the keyboard/mouse connection
and restart the PC. If a recently released PC (XL type) is used, it may not check or recognize the
connection when it restarts. Therefore, if such a PC is used, you must turn OFF the scanner circuit
breaker to shut off the entire power supply to the PC and then restart the PC. W hen a program
hangs up, the mouse and keyboard are mostly operative. If you encounter a hangup during the
execution of a certain operation, you can escape such a situation when you perform the emergency
shutdown procedure with the mouse or simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys to exit
the currently running or waiting application.

314.4 Keyboar
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

4.5 Network Error

In general, a network error is mainly caused by an improper connection to the DI controller or


telephone line. Therefore, you should first check for a disconnected cable and de-energized
modem or DSU. It is also well to remember that the network settings may be unexpectedly changed
for some reason. Therefore, you should check to ensure that the network settings are correct. You
should also keep in mind that the software can be damaged by a computer virus.

4.6 Various Communication Errors

Each component unit of Frontier has a control CPU. It has its own communication system to
exchange information. Main communications are outlined below:
- PC ↔ GMB20 (GMC20) (image processing section): A SCSI is used to exchange information for
various operating control purposes, send/receive images, and download programs.
- GMB20 (GMC20) ↔ CTB20 board: The RS422 serial interface is used to exchange information
including the data and control signals about the light source, lens, and carrier.
- GMB20 and GLO20 (scanner) ↔ FMA20 and CTL20 (printer)
The 1394 serial communications link is used to transfer print images, exercise print control,
control various states, and download programs.
- CTL20 ↔ CTP20 board: The RS422 serial interface is used to control the processor, establish
various status control communications, and download programs.
- GMB20 (GMC20) ↔ CCD20 board: The RS422 serial interface is used to exchange information
about scanning timing and others. Communication errors that may occur include offset or light
intensity adjustment errors, including X -1186 (Scan SH communication error), E -1130 (automatic
light intensity adjustment failure due to an excessive CCD output), and E -1131 (offset cancel
failure).

4.7 Software Upgrade and Various Parameters

Software program upgrade control is provided by an installer program stored on CD-ROM. For
installation purposes, the clean install, reinstall, upgrade, or downgrade procedure is performed, as
detailed below:
(1) Clean install
When an entirely new machine is manufactured or when the existing parameter cannot be
continuously used after PC replacement in the market, the default values about the parameters
and conditions possessed by the software are to be loaded. W hen you perform a clean install,
you must set up all the conditions anew. As regards the printer parameters, note the
mechanical fine adjustment value label attached to the printer door and enter the labeled
values. For the scanner, perform the post-CCD-replacement adjustment procedure.
(2) Reinstall
You are supposed t o perform a reinstall when the parameters can be entered from a floppy disk
after PC replacement. Basically, all the previous data parameters will be continuously used.
Therefore, you merely have to confirm the condition setup and make fine adjustments as
needed. Since the FUJIFILM folder usually exists on drive D, you cannot directly proceed to
perform a reinstall except when you replace the PC. However, you can perform a reinstall after
renaming the FUJIFILM folder.

32
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

(3) Upgrade
Basically, the software is to be upgraded step by step. Do not for example, attempt to upgrade
the software from the current version to a version that is three levels higher. More specifically,
you are allowed to upgrade the software from Version 4 to Version 6; however, you cannot
upgrade from Version 6 to Version 6. W hen you perform an upgrade, the system stores the
currently used software version after renaming it to "Old". Therefore, you can downgrade the
software from the installer CD-R to a version that was used before the last upgrade. Also, note
that a free hard disk space of more than 800KB is required because two software versions (old
and new) are to be left installed. If, for instance, a large number of B1 software templates are
installed to render the remaining free hard disk space inadequate, you cannot perform an
upgrade.
(4) Downgrade
To downgrade the software, use the downgrade (Ver. Down) application software on the CD-R.
When you downgrade the software, the software version renamed to "Old" in the last upgrade
is restored and made operative.

<Backup floppy disk>


The backup floppy disk is used to load parameters when you reinstall the software as explained
under "Upgrade". The data stored on the backup floppy disk is upward compatible (that is, the
backup floppy disk created with software version 6 can be used with software version 5). The
contents of the backup floppy disk are not introduced here because they were already described in
a news bulletin. Note, however, that the focus calibration data is t he most important backup data. If
the backup floppy disk cannot be read and the chart jig is not available, you can perform an install
from the floppy disk for another machine (in this case, however, you must make formal adjustments).
It was recently reported that a trouble was occasionally caused by an unreadable backup floppy
disk. The results of trouble analyses indicated that the employed floppy disk could not be read or
written onto because it was flawed. Therefore, clean the floppy disk drive with a cleaning floppy disk
before making a backup floppy disk, and exercise care not to flaw the backup floppy disk.

33
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

5. Image Problem Isolation Procedures and Remedies

5.1 When an Error Occurs

First, confirm the relationship between the encountered error and image problem. Then, eliminate
the cause of the error without regard to the image problem.

5.2 When No Error Occurs

Step 1: Determine whether the problem occurred on the SP side or LP side. For this purpose, the
execution of Procedures 1) to 4) is effective.
Step 2: If the scanner is suspected of having caused the problem, perform checkout with the
image processing section tester. However, the tester may indicate that two or more circuit
boards are faulty or fail to formulate a defect judgment. Therefore, you should perform the
following analysis procedures while using the tester.
When a reproducible image problem is encountered, isolate it by performing Procedures
1) to 11). If the encountered image problem is not reproducible, make an estimate with the
image problem samples.

1) When the printer is obviously faulty, make calibration and test pattern prints and examine the
results.
REFERENCE: Test pattern prints will be written into the FMB20 board by the CPU on the
printer's CTL20 board.

Normal → You can judge that the printer's FMB20 board read section and subsequent
components, part of the FMC20 board, AOM driver, and laser unit are normal. →
Proceed to perform Procedure 2).
Abnormal → The printer's FMB20 board and subsequent components may be faulty.
(1) The calibration print is abnormal.
→ The FMC20 board, AOM driver, or laser unit is abnormal.
If either the G color or B color is abnormal:
Interchange the G and B AOM driver input coaxial cables to check for a color
abnormality change and phenomenon change.
The abnormal color remains unchanged. → The AOM driver or subsequent
component is faulty.
The abnormal color changes. → The FMC20 board may be faulty.
NOTE: Resulting B/G print location changes are normal.
CAUTION: The R color cable cannot be repositioned even when the R color is
abnormal (the R signal serves as the SOS reference signal).
Return the AOM driver input coaxial cables to their original positions and then
interchange the G and B AOM driver output coaxial cables.
The abnormal color remains unchanged. → The AOM driver and preceding
components are normal. The other components may be faulty.
The abnormal color changes. → The AOM driver is faulty.

34
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Image Processing and Electrical Systems

(2) The calibration print is normal, but the test pattern print is abnormal.
→ You can conclude that the AOM driver and laser unit are normal. It is highly
probable that the FMC20 or FMB20 board may be faulty.

2) Perform the multiple-printing procedure from the scanner.


All the multiple prints are equally abnormal.
→ The FMB20, FMC20, and FMA20 boards in the printer may be faulty.
The multiple prints are not equally abnormal (or some prints are normal and the others are
abnormal).
→ The printer's FMB20 board and subsequent components (e.g., FMB20 board, FMC20 board,
AOM driver, and laser unit) may be faulty.

3) In both the vertical feed and horizontal feed modes, make prints at the same print size setting
while varying the paper size or make prints at differing print size settings.
The abnormality varies (in position, pattern, or degree). → The printer (FMA20, FMB20, and
FMC20 boards) may be faulty.
The abnormality remains unchanged (the image pattern's relative position remains the same).
→ The scanner may be faulty.

4) The abnormality arises whenever about 20 L size prints have been made. → The FMB20 board
may be faulty. The problem is attributable to a certain memory area.

5) Check whether the abnormality found on the obtained prints are also found on index prints.
Yes → The scanner (GFM20 board and subsequent components are normal), C CD, CCD20
board, CDS20 board, GFM20 board, and GMB20 (GMC20) board may be faulty.
No → The GFM board and subsequent components are suspected of being faulty. It is
conceivable that the GIP20, GMB20 (GMC20), and GLO20 boards may be faulty.

6) The non-image area of index prints is also abnormal.


→ The GIP20 board and preceding components are normal, including the GMB20 (GMC20)
board, GLO20 board, and 1394 interface cable.

7) Check the DSC print/negative print.


The DSC print is abnormal. → The GIP20 board and preceding components are normal (the
CCD, CCD20, CDS20, GFM20, and GIP20 boards are normal).
The DSC print is normal. → The GLO board and subsequent components are normal (the
GIS20 and GLO20 boards and the printer are normal).

8) There is an abnormality in the image (fine-scanned image) that is displayed on the monitor with
the red-eye correction. → The GFM20 board and preceding components may be faulty (the
CCD, CCD20, CDS20, GFM20, or GMB20/GMC20 board is faulty).

9) The abnormality is cleared when the carrier is replaced. → The carrier is faulty.

10) The abnormality is cleared when the film is changed. → The scanner and film may be faulty
(including the CCD, CCD20, CDS20, GIP20, GMB20/GMC20, and PC software).

11) The magnification of the abnormality changes when you change the print magnification (e.g.,
cropping). → The GFM20 board and preceding components may be faulty.

35
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

Film Carrier

1. Overview of Film Carrier Functions and Operations


1.1 Characteristics of Overall Configuration
- Information on negatives: The carrier reads only the information about perforation positions.
The optical information about barcode and other elements is read by the CCD.
- Carrier control: The CPU, which controls the carrier operation, is mounted on the CTB20 board
that is located on the console side of the scanner. Pulse motor and clutch drivers are mounted on
the circuit board within the carrier.
- Transport control: A 3-line CCD consisting of 3 colors (R, G, and B) is used to read image
information during film transport. Therefore, if the transport speed is not as specified, color
misalignment or black framing occurs.
- Film transport drive: A five-phase stepping motor is used for driving the film transport. A flat belt
transmission system is used to reduce the speed over three steps. A clutch is incorporated in the
deceleration section to change the deceleration ratio. Note, however, that the MFC10Y uses an
entirely different drive system (ball screw drive).
- Pitch correction value: The EEPROM inside the carrier has a coefficient named the pitch
compensation value for clutch and transport direction to ensure that the actual transport speed
agrees with the speed setting for scanning. This compensation value is determined after
measuring the transport speed during outgoing inspection with inspection lith film whose
perforation interval is known. This value is an important compensation value for the carrier. It
cannot be measured but can be changed by the scanner. The pitch compensation value 1
corresponds to a 0.1% speed change.
Menu 44Q/44R has the NC135Y/NC240Y pitch compensation value setup screen. However, do
not change the settings.

Pitch compensation value setup High speed Medium speed Low speed
Pre-scan *** *** ***
Fine scan *** *** ***

- Film transport speed: The NC135Y has a film transport speed of 2.5 to 190 mm/s. The NC240Y
has a film transport speed of 2 to 158.5 mm/s. The NC135AG/NC240AG carrier for F390 is
mechanically the same as the NC135Y/NC240Y carrier, but the capacity of the former is
increased so that the negative transport speed for fine scanning is raised by about 10%.
- Diffusion plate: The NC135Y, NC240Y, and MFC10Y carriers are equipped each with a diffusion
plate.

1.2 Operation Overview


- Scanner correction: When the carrier is set in position, a scanner correction is made. This
correction is made to uniform the brightness sensitivity (shading compensation). Whenever the
carrier is set in position with the machine turned ON (that is, at the beginning of each day's
operation), this correction is made for the carrier. It is also made when the carrier type is changed.
If the same carrier is set in position for a second time after power ON, only the simplified
correction is made (for confirmation purposes). This simplified correction differs from the scanner

36
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

correction that is to be made at the beginning of each day's operation. If any dirt is trapped in the
carrier, the information about the carrier containing dirt is read in the scanner correction process.
Therefore, if you encounter dirt-induced streaks, you must clean the carrier and then perform the
pre-operational checkout procedure for scanner correction.
- Pre-scanning: When you insert a film into the carrier, the pre-scanning process is first performed.
In the pre-scanning process, the entire length of a film roll is read as one image. The image
derived from pre-scanning is used to locate each image frame and determine the fine scanning
speed and other conditions by investigating the density, size, and other conditions required for
fine scanning. In addition, the barcode is read on an edge basis by detecting the film edge from
the pre-scanned image. Note that the 240 does not locate image frames but merely checks for
image frames because it can define the frame positions in accordance with the perforation.
- Image frame detection: The image frame positions of the 135 film are determined in accordance
with the correlation between the perforation position and motor clock signal.
- Image reading range: Differing CCD reading ranges are applied to pre-scanning and fine
scanning. In the pre-scanning process, the entire film width is read. In the fine scanning process,
only the image areas are read.
- Index print: Index print images are printed using fine-scanned images.
- Jam detection: Much stricter jam checkout is conducted than in the use of a conventional analog
carrier. Jam detection is based on the perforation interval. Jam detection occurs when the
elapsed time between the detection of one perforation and the next is more than two times the
specified perforation interval during NC135Y use (or five times during NC135S/NC135J use) or
1.05 times the specified perforation interval during NC240Y use (or 1.2 times during
NC240S/NC240J use).

1.3 NC135Y Carrier Structure (See the attached drawing for details of the structure.)
- The NC135Y consists of the following components:
Upper guide, take-up section, drive system, main board, soft nip mechanism, drive motor, driver
board, base, and ball catch
- The soft nip mechanism prevents images from being blurred (color misalignment) by releasing
the nips on only side of the second and third feed rollers in front and rear of the optical axis and
avoiding speed fluctuations caused by load changes when negatives enter or depart from the nip
roller section. Although the first feed is not soft-nipped, it does not cause any problem because
the shock caused by entry and departure is small due to limited nipping force.

First nip Second nip Third nip


0.27 kgf 1.0 kgf 1.0 kgf

37
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

"Soft nip operation sequence"


No soft-nip is performed during
Line CCD
pre-scanning. The second feed
roller nip is released after Read after inflection
Second feed roller
completion of pre-scanning, and
Third feed roller
the first frame is read as is in the First feed roller
fine scanning process (it is fed by
the third feed roller only). The
second feed roller is nipped Leading end detection

between the first and second Perforation


detection Dust removal roller
frames. The operation continues in
this manner all the way to the point
before the last frame. The third Check tape detection
feed roller nip is released at the Perforation detection

frame gap before the last frame and


the last frame is read as is (it is fed by the second feed roller only). In the standby state, both the
second and third feed roller nips are released.
- For soft nip mechanism assembly, the timing pulley phase adjustment needs to be made. The
soft nip mechanism is positioned by aligning the groove positions. The timing belt tension is
15 g to 20 g.
- The soft nip vertical transport mechanism (nip release) is based on a cam. A bearing is used as
the cam support.
- Sheet metal parts were formerly used in the supporting bracket for opening and closing the
upper guide. However, it was later replaced by shaped steel after the occurrence of a problem
in which it was deformed by shock and load from guide opening. As a result, a load of up to
8 kg or 9 kg can be normally supported although deformation was formerly caused by a load of
4 kg.
- The drive system tension is adjusted by rotating the belt and fixing it at the location where the
spring becomes stable. The final step requires caution because of its slipperiness owing to the
existence of small pulleys (transport system transmission belt decelerators).
- A switching mask is attached to the upper guide side to prevent flaring in a panoramic image.
The switching mask opens fully at the time of pre-scanning and moves the mask size
corresponding to the size of each frame during fine scanning. The right- and left-hand masks
are linked by the intermediate gear. If the marks on the intermediate gear and mask do not
match, it means that cogs are skipping.

38
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

1.4 NC240Y Carrier Structure (See the attached drawing for details of the structure.)
- Unlike the NC135Y, the NC240Y is not equipped with a soft nip mechanism but is provided with a
nest section. It also incorporates a magnet head/dummy head for reading magnetic information.
The NC240Y does not have a soft nip mechanism because there is a leader on the film leading
end so that the film leading end/trailing end cannot possibly enter or depart from a feed roller
during image reading.

First nip Second nip Third nip


1.0 kgf 1.0 kgf 1.0 kgf

- The drive system is the same as that of the NC135Y. However, the speed is changed by
changing the pulse rate of the transport motor.
- The nest section operation is indicated below (see the attached drawing for details).
The operator sets the cartridge in position. → The sensor detects the cartridge.
The cartridge is automatically fed inward.
The cartridge is locked at its stop position and then the drive is disengaged.
The cartridge shutter opens.
The nest section feed motor is driven to pull out the film.
When the predetermined amount of film is pulled out, the feed motor is de-energized, and the
feed roller on the console side unwinds the film from the cartridge. At this time, the detent torque
of the feed motor becomes the pull-out load. The torque limiters in the nest section and take-up
section absorb the difference between the transport speed and take-up/unwinding speed.
- No matter whether the NC135Y or NC240Y is used, the film dye may fade due to the light from the
light source if the film is halted for a period of longer than 2 seconds during exposure. Since the
APS film perforation interval is long, the NC240Y cannot achieve jam detection within 2 seconds
during a scan, which is conducted at a lower speed. Therefore, an encoder is mounted in the
take-up section to achieve jam detection independently of perforation detection.

1.5 MFC10Y Multiple Film Carrier


- With the mask set on the film slider, the film slider moves to read the film. Various film types can
be properly handled by changing the mask.
- The film slider is transported by a ball-screw feed mechanism. A metal slide bearing (not of a
phosphor bronze type or of an oil-impregnated type) is used as the linear guide. It generates an
abnormal sound unless the ball screw is adequately greased.
- A five-phase drive motor is employed. It is connected to the ball screw via a coupling.
- The leaf spring joining the ball screw and film slider helps to maintain the parallelism between the
slide shaft and ball screw.
- A two-phase PM motor is used for film transport. The connection to the film slider feed roller is
established by a gear train. The employed gear has a module of as small as 0.3. It fine-tunes the
mask position and adjusts the engagement between the film slider gear and console gear train.
The associated adjustment value is stored in the EEPROM within the carrier as the mask position
fine adjustment value.

39
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

1.6 Supplement
1) NC135Y
(1) Transport speed
Transport speed Pulley ratio Pulse rate Pulse resolution
Pre-scan and skip 190mm/s 2.46 (belt t = 0.6) 14910pps 12.8µm/pulse
Fine scan (1) 32.5mm/s 23.13 23940pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (2) 24.7mm/s 23.13 18200pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (3) 15.0mm/s 23.13 11050pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (4) 10.0mm/s 23.13 7370pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (5) 7.0mm/s 23.13 5160pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (6) 5.5mm/s 111.25 19490pps 0.282µm/pulse
Fine scan (7) 3.0mm/s 111.25 10640pps 0.282µm/pulse
Fine scan (8) 2.5mm/s 111.25 8860pps 0.282µm/pulse

(2) F/P switching (rack-and-pinion)


1-2 phase excitation 3.75° Pinion Z = 12 M = 0.4
Stopping Pulse Pulse number from
Mask size Pulse rate
precision resolution home position
L 24.9mm ±0.2mm 960PPS 0.157mm/Pulse 22 pulse (CCW)
H 21.0mm ±0.8mm 960PPS 0.157mm/Pulse 10 pulse (CCW)
P 14.3mm ±0.8mm 960PPS 0.157mm/Pulse 12 pulse (CW)
Pre 35.5mm ±0.8mm 960PPS 0.157mm/Pulse 56 pulse (CCW)
Chart 40.4mm ±0.8mm 960PPS 0.157mm/Pulse 72 pulse (CCW)

(3) Soft nip


2-2 phase excitation 7.5° Deceleration ratio 3
Pulse number from home position
Second nip Third nip Pulse speed Resolution
(CW)
Release↑ Release↑ Home position 480PPS 2.5°/Pulse
Release↑ Nip↓ 108 pulse 480PPS 2.5°/Pulse
Nip↓ Nip↓ 72 pulse 480PPS 2.5°/Pulse
Nip↓ Release↑ 36 pulse 480PPS 2.5°/Pulse

2) NC240Y
(1) Transport speed
Transport speed Pulley ratio Pulse rate Pulse resolution
Pre-scan 158.5mm/s 2.46 (belt t = 0.6) 12420pps 12.76µm/pulse
Fine scan (1) 20mm/s 23.13 14730pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (2) 14mm/s 23.13 10310pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (3) 10mm/s 23.13 7370pps 1.36µm/pulse
Fine scan (4) 6mm/s 111.25 21260pps 0.282µm/pulse
Fine scan (5) 4.5mm/s 111.25 15940pps 0.282µm/pulse
Fine scan (6) 4mm/s 111.25 14170pps 0.282µm/pulse
Fine scan (7) 3mm/s 111.25 10630pps 0.282µm/pulse
Fine scan (8) 2mm/s 111.25 7090pps 0.282µm/pulse

40
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

2. Associating the DX Code with the 135 Film Frame Position


As outlined under "Carrier Overview", the image position on film and the barcode information are
individually analyzed and determined in accordance with the image signal read by the CCD. For
image detection, center position determination, and barcode reading method, see "Section 4.
Frontier 350/370 Image Frame Detection and DX Code Detection."
In reality, the frame numbers read from the DX/FNS code are assigned to individual image frames.
The method of determining the frame numbers is summarized below.

2.1 Determining the Frame Positions


Pre-scanned images are used to determine the frame positions.
The center position of each frame is determined in accordance with the film leading end
encountered during pre-scanning.
Underexposed image frames such as a night scene image frame have indistinct image edges. In
such an instance, however, the image frame center is determined in accordance with the preceding
and following frames.

2.2 Analyzing the Barcode to Determine the Frame Number Position


Independently of framed images, each barcode is analyzed to obtain the written frame number and
determine the frame position. The barcode position is not the center of the barcode. It is the
position at which the barcode-indicated number (e.g., 6 or 6A) is written. The applicable standards
state that the frame number is to be positioned at a distance of 3 mm from the end of the FNS
barcode or 4 mm from the end of the extended DX barcode.

2.3 Making Up for Barcode Reading Deficiencies


If some barcodes cannot be read, they can be compensated for in accordance with the successfully
read barcode value and positions. This compensation is achievable because the barcodes are
written at intervals stipulated by the standards.

2.4 Determining the Frame Number for Each Frame Position


After the position of an image frame is determined as explained in Section 2.1, the system adopts
the closest frame number that is located within a range of ±19 mm from the frame center. The range
is limited to ±19 mm in consideration of an area preceding the "00" mark and an area following the
"E" mark.

2.5 Adjusting the Frame Numbering Style


If the frames are nearly centered with respect to the spacing intervals of the frame numbers, the
resulting frame number selections may alternate between a number with "A" and a number without
"A". This mixture of two types of numbers is corrected as indicated below:

Example) 5, 6A, 7 → 5, 6, 7

41
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

This adjustment feature is not exercised for image frames that are displaced or improperly spaced
by the camera (1/4 frame displacement or greater deviation).
Further, barcode reading errors are corrected. The system checks if the transition of detecting
frame numbers is sequential.

42
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

3. NC135Y/NC240Y Transport Troubleshooting Guide

3.1 NC135Y Transport Troubleshooting


If a transport failure occurs in the NC135Y, follow the Supplementary Feedback
Transport failure occurrence No. Question Answer
instructions set forth in the troubleshooting chart below.
A Occurrence frequency?
Before making inquiries about problems and remedies, fill Beginning of pre-scan
(between insertion and
out the Supplementary Feedback Column at right. Transport failure frequency? take-up)?
(Enter your answer in Supplementary End of pre-scan (24- to
Feedback Column A.) B 36-exposure roll trailing
end)?
Stop position? End of fine scan
(Enter your answer in Supplementary (between optical axis
Feedback Column B.) and insertion port)?

Feed rollers cleaned?

Film curled? How is the leading Perforations Splicing tape


end shaped? damaged? attached?

Leading end curl Trough-shaped Leading end bent or Leading end cut Damaged Normal splicing Heat-activated Edge splicing tape
smaller than 40 curl greater than collapsed? square? perforations tape attached? splicing tape attached?
mm? 7 mm? repaired? attached?

Correct the curl Correct or cut the Cut the leading end Insert the film into Remove the Cut off the Edge splicing tape
and print again. bent or collapsed square (with no the carrier with the splicing tape and heat-activated applied doubly?
Or, make prints leading end and perforation positioned repaired end then make prints. splice and then
at the cut end) and then
with the MFC. then make prints. make prints.
positioned inward. make prints.
Apply edge splicing
tape singly, and
then make prints.

If the encountered transport


failure is other than described
above, replace the carrier.

43
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

3.2 NC240Y Transport Troubleshooting Transport failure occurrence


Supplementary Feedback
If a transport failure occurs in the NC240Y, No. Question Answer
follow the instructions set forth in the A Occurrence frequency?
Transport failure frequency? Beginning of pre-scan
troubleshooting chart below. (Enter your answer in Supplementary (between insertion and
Before making inquiries about problems and Feedback Column A.) take-up)?
remedies, fill out the Supplementary Feedback End of pre-scan or
B
switchback?
Column at right.
Stop position?
(Enter your answer in Supplementary
Feedback Column B.) During fine scan?

Feed rollers and magnet/dummy


heads cleaned?

Lead end curled? How is the leading How is the cartridge? Dummy head soiled?
end shaped?

Is the curl smaller than Leading end bent? Cartridge door Cartridge inner flange Is the dummy head
28 mm when the broken? broken? soiled when several
leading end is pulled rolls are processed
out of cartridge? after cleaning?

Correct the curl and Correct or reshape Replace the cartridge N4 negative Negative processing
then print again. Or, the bend leading end or use strips to make processing solution squeegee roller
make prints with the and then make prints. soiled? deteriorated?
MFC. prints.

Change the N4 Replace the negative


negative processing processing squeegee
solution. roller.

If the encountered transport


failure is other than described
above, replace the carrier.

44
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4. Frontier 350/370 Image Frame Detection and DX Code Detection

4.1 Background
Image frame detection is conducted to
locate the frames on 135 film.

Normally, image frames are positioned at regular intervals as shown above. When the film consists
of properly positioned image frames only, image frame detection is easily accomplished. In reality,
however, there are various elements related to film, to be taken into consideration as explained in
Section 4.2, Relationship between Film Conditions and Frame Determination Factors. That is why
the image frame detection algorithm is complicated. One of the main roles of the image frame
detection algorithm is to search for elements other than image frames.

4.2 Relationship between Film Conditions and Frame Determination Factors


4.2.1 Fogged leading end
When film is loaded into the camera, (1) Frame C Frame B Frame A
the film leading end may be fogged.
(1) Since Frame A is not fogged, it
can be detected.
(2) Frame A is fogged. However, if
the fogged portion Frame A is not (2) Frame C Frame B Frame A
more than 25% of Frame A,
Frame A is recognized as an
image frame.
(3) Frame A is fogged. If the fogged
portion is more than 25% of (3) Frame C Frame B Frame A
Frame A, Frame A is not
recognized as an image frame.

4.2.2 Punched hole More than 25%

The film may have a punched hole.


(1) The punched hole is ignored as far as it is positioned away from image frames.
(2) If the punched hole is positioned
within Frame A and larger than 5 (1)
Frame C Frame B Frame A
mm in diameter, Frame A is not
recognized as an image frame
so that only Frame B and
subsequent frames are handled
as image frames. If the punched (2)
Frame C Frame B Frame A
hole is smaller than 5 mm in
diameter, the film stop position
cannot be determined. 35mm

45
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.2.3 Check tape


The check tape is used to collate negative reception envelopes with films. Check tape strips
having the same number are to be attached to the customer film and the associated negative
reception envelope. The check tape strip for the negative film is generally attached to the
beginning of the negative.
(1) Frame A and subsequent
frames can be recognized (1) Frame C Frame B Frame A
normally as image frames.
(2) When the check tape is
positioned at a distance of
more than 0.4 mm from
Frame A, Frame A is (2) Frame C Frame B Frame A
recognized as an image
frame.
(3) If the check tape is positioned
within Frame A, Frame A is
not handled as an image (3)
Frame C Frame B Frame A
frame so that Frame B and
subsequent frames are
recognized as image frames.

* It is necessary that each check tape strip measure at least 3 mm x 5 mm.

4.2.4 Splicing tape


(1) Frame A and subsequent
frames can be recognized (1) Frame C Frame B Frame A
normally as image frames.
(2) When the splicing tape is
positioned at a distance of
more than 0.4 mm from
Frame A, Frame A is
(2) Frame C Frame B Frame A
recognized as an image
frame.
(3) When less than 25% of 35mm

Frame A is covered by the


splicing tape, Frame A is
(3)
recognized as an image Frame C Frame B Frame A
frame. If 25% or more of
Frame A is covered by the 35mm
splicing tape, Frame A is not
handled as an image frame.

46
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.2.5 Leading frame overlap


Frames may overlap due, for instance, to a film winding failure in the camera.

(1) When the overlap of Frame A with


Frame B is smaller than 5 mm: (1) Frame C Frame B Frame A
Frame A is recognized as an
image frame.
Frame B is recognized as an
image frame.
(2) When the overlap of Frame A with (2) Frame C Frame B Frame A
Frame B is 5 mm or greater:
Frame A is recognized as an
image frame.
Frame B is not recognized as an
image frame.
* Frame C is recognized as an image frame subsequent to Frame A.

4.2.6 Underexposed leading frame


When an underexposed frame (extremely low in density) is encountered, it cannot easily be
distinguished from the neighboring
no-image area. If the leading frame is
(1) Frame C Frame B Frame A
underexposed, it cannot easily be
detected because the amount of
available information about the next
frame is limited. In such an instance,
the underexposed leading frame
(2) Frame C Frame B Frame A
position is determined after calculating
the position of the next frame.
(1) The film is stopped when the
trailing end of Frame A is
encountered.
(3) Frame C Frame B Frame A
(2) The film is backed over a fixed
distance from Frame B.
(3) The film is stopped when the
leading image area is encountered.

47
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.2.7 Intermediate frame pattern (underexposed/super-underexposed)


(1) Since the trailing edge of
Frame B is visible, the
film is stopped in (1) Frame D Frame C Frame B Frame A
accordance with the
trailing edge of Frame B.
(2) Since the leading edge of
Frame B is visible, the
film is stopped in (2) Frame D Frame C Frame B Frame A
accordance with the
leading edge of Frame B.
(3) Since the leading and
trailing edges of Frame B
are both indistinct, the (3) Frame D Frame C Frame B Frame A
film is advanced over a
fixed distance from the
preceding frame (Frame
A) to determine the
Frame B position.
(4) Frame D Frame C Frame B Frame A
(4) Since the leading and
trailing edges of Frame C
are both indistinct, the
film is advanced over a fixed distance from the preceding frame (Frame B) to determine the
Frame C position.

4.2.8 Intermediate frame pattern (super-overexposed)


If an intermediate frame is
super-overexposed, the area
surrounding the frame is (1)
Frame D Frame C Frame B Frame A
exposed as well so that the
frame looks larger than its
normal size.
When the density of the blur between frames is 0.30 or lower, the super-overexposed
intermediate frame is processed normally.
If the blur between frames is higher than 0.30 in density, the film stop position varies with the
situation (it is possible that the super-overexposed intermediate frame may be skipped(1)).

(1)
The situation varies with the preceding and following frames. When the preceding frame is normal, its information can be used to
determine the edge. If there are two or more successive super-overexposed frames, it is difficult to determine their edges.

48
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.2.9 Intermediate frame pattern (frame mark)


Some cameras attach an
external frame mark to (1)
Frame D Frame C Frame B Frame A
each frame. In this
instance, the edge without
the frame mark is used.
(1) Intermediate frame pattern (improper frame width)
(2) Intermediate frame pattern (halfway unexposed but processed)
(3) Intermediate frame pattern (halfway fogged)

49
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.3 Panorama Judgment Algorithm


4.3.1 Introduction
The analog Minilab carriers have only four area sensor values and cannot formulate detailed
judgments as explained below. The Frontier, on the other hand, uses its CCD to obtain the overall
frame information and can formulate detailed judgments. If the available time is not limited, the
percentage of successful panorama judgments can be raised further by the Frontier.

4.3.2 Currently encountered panorama frames


Unlike commonly used full-size frames, panorama frames are produced by masking the upper
and lower ends of a regular frame when a picture is taken with a camera.
However, the panorama frame width is not standardized. It varies from one camera to another.
The width of panorama frames encountered in the market greatly varies from 12.9 mm (minimum)
to 16.0 mm (maximum).
Further, panorama frames on some negatives cannot easily be distinguished from the others.

Half- 24mm
24mm
size ??mmPanorama Full-size 35mm

18mm 35mm 35mm

- Images generated outside the angular field of panorama view.


Date, hole in camera's panorama mask, frame mark, etc.
- Full-size image frames not easily distinguishable from panorama frames.
Pictures of a stage, outdoor pictures taken from an indoor location, pictures of fireworks, etc.
- Pictures of a subject at a distance that are taken with a flash at night.
- The panorama frame width varies from 12.9 mm (minimum) to 16.0 mm (maximum).
- Underexposed frames.
- Flare of panorama overexposed frames.

50
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.3.3 Images outside the panorama area


The following camera-specific extraneous items may be imaged outside the panorama area.
When these items are present, it is high probable that panorama frames can be erroneously
recognized as full-size frames.
Top-bottom symmetrical Protrusion at image center
circles

Protrusions at four
image corners

Date/time, etc. - The


print position varies with
the camera type. Some
cameras print this type of
information within the
panorama area.

Top-bottom symmetrical straight lines Extraneous images generated because of


the camera structure - The size, shape,
and position vary with the camera. It is
conceivable that there are many and
various extraneous images.

51
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.3.4 Overexposed panorama image frames


Owing to an unwanted reflection within the camera, a flare(2) may occur within an overexposed
panorama image frame although the affected portion should normally look flat.

4.3.5 Underexposed panorama image frame examples


If dark panorama frames are produced when, for instance, pictures are taken in a dark room, the
boundaries of such panorama frames are not detectable so that a bright central portion is
rendered conspicuous. These underexposed frames cannot easily be recognized as panorama
frames.

(2)
When a bright scene is photographed, an unwanted reflection may occur, giving a fogged appearance to the region outside the
panorama area.

52
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.4 135 Barcode Detection


4.4.1 Currently used barcodes FNS code
Two different barcodes exist: DX
code and FNS code. These codes
are positioned on both film edges as
latent image barcodes.
For DX/FNS code detection and
reading purposes, the barcode
positions of the negative are
checked to analyze the density of
DX code and FNS code data. DX code
In some cases, these codes cannot be read due, for instance, to fogging, notches, or absence.

Standard DX code
Information (12-bit) about product, film type, etc.

Information track

Timing track

Parity (even) Entry code

Exit code

Number of blacks and whites on the timing track, including "Entry" and "Exit" = 17

Extended DX code Information (12-bit) about product, film type, etc.

Frame number (7-bit)

Information track

Timing track

Exit code

Entry code Parity (even)

Number of blacks and whites on the timing track, including


"Entry" and "Exit" = 25

Figure 0-1: 135 Barcode Diagram

53
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.4.2 Basic idea


For DX/FNS code detection and reading purposes, the barcode positions on both negative edges
are checked to analyze the density of DX code and FNS code data.
The use case below briefly indicates the flow of barcode detection.

Barcode analysis

Data sampling process Sampling


barcode data

Binarization process
(for conversion to black and Binarization
white bars) barcode data

Sensor

DX code FNS code


detection process detection process

Minilab

4.4.3 Data sampling process


The barcode data is read in this process. The read sensor and read data accuracy vary with the
model. The table below indicates how they vary with the model.

Table 0-1: List of Barcode Reading Models


Model Frontier Analog

Line scan data from CCD Barcode sensor within carrier


Accuracy ¤ ∆

Remarks

Frontier
The information about one film roll is obtained from a CCD image. Since analysis can be
achieved with the data about a film roll, the accuracy is considerably higher than in the use of
conventional machines.

SFA Series
Two sensors are provided to read the barcodes on the "information track" and "timing track".
However, the two sensors are positioned close to each other. Therefore, the sensors pick up
the information about neighboring data to the detriment of data accuracy.

54
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.4.4 Binarization of tracks


The binarization process independently converts the density changes on the information and
timing tracks to black and white bars in the unit of a pixel. The tracking threshold method is used
for conversion to black and white bars.

Tracking threshold method


The distance between the leading ends of two neighboring barcodes is 19 mm. The upper
and lower threshold values are predefined for each 19 mm block. The moving average of the
current point of interest is then determined to set the threshold value (for black and white).
<Binarization (conversion to black and white)>
The threshold value is determined at each point. The data at each point is examined to check
whether it is greater (lower in density) or smaller (higher in density) than the threshold value.
When the data is greater than the threshold value, its point is set to be white. When the data
is smaller than the threshold value, its point is set to be black.

4.4.5 DX code detection


The DX code is divided into the timing track and information track.
In synchronism with the timing track,
0.75 mm to 1.26 mm:
the DX code determines whether the Information track
information track is a bar (black stripe) 2.06 mm to 2.6 mm:
Timing track
or a space (white stripe). This process
is called binarization. ENTRY
EXIT

The following data is obtained when the timing track and information track are sensed by the
barcode sensor:

350

300

250

200

150

100
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 101 111 121

Figure 0-2: DX Code Sampling Values


Timing track

The values 1 to 25 along the horizontal axis represent text (dust).


Information track
The values 26 to 40 along the horizontal axis represent the Entry code.
The values 40 to 95 along the horizontal axis represent the data section.
The values 100 to 108 along the horizontal axis represent the Exit code.

55
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

1) Standard DX code/extended DX code detection


When the number of timing track
regions (the number of blacks and Standard DX code
whites on the timing track including
Entry and Exit) reaches 17 (standard DX
code) or 25 (extended DX code), the
end of the DX code is checked.

17 regions

Extended DX code

25 regions

n Determining the front and back surfaces of the film and the positioning orientation of film
insertion
Determination is based on the Entry/Exit sequence and position. The figures below indicate
the DX code positions on a pre-scanning image. When frame numbers are read in ascending
order as is the case with Ez, the positioning orientation of film insertion is forward.

Reverse, front Forward, back Reverse, back Forward, front

56
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

2) When the DX code cannot be read


If a DX code reading failure occurs, its cause is memorized. The cause of the reading failure
is classified as one of the following three types and then memorized:
- Fogged
- Notched
- Absence of barcode (parity error and barcode length error included)

Fog
Found Not found
Notch
Found Classified as being fogged Classified as being notched
Not found Classified as being fogged Classified as the absence of barcode

Fog found : The cause is classified as being fogged if at least one case of fogging is found
during the fog detection sequence.
Notch found : The cause is classified as being notched if at least one notch is found during
the edge detection sequence.

57
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.4.6 FNS code detection


Unlike the DX code, the FNS code
does not distinguish between the FNS code
Frame number
timing track and information track.
Information track
The FNS code can be divided into the
Timing track
Entry track, information track, and Exit
track.
Entry code Exit code

Number of blacks and whites including


Entry and Exit = 13

The figure below shows the data obtained when the FNS code is sensed.
The two lines in the figure represent two different output values that are obtained because the
employed reading method is the same as for the DX code. You may consider that the overlapping
line portions represent FNS code and that the remaining portions represent text or dust.

4 5 0

4 0 0

3 5 0

3 0 0

2 5 0

2 0 0
1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 1 0 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 6 1

Figure 0-3: FNS Code Output Values

The values 1 to 60 along the horizontal axis represent text (dust).


The values 61 to 70 along the horizontal axis represent the Entry code.
The values 71 to 120 along the horizontal axis represent the data section.
The values 121 to 130 along the horizontal axis represent the Exit code.

58
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Film Carrier

4.5 135 Perforation Detection


Currently used perforations
Equally-spaced holes called perforations are provided in the upper and lower edges of film to
ensure that the film is properly transported within the camera.

The Minilab carrier uses these perforations for the following purposes:
- Film jam detection during film transport
- Frame position fine adjustment
- Frame position determination during backward film transport

FNS code

DX code

59
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

NC135Y Parts Arrangement Diagram


Fine-scan solenoid clutch (1/23.13)
Pre-scan/skip solenoid clutch (1/2.46) Fine-scan solenoid clutch (1/111.25)
Connector

Main circuit board

Film transport motor

Pressure cover open/close sensor

Check tape sensor

Perforation sensor

Leading-end sensor

Dirt removal roller


Take-up section

Scan timing sensor

First feed roller

Status Second feed


indicator LED
Third feed roller roller
Soft nip motor
Transport motor driver Nip drive origin sensor

LHP drive motor


LHP motor origin sensor
Check tape sensor/scan timing sensor
Perforation sensor
Leading-end sensor

60
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Fine-scan solenoid clutch (1/23.13) Second feed roller Connector


NC240Y Parts Fine-scan solenoid clutch (1/111.25) Third feed roller
Magnet head (C side) Read/White Door open/close sensor

Arrangement Diagram Door open/close motor


Pre-scan/skip solenoid clutch (1/2.46) Magnet head (P side) Read/White Spool motor

Chucking sensor/
Transport motor VEI sensor
Dummy head
Perforation sensor
light emitter

TAP sensor light emitter

Take-up section

Magnet head board (White)


(Upper guide)

Jam clearing knob


Transport motor driver

Strips guide

Status indicator LED

Main circuit board


First feed
Cartridge motor
Transport status sensor roller
Pressure cover open/close sensor
IPI sensor Cartridge sensor
Magnet head board (Read)
(Upper guide) Cleaning roller Cartridge holder

61
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and


Remedies

1. Paper Jamming Errors and Error Detection Basis

Number Indication Error detection basis


W-2401 The paper jammed between (1) Error detection occurs if the D541 sensor does not detect a paper leading end within 5
the upper cutter section and seconds after the paper pulled out of the upper magazine is cut.
middle side door section ((4)). (2) Error detection occurs if the D541 sensor detects a paper leading end when no paper
detection should occur.
W-2402 The paper jammed between (1) Error detection occurs if the D552 sensor does not detect a paper leading end (if the
the lower cutter section and status does not change from the no-paper state to the paper-found state) within 6
lower side door section ((2)). seconds after the paper pulled out of the lower magazine is cut.
(2) Error detection occurs if the D552 sensor detects a paper leading end when no paper
detection should occur.
W-2403 The paper jammed between (1) Error detection occurs if the D541 sensor does not detect a paper leading end within 5
the lower side door section seconds after paper leading end detection is achieved by the D552 sensor.
and middle side door section (2) Error detection occurs if the D541 sensor does not detect a paper leading end within 5
((4)). seconds after paper cutting in situations where the paper size is such that the paper
leading end passes through the D552 sensor upon completion of paper pullout (where
the feed length is greater than 343 mm when the paper is pulled out of the lower
magazine).
W-2404 The paper jammed between (1) Error detection occurs if the D560 sensor does not detect a paper leading end within 4
the middle side door section seconds after paper leading end detection is achieved by the D541 sensor.
and upper side door section (2) Error detection occurs if the D560 sensor detects a paper leading end when no paper
((5)). detection should occur.
(3) Error detection occurs if the D560 sensor does not detect a paper leading end within 4
seconds after paper cutting in situations where the paper size is such that the paper
leading end passes through the D541 sensor upon completion of paper pullout (where
the feed length is greater than 273 mm when the paper is pulled out of the upper
magazine).
W-2405 The paper jammed between (1) Error detection occurs if the D561 sensor does not detect a paper leading end within 3
the upper side door section seconds after paper leading end detection is achieved by the D560 sensor.
and exposure section ((5)). (2) Error detection occurs if the D561 sensor detects a paper leading end when no paper
detection should occur.
W-2406 The paper jammed between (1) Error detection occurs if the D571, D572, or D573 sensor in the processor entry unit
(1) the exposure section and does not detect a paper leading end within 25 seconds after paper leading end
(2) distribution section ((6)). detection is achieved by the D561 sensor. --- The displayed error number is suffixed
(3) by "(1)".
(2) Error detection occurs if the D571, D572, and D573 sensors detect a paper leading
end in an order differing from the predefined one during multiple-path distributive
paper transport. --- The displayed error number is suffixed by "(2)".
(3) Error detection occurs if the D571, D572, or D573 sensor detects a paper leading end
when no paper detection should occur. --- The displayed error number is suffixed by
"(3)".
W-2601 The paper jammed in the A paper discharge is detected by the D771, D772, and D773 sensors in the dryer exit unit.
processor ((7)(8)). Error detection occurs if the paper to be discharged next is not discharged within 4
minutes and 30 seconds.
If the discharged number of prints differs from the specified one in the continuous printing
mode, error detection occurs after the last print is discharged.

NOTE 1: When the front-rear spacing interval between prints is greater than about 6 mm, the D771, D772, and D773 sensors conclude
that an inter-paper gap is encountered. If the spacing interval is smaller than about 6 mm, the sensors conclude that the
encountered print is continuously detected even if paper strips do not overlap. Error W -2601 (7)(8) then occurs because the
detected number of prints differs from the actual number.
NOTE 2: The suffixes (1), (2), and (3) for Error W-2406 are not to be recorded in the error log. When Error W-2406 error occurs, you
must note the displayed suffix (1), (2), or (3).

62
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

2. Relationship between D562 Sensor in Subscanning Unit and Distribution

The D562 sensor performs three triggering functions. Since the D562 is a trigger sensor, it does not
cause an error even when it fails to achieve detection. However, such a detection failure may incur a
distribution failure, which causes Error W2406.

(1) Laser exposure start trigger


- Starts the laser exposure process when XX pulses are generated after the D562 sensor
detects a paper leading end. (The value "XX" varies with the image write start position fine
adjustment.)
(2) Subscanning unit soft nip trigger
- Starts an up-down soft nip operation of the subscanning exposure roller. In sequence (2)
below, the D561 sensor functions as a trigger.
[1] The second nip roller begins to descend 100 ms after paper leading end detection by the
D562 sensor.
[2] The first nip roller begins to ascend 230 ms after paper leading end detection by the D561
sensor.
[3] The paper is backed to the standby position 210 ms after paper leading end detection by
the D562 sensor.

(3) Distribution section suction up/down transport trigger


- The suction section performs a pre-descent operation (descends one step and then stops)
when a predetermined period of time elapses after paper leading end detection by the D562
sensor.
- The suction section starts descending with the belt transport stopped when a period of 60 ms
elapses after paper leading end detection by the D562 sensor.

63
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

3. Printer Section Sensor Arrangement Diagram

Microswitch
Photoelectric switch
Motor
Solenoid
Temperature sensor
Photo-interrupter
Fan

64
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

4. Precautions for Clearing Paper Jam Messages

Two or more paper jam messages may be generated in some cases. In such an instance, two or
more jam message screens are thoroughly superposed. If, for instance, a paper jam message
comes into view at the click of the "OK" button after the first paper jam message is displayed, the
later-displayed message relates to the fundamental error.

Example:

1) Click the OK button to clear the W2601 (7)(8) message.

W2601(7)(8)
OK
W2601(7)(8)

2) If another paper jam error message appears, it relates to


the fundamental error that occurred earlier.
W2406(6)-(2)
OK

Error checks are conducted at various paper passage processes. If an error occurs at a certain passage
point, a second error often occurs at the next passage point. In this instance, the message about the first
error appears on the display and then the message about the second error appears over the first one.

65
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

5. Frontier 350/370 Paper Jamming Countermeasures [for Operator]

If the W-2406 or W-2601 paper jamming error occurs, take the following corrective measures:

<W-2406> Paper Jammed in Printer Section (6) (The printer section paper transport stops the moment this error occurs.)

1) Confirm the displayed error number and description and then press - The error message disappears from the scanner section.
the [START] key on the operation keyboard.
2) Open the distribution section door, observe the inside to locate - When you close the door, the printer section is initialized.
visible paper, and then close the distribution section door. - Upon completion of initialization, the following message
IMPORTANT: appears:
When this error occurs, the distribution section may stop operating. "W-2411 Paper remains in printer. Remove paper."
If the distribution section stops in such a manner, it cannot be lifted
up. Therefore, be sure to effect initialization.
3) Open the distribution section door, lift the distribution section, and
remove the paper from the belt section.
Checkout
(1) Remove and reinstall the P1 crossover rack.
(2) Clean the vacuum cups in the distribution section.

<W-2601> Paper Jammed in Processor Section (7), (8) (The printer paper transport stops the moment this error occurs.)

1) Confirm the displayed error number and description, note down the - The error message disappears from the scanner section.
number of papers indicated in the message "XX sheets remain in NOTE 1: The displayed number of papers indicates the
processor", and then press the [START] key on the operation total amount remaining in the printer and
keyboard. processor sections.
NOTE 2: If prints overlap in the dryer rack or come out at
short intervals, two or more prints may be
counted as one to incur a paper jamming error.
2) Click "Processor Start (2)" under "Printer Op (5)" on the scanner - Prints positioned between the paper jam and dryer
menu bar. section are discharged to the tray.
IMPORTANT: NOTE 1: The processor drive comes to an automatic stop
If any abnormal sound is generated during processor drive, in about 4 minutes and 30 seconds.
immediately open the processor cover and stop the drive (see NOTE 2: If the W-2603 error message appears, remove
Section 7.7 of the Applied Operating Instructions volume of the prints from the dryer exit unit and then start the
Instruction Manual). drive.
3) While the processor is being driven, open the distribution section - After the message "Initializing" is displayed, the following
door, observe the inside to locate visible paper, and then close the message appears:
distribution section door. "W-2411 Paper remains in printer. Remove Paper."
4) Open the distribution section door, lift the distribution section, remove
the paper from the belt section, and return the distribution section and
its door to their original positions.
5) Check whether the total amount of prints discharged to the tray and
the paper removed from the distribution section agrees with the
recorded amount.
6) If the total amount is smaller than the recorded one:
- Proceed as directed in Section 7.7 of the Applied Operating
Instructions volume of the Instruction Manual.
When the total amount agrees with the recorded one:
- Remove and reinstall all the crossover racks.
- Clean the dryer entry rack if it is soiled.
- Clean the PS rack rollers if they are soiled.

CAUTION 1: When you remove paper from the distribution section exit, move it straight in the direction of transport. See Section 7.6 of
the Applied Operating Instructions volume of the Instruction Manual.
CAUTION 2: When installing the crossover racks, properly push them into their positions.

66
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

6. Paper Jam Check List - W2406 (6) Sheet A


(Errors occurring between D561 and D57x)
Usage: Refer to this sheet (Sheet A) and locate the error in the distribution section in accordance with the distribution section error
occurrence condition (phenomenon). If you cannot locate the error, use Sheet B.

Explanation: Sheet A merely furnishes the information about probable causes of errors attributable to the distribution section. If Sheet A
does not help, the other sections are attributable to the error. Therefore, see Sheet B and conduct overall checks by
examining the other sections as well as the distribution section. These two different sheets provide a two-step
troubleshooting guide in order to provide effective solutions to various problems ranging from "simple troubles" to
"complicated troubles".

[Check points for customer inquiries]


Action required of dispatched Impor-
No. Condition check Response to user
engineer tance
W-2406 (1) error If prints can be made by clearing jammed paper, resume the Check the D571, D572, and
operation because there is no problem. If the problem D573 sensors.
1 recurs, it is attributable to a faulty paper sensor. (1) Sensor I/O check
(2) Sensor corrosion check
(3) Sensor contact check
W-2406 (2) error Give us detailed information for identifying the problem (1) Replace any defective
cause. circuit board.
(1) If the problem occurs at the beginning of a day's (2) Replace the magazine
operation or the precut paper is used, it is conceivable spool.
that the circuit protector is tripped. (3) Adjust the distribution
2 (2) If the problem occurs with 89 mm wide paper, the position.
problem is attributable to a magazine paper pullout
failure.
(3) If the problem occurs only with a feed length of 82.5
mm, the problem is attributable to a vacuum failure of
the distribution section.
W-2406 (3) error Previously jammed paper remains. Effect initialization
3 (opening the distribution door and closing the paper removal
door) before using the machine.
When the W -2406 error message is cleared The problem cause is indicated by the message about the
by clicking the "OK" button from the scanner error that occurred immediately before the W-2406 error.
4 ¡
monitor, another error message such as Take a remedial action for such a previous error.
W-2405 or W-2601 appears.
The sorter received prints that should have The problem is attributable to a faulty solenoid valve. Use Replace any defective solenoid
5
followed the paper remaining in the printer. the non-distribution mode (45B) until the engineer visits you. valve.
The sorter received a printed paper overlap. This is a trouble that disables the distribution function. Use Perform operational checkout of
6 Overlapping prints are displaced about 86 the non-distribution mode (45B) until the engineer visits you. the M571.
mm widthwise from each other.
The sorter received a printed paper overlap. The problem is attributable to a vacuum system failure. Use Check the vacuum system.
7 Overlapping prints are not displaced the non-distribution mode (45B) until the engineer visits you.
widthwise from each other.
When the distribution section door is opened, It is conceivable that processor drive is not properly Check the torque limiter for the
8 wrinkled paper is found in the upper conveyor transmitted. The engineer will visit you immediately. gearbox unit. Check whether
belt section. the processor drive motor runs.
The W -2406 (x) error occurs even when the The engineer will visit you immediately. Check the subscanning unit and
9 ¡
non-distribution mode is chosen. unloading section.

[Engineer check list]


Impor-
No. Condition check Action 1 Action 2
tance
1. The distribution section operates upon initialization but comes to a stop due to an error. Or it does not operate and an error occurs.
The D575 home position sensor is faulty. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the If the sensor is defective,
1-1 sensor operates depending on whether its light path is replace it.
blocked by paper.
1-2 With a tester, check CTL u90 pin 3 (reference).
The SEL01 or SEL02 harness is Check whether the frame end face connector is connected. Reconnect the connector.
1-3
disconnected.
The M572 motor is not rotating. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the motor If the motor is defective, replace
1-4 ¡
operates normally. it.
2. The distribution section emits an abnormal sound during initialization, and the machine comes to a stop due an error.
Foreign matter is in the vacuum unit. Open the distribution section door, turn OFF the interlock Remove any foreign matter or
2-1 switch, and check whether the vacuum unit cam can be replace the unit.
rotated one full turn.

67
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

W2406 (6) Sheet A [Engineer check list] (second page)


The M571 harness is strained. Open the distribution section door, turn OFF the interlock Check or replace the harness.
switch, and rotate the vacuum unit cam until the lowered
2-2 ¡
position is reached to check whether there is play on the
M571 motor harness.
Previously jammed paper is not completely Open the distribution section door and remove the Remove the jammed paper.
2-3
removed. remaining jammed paper.
The vacuum unit is not properly latched. Check whether the vacuum unit is locked into the Properly set the vacuum unit in
2-4
matchmark position (∆). its position.
The vacuum unit hanging spring is out of Open the distribution section and check whether the spring Install the spring.
2-5
position. (P/L 15-01, 388D938081).
The belts are damaged or out of position. Check that the right- and left-hand belts are properly Correct the belt positions.
2-6
positioned and not damaged. Replace any damaged belt.
The operation is obstructed by a hose. Move the vacuum base to check whether the hose (P/L Properly install the hose.
2-7
16-24, 372D890621) interferes with neighboring parts.
The inter-paddle spring is out of position. Open the distribution section and check whether the spring Replace the spring.
2-8 (P/L 15-30, 388D938237A) is properly engaged between
the paddles.
The paddles come into contact with the Move the distribution section paddles to check whether they Replace the screws (P/L 15-48,
2-9 screws on the shaft support bracket (retainer come into contact with the screws. 310D938262). General Deltight
for four slide shafts). screws must not be used.
The vacuum cup base does not properly Turn OFF the interlock switch. Move the vacuum base Clean and regrease the slide
2-10 slide. forward or rearward and then release it to check whether it shaft in the sliding section or ¡
is smoothly returned by spring action. replace the vacuum unit.
3. In the home position detection sequence of the initialization process, an error occurs because the direction of transport is CW as viewed
from the distribution door section (moving away from the home position) or the transport does not operate at all.
The D574 home position sensor is faulty. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the If the sensor is defective,
3-1 sensor properly detects the home position and a position replace it.
away from the home position.
3-2 With a tester, check CTL u90 pin 5 (reference).
The SEL01 or SEL02 harness is Check whether the frame end face connector is connected. Reconnect the connector.
3-3
disconnected.
The M571 harness is disconnected. Check the harness connection. Also, check that the motor Replace the harness or motor.
3-4
base harness is properly connected.
The M571 motor is not running. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the motor If the motor is defective, replace
3-5 ¡
properly operates. it.
4. When you open the distribution section door, remaining paper is exposed to view. It seems that the paper is stopped due to a sudden stop of
the drive. --- The machine is brought to an emergency stop because paper detection is not accomplished in a predefined path order.
The paper is detected by a wrong sensor From the slit in the dryer entry rack cover, observe the Replace the unloading unit.
4-1 because it is obliquely transported in the squeegee rack to check whether the paper is obliquely
¡
paper distribution sequence. transported.
4-2 Check the height of the upper conveyor belt (11.4±1 mm). Adjust the belt height.
The interlock switch is inadvertently turned Same as left. Remove the paper.
4-3
OFF.
The D571/D572/D573 sensor is erroneously Conduct an I/O check to determine whether the sensor is If the sensor is defective,
4-4
activated. defective. replace it.
4-5 Check whether the harness is properly connected.
Previously jammed paper is not completely Open the distribution section door and remove the Remove the jammed paper.
4-6
removed. remaining jammed paper.
5. When you open the distribution section door, wrinkled paper is found in the upper conveyor belt and processor entry conveyor belt sections
or superposed prints are exposed to view.
5-1 An abnormality exists in the upstream portion Check whether backprintings are warped. Refer to the associated
of the transport section before the distribution Check whether paper edges are damaged in a section troubleshooting manual.
5-2
section. upstream relative to the distribution section.
An abnormality exists in the upstream portion Check whether partially unexposed prints are discharged to The subscanning unit is
of the transport section before the distribution the sorter. abnormal. Refer to the
5-3
section. associated troubleshooting
manual.
The distribution section is abnormal. From the slit in the dryer entry rack cover, observe the Replace the unloading unit.
5-4 squeegee rack to check whether paper strips are obliquely
¡
transported or superposed.
5-5 Check the height of the upper conveyor belt (11.4±1 mm). Adjust the belt height.
5-6 The processor section is abnormal. Check for a paper jam in the P1 crossover section. Remove the jammed paper.
Check whether the P1 crossover rack is properly set. Set the crossover rack in
5-7
position.
Visually check whether the processor shutter is properly See that the shutter can be
5-8 lowered. smoothly moved by hand (clean
or replace the parts).
The solenoid valve is broken. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the If the solenoid valve is defective,
5-9
solenoid properly operates. replace it.

68
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

W2406 (6) Sheet A [Engineer check list] (third page)


Previously jammed paper is not completely Open the distribution section door and remove the Remove the jammed paper.
5-10
removed. remaining jammed paper.
The vacuum cups are soiled. Visually check whether paper dust is deposited on the Clean the vacuum cups.
5-11
vacuum cups.
The vacuum cups are cracked, broken, or Check whether each vacuum cup can retain a load of at Replace the vacuum cup
deformed. least 260 gf (fifteen thicknesses of 3R-size print paper can assembly.
5-12
be used as the load). Also, check whether the vacuum cups
are cracked, broken, or deformed.
6. When you open the distribution section door, paper strips are found to be overlapping in a line between the subscanning unit and
distribution section.
Foreign matter is trapped in the vacuum unit. Open the distribution section door, turn OFF the interlock Remove any foreign matter.
6-1 switch, and check whether the vacuum cup base of the Replace the unit if it is defective.
vacuum unit moves.
The M571 harness is disconnected. Check the harness connection. Also, check that the motor Replace the harness or motor.
6-2
harness is properly connected.
The solenoid valve is broken. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the If the solenoid valve is defective,
6-3
solenoid valve properly operates. replace it.
The vacuum unit is not properly latched. Check whether the vacuum unit is locked into the Properly set the vacuum unit in
6-4
matchmark position (∆). its position.
The pump is not running. Conduct an I/O check (45A) to determine whether the pump If the pump is defective, replace
6-5
properly operates. it.
The distribution section main body is not Check the hose connection. Ensure that the hose is properly
6-6
connected to the hose nozzle on the frame. connected.
The vacuum cups are soiled. Visually check whether paper dust is deposited on the Clean the vacuum cups.
6-7
vacuum cups.
The vacuum cups are cracked, broken, or Check whether each vacuum cup can retain a load of at Replace the vacuum cup
deformed. least 260 gf (fifteen thicknesses of 3R-size print paper can assembly.
6-8
be used as the load). Also, check whether the vacuum cups
are cracked, broken, or deformed.
7. When you open the distribution section door, no paper is found in the printer section.
After completion of paper distribution, the last From the slit in the dryer entry rack cover, observe the Replace the unloading unit.
7-1 paper is obliquely transported and detected squeegee rack to check whether the paper is obliquely
¡
by the sensor assigned to a different path. transported.
7-2 Check the height of the upper conveyor belt (11.4±1 mm). Adjust the belt height.
The paper is trapped under the belt. Remove any torn pieces of paper from the underside of the Remove the paper.
7-3
belt.

69
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

7. Paper Jam Check List - W2406 (6) Sheet B

Usage: First refer to Sheet A and locate the error in the distribution section in accordance with the distribution section error occurrence condition (phenomenon). If Sheet A does
not help, use this sheet (Sheet B).
Explanation: Sheet A merely furnishes the information about probable causes of errors attributable to the distribution section. If Sheet A does not help, the other sections are attributable
to the error. Therefore, see Sheet B and conduct overall checks by examining the other sections as well as the distribution section. These two different sheets provide a
two-step troubleshooting guide in order to provide effective solutions to various problems ranging from "simple troubles" to "complicated troubles".

Visual
Measure
Name of Unit Suspected Cause Item(s) to Check Inspec- Countermeasure
-ment
tion

W2406 (1)
Magazine to cutter sections

Width guide ¡ If the width guide is too narrow, the feed load Use the paper to check whether the width guide is too narrow (see under ¡ Adjust the width guide with the paper (see Minilab Technical Information
increases, thereby reducing the cutting interval and "Paper Magazine Paper Width Guide Check and Adjustment" in Minilab MTI No. ED045).
generating short paper strips (which exceed a normal Technical Information MTI No. ED045).
deviation of about 1 mm). As a result, the paper jams
in the distribution section.

Spool ¡ The spool is tilted. The resulting load prevents the Check whether the spool is tilted. ¡ Replace the spool. Correct the bend in the L-shaped bracket.
paper from being properly cut.

Splice detection sensor The splice processing signal line is adversely affected Check whether the line is caught by the cutter cover. To run this check, ¡ Remove the cover (P/L 04-20) and see that the harness (34) is not
by noise so that erroneous splice detection occurs. pull the harness to determine whether it can move. caught.

With the sensor covered with paper, conduct an I/O check (45M) to check ¡ With a clean cloth, wipe the LED and PT lens sections clean.
for improper detection. If the sensor response unexpectedly varies,
visually check whether the sensor is soiled by dirt or paper dust.

Check whether the harnesses are positioned apart from each other to ¡ Ensure that the harnesses are positioned apart from each other (see
provide increase noise immunity. (Check whether a ferrite core is Minilab Technical Information MTI No. ED154).
attached to the end of the CTL17 connector.)

Mixed use of Japan and The Japan type paper is loaded. The paper core does When the paper is set on the spool, check whether the paper wobbles. ¡ Properly set the spool. Use the correct paper.
export types not match the ring so that the paper wobbles and
cannot be pulled out.

Transport

Transport door (upper One or more transport doors are half open so that the Check whether the doors are half open (paper backprintings may often ¡ Close the doors in such a manner that they are attached to the right- and
side/middle side/lower paper is obliquely transported. Paper strips then be warped). left-hand magnet catches.
side door) overlap due to improper spacing intervals.

Roller The transport force is reduced by paper dust on the Check whether paper dust is deposited on the rollers. ¡ With a cloth moistened with the MC100, wipe the rollers clean.
rollers so that paper strips overlap.

Speed adjustment If the nip is not properly released, the paper strips Conduct an I/O check (45M) to determine whether the nip release ¡ If the operation is not stable, switch to a bearing type (only applicable to
section overlap due to a transport failure. mechanism (P/L 09-A01) operates normally. LP1500 SC units with Serial Numbers 167 and 173 to 202 and LP2000
SC unit with Serial Number 201).

Width guide The paper does not normally enter the width guide. Note the backprintings to check whether the amount of skew (left/right ¡ ¡ Adjust the cutter position and white border to optimize the printing
The paper strips then overlap due to a transport failure. differential) is greater than 2 mm. position.

Disengaged width guide ¤ The width guide belt is disengaged or about to be Observe the positional relationship between the belt and pulley. Move ¡ ¡ Remove the unit, reassemble the parts, and reinstall the unit.
drive belt disengaged. the width guide to check for improper motion.

70
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Sub-scanning

D561/D562 sensor The W-2411 message ("There is paper in the printer") Gently push the bracket (P/L 10-14) by hand and conduct an I/O check ¡ Replace the LED (P/L 10-51, 113C889853A) and PT (P/L 10-09,
malfunction appears due to a detection failure. (45M) to determine whether the results of D562's paper detection are 110A8516840).
stable.

Skewing or cut small The resistance is increased by a belt skew. The paper Check whether the belts (P/L 10-96 and P/L 11-18) skew. ¡ Replace the belt (P/L 10-96 or P/L 11-18).
belt/large belt strips then overlap due to a transport failure.

Nonuse of Teflon guide If Teflon coating is not applied to the guide, the paper Check whether Teflon coating is applied to the surface of the ¡ Replace the guide (P/L 10-28) or unit.
involving a short feed length (e.g., 117 x 82.5) is subscanning guide (P/L 10-28). (LP1500 SC units having Serial
variously fed and cannot be vacuum-retained. Numbers 311 and above and LP2000 SC units having Serial Numbers
152 and above are already modified at factory.)

Check whether the suction position is correct (see under "Stop Waiting ¡ Make adjustments as directed under "Stop Waiting Time". If the
Time " on page 49 of the Service Manual Third Edition). adjustments do not help, replace the subscanning unit.

Unloading

Broken bearing of φ 12 ¡ If the central bearing of the crown shaft is damaged, Check whether the bearing (P/L 18-23, central) is damaged. (Tertiary ¡ Replace the part (Part No. 898C938628/crown shaft modification kit).
crown shaft the paper strips overlap due to a transport failure. stabilization item)

Sensor light blocked due ¤ The processor entry conveyor belt driven in the Check whether the D571, D572, and D573 sensors detect the "no-paper" ¡ Replace the LED (P/L 10-51, 113C889853A) and PT (P/L 10-09,
to a belt skew processor is not properly positioned. The paper is then state when there is no paper. 110A8516840).
obliquely transported to block the sensor light path.

From the shutter section on the processor section P1 rack side, visually ¡ Replace the processor entry unit assembly (356C938218). Unloading
check whether the belt position is normal. roller section set - unloading motor set

Problem caused by φ 30 The paper is obliquely transported due to static Open the distribution section door and check for improper transport. ¡ Replace the crown shaft.
crown shaft electricity that is generated when the paper leaves the When the error is reproduced, you can check whether the preceding
crown shaft. paper strip is obliquely fed.

Torque limiter A transport failure occurs because the torque limiter Visually check whether the roller (P/L 17-12) driven by the processor is ¡ Replace the processor entry unit assembly (356C938218). One
malfunction actuates to prevent the roller from rotating. steadily rotating without pulsating. (Secondary stabilization item) unloading roller section set - one unloading motor set

Front up/down roller The front up/down roller height is too high. Therefore, Use the jig to check that the height is 9.5±1.5 mm. When the lifted ¡ Use the jig to adjust the height (see Figure No. EZ1600 "Front Up/Down
height problem when the vacuum cup changeover is effected, the roller position is selected, check that the underside (vertical position) of the Section Height Adjustment" in Section 6.5 of the Service Manual Third
strikes against the paper, leaving paper curls central 10 mm belt is below the vacuum cup assembly. Edition).
uncorrected. As a result, the transport momentarily
stops, making the paper feed intervals abnormal.

D571/D572/D573 The W-2406 error is caused by the malfunction of the Conduct an I/O check (45M) to determine whether the D571/D572/D573 ¡ If the sensor section is corroded, replace the part (P/L 18-11,
sensor malfunction line-monitoring sensor in the unloading unit. sensor is stable. Remove the sensor light emitter bracket (P/L 18-10) to 113C890526B).
check whether the sensor section is wet with a solution and corroded.

Frame/door

Distribution section door The bracket for the distribution section door interlock is Open and close the distribution section door (P/L 01-04) to check ¡ Replace and adjust the bracket.
interlock bent so that the interlock does not work or fails to work whether the interlock (P/L 16-16) operates normally. Also, check whether
thoroughly. the bracket (P/L 16-01) is bent.

71
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Circuit board

LDD board The E2530 light source power supply is abnormal due Check whether the part number of the LDD board is suffixed by the letter ¡ Replace the part.
Light source power to an LDD board (zener diode) failure. E or later. (Units shipped with the LDD board whose part number suffix is
supply E or later: LP1500 SC units with Serial Numbers 541 and above and
LP2000 SC units with Serial Numbers 374 and above)

CTL board The circuit protector (CP1) is in poor contact. Check whether the part number of the CTL board is suffixed by the letter ¡ Replace the part.
Circuit protector F or later. (Units shipped with the CTL board whose part number suffix is
F or later: LP1500 SC units with Serial Numbers 576 and above and
LP2000 SC units with Serial Numbers 414 and above)

PAC board The circuit protector (CP2) is in poor contact. Check whether the part number of the PAC board is suffixed by the letter ¡ Replace the part.
Circuit protector C or later. (Units shipped with the PAC board whose part number suffix is
C or later: LP1500 SC units with Serial Numbers 653 and above and
LP2000 SC units with Serial Numbers 441 to 445, 487 and above)

PDC board The circuit protector (F3/F4) is in poor contact. Check whether the part number of the PDC board is suffixed by the letter ¡ Replace the part.
Circuit protector K or later. (Units shipped with the PDC board whose part number suffix is
K or later: LP1500 SC units with Serial Numbers 576 and above and
LP2000 SC units with Serial Numbers 414 and above)

Processor section

Displaced rack guide Check and take a corrective action in accordance with the processor ¡ Replace the part.
plate section check list.

Torque limiter Same as above. ¡ Replace the part.


malfunction

Faulty dryer Same as above. ¡ Replace the part.

W2406 (2)

Magazine and cutter sections


Same as for W2406 (1)

Transport
Same as for W2406 (1)

Sub-scanning
Same as for W2406 (1)

Distribution

Up/down operation If the D562 sensor fails to achieve detection, the Check whether the D562 sensor achieves detection. ¡ Replace the LED (P/L 10-51, 113C889853A) and PT (P/L 10-09,
(M572) machine does not perform a distributive up/down 110A8516840).
operation. Therefore, a distribution line control error
occurs (unexposed prints are produced).

Check whether the distribution section's up/down operation is normal. ¡ Replace the distribution section.

Initialization failure The D575 sensor connector is in poor contact so that Conduct an I/O check (45M) to determine whether the up/down operation ¡ Replace the photointerrupter (P/L 13-15) or reconnect the connector.
(W -2419) the W -2419 error message appears to indicate an is normal.
initialization failure.

Up/down operation ¡ The up/down operation cannot be performed because Check whether the harness connection is reversed (see Minilab ¡ If the problem cannot be cleared by correcting the harness connection, it
obstructed by a strained the M571 harness is strained (not connected Technical Information MTI No. ED064). is conceivable that the harness wiring is broken. If the problem is caused
harness downward). by a break in the harness wiring, replace the distribution section unit.

72
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Solenoid valve ¡ The paper cannot be released due to a solenoid valve In an I/O check (45M), turn ON the pump to suction-retain the paper and ¡ Replace the solenoid valve (P/L 16-23, 394C918408B).
malfunction malfunction (the solenoid valve does not operate or then operate the solenoid valve to check whether the paper is released.
operates but the air cannot be taken in due to an air (When a typical error of this type occurs, prints remaining in the printer
valve changeover failure. As a result, the paper lines have lower frame numbers than those output from the sorter.)
are not arranged in a proper order.

Reversely twisted hose The intake hose (P/L 16-24) is reversely twisted. Check whether the hose is twisted 180 degrees inward to develop an ¡ The problem can be cleared by readjusting the parts. If the hose is
Therefore, when the vacuum cup assembly moves outward bulge (see the figure on page 22/28 of Minilab Technical nicked or otherwise damaged, replace it.
rightward or leftward, the hose moves and bumps Information MTI No. ED037, which concerns secondary quality
against the D574 origin sensor. An additional load is stabilization, or see "EZ1245: Suction Unit Installation/Removal" in
then applied to the detriment of proper paper Section 17.1.3 of the Service Manual First Edition).
distribution.

The D574 harness The D574 harness wiring is broken at the tie section Check whether the tie is cut (see the figure on page 21/28 of Section (9) ¡ If the harness wiring is broken, replace the affected unit.
wiring is broken. that secures the base of the harness. This causes a in Minilab Technical Information MTI No. ED037, which concerns
paper jam in the distribution section or an initialization secondary quality stabilization).
failure. * Even if the tie is cut, the harness wiring may break depending on the
number of operations performed before tie cutting.

The suction cup Normal vacuum retention cannot be achieved because Check for damaged suction cups. ¡ If the vacuum cups are damaged, replace them. When installing the
assembly is damaged. the vacuum cups are torn (cracked). vacuum cups, be sure to insert them until they reach the rear end.

Reports submitted from some Minilab shops indicate that the vacuum ¡ If the bracket is reversed, properly mount it. If the vacuum cups are
cups are frequently torn because they are hit by a reversely mounted significantly damaged, replace them.
front up/down section bracket. Check whether the bracket is reversely
mounted.

Distributive sliding ¤ The distribution section's direct-acting mechanism for If the grease applied to the shaft section is blackened and congealed or if ¡ Inspect the direct-acting mechanism section (P/L 15-12, 14, 15, 43). If it
failure (M571) moving the vacuum cups to the right and left is soiled. the vacuum cup base does not smoothly move when you gently touch it, is soiled, clean and regrease it (wipe off the old grease and then sparingly
As a result, the sliding performance is degraded to the cleaning must be performed. apply Minilab Grease).
detriment of normal distribution.

Distribution section You cannot set the vacuum unit or open or close the Check whether the distribution section can be smoothly removed and ¡ Make adjustments so that the distribution section can be smoothly
operating failure distribution section because a distribution section reinstalled and properly locked into its position. removed and reinstalled (see Minilab Technical Information MTI No.
operating error has been committed to clear a paper ED143, which describes the corrective action to be taken when the
jam. distribution section is improperly operated for troubleshooting purposes).

D572 sensor The D572 sensor at the process entry may The cause of the problem is as indicated at left when only 89 mm wide ¡ To prevent the sensor from being affected by reflected light, add the
malfunction occasionally malfunction when it picks up the light paper jams and such a jam repeatedly occurs in the same pattern. It is modification part named "Sensor Cover 1" (350C938668).
reflection from the paper. In such an instance, line necessary to analyze the encountered situation.
detection is not accomplished in a proper order so that
the sensor erroneously reports a paper jamming error.
(Erroneous detection will not be invoked by a sudden
light reflection.)

Unloading
Same as for W2406 (1)

Hex head screw The height of the upper conveyor belt is abnormal Check whether the screw is loose. ¡ If the screw is loose, make adjustments.
displacement from because the belt height adjustment screw (part of P/L * Either of two adjustment procedures must be performed depending on
upper conveyor belt 17-82) is loose or displaced. the serial number of the marketed unit (see Section 17-13 of the Service
section Manual First Edition or Section 6.6 of the Service Manual Third Edition).

Improperly adjusted The upper conveyor belt cannot suppress paper curls Use the jig to check whether the height is 11.4±1 mm. ¡ Adjust the height with the jig (see Figure No. EZ1357 "Upper Conveyor
upper conveyor belt because it is positioned too high, thereby allowing the Belt Height Adjustment" in Section 6.6 of the Service Manual Third
height guide paper to skew. Or, the paper released from the upper Edition).
conveyor belt skews because it comes into contact with
the vacuum cup assembly.

73
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Frame/door

Distribution section door The bracket for the distribution section door interlock is Open and close the distribution section door (P/L 01-04) to check ¡ Replace and adjust the bracket.
interlock bent so that the interlock does not work or fails to work whether the interlock (P/L 16-16) operates normally. Also, check whether
thoroughly. the bracket (P/L 16-01) is bent.

Light-shielding plate A paper corner bumps against the light-shielding plate. Remove the P1 crossover rack. From the processor side, note the paper ¡ If a paper corner comes into contact with a tank wall or bends, replace the
fed from the printer to check whether its corner comes into contact with a light-shielding plate (this requires uncoupling the printer from the
processor tank wall and bends. processor).

Circuit board
Same as for W2406 (1)

Processor section
Same as for W2406 (1)

W2406 (3)
General

Paper discharge failure When a paper jam previously occurred, some paper Remove the remaining paper to achieve error recovery. ¡ No further action is required (the machine operation is normal).
was left without being removed. After completion of
initialization, the remaining paper was transported and
the system erroneously reported the arrival of
abnormal paper. (This problem cannot be detected by
software.)

<Characteristics of W-2406 paper jamming> (See Section 6.10 (page 53) of the Service Manual Third Edition.)

W-2406 (1) error occurrence: The paper does not reach the D571, D572, or D573 sensor section within 25 seconds after paper detection by the D561 sensor.
W-2406 (2) error occurrence: The paper does not reach the D571, D572, and D573 sensor sections in a proper order within 25 seconds after paper detection by the D561 sensor.
W-2406 (3) error occurrence: The paper reaches the D571, D572, or D573 sensor section before paper detection by the D561 sensor.

74
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

8. Paper Jam Check List - W2601 (7), (8)

[Check points for customer inquiries]


Action required of Impor-
No. Condition check Response to user
dispatched engineer tance
Check whether the total amount of Smaller than the indicated amount: Refer to Section 7.7 of No action is required if the
discharged prints and remaining paper in the the Applied Operating Instructions volume of the Instruction problem is cleared.
machine agrees with the amount indicated by Manual.
1
the error message. Same as the indicated number: Remove and reinstall all the
crossover racks. Clean the dryer entry rack. Clean the PS
rack.
The paper jammed frequently after the Remove and reinstall all the crossover racks. No action is required if the
2 ¡
crossover racks were set in their positions. problem is cleared.
The automatic cleaning rubber is damaged. Set the crossover racks so as to ensure that they are not Replace the automatic
3 lifted above their positions, and then wait for servicing. cleaning rubber or automatic
cleaning housing.
The paper jammed frequently immediately Ensure that the rack guides are properly mounted. No action is required if the
4 after the processing racks were cleaned. problem is located and
corrected.
Retract the dryer rack and then check the If the belt is cut, it needs to repaired it immediately. Replace the web belt or
5 ¡
web belt. dryer rack.
The dryer rack is unsteady after it is If the dryer rack is significantly unsteady, it needs to be Replace the dryer rack (the
6 ¡
retracted. repaired. screw section is damaged).
The dryer rack mounting section is unsteady. As a temporary measure, secure the dryer rack with Replace the dyer duct
7 ¡
The screw mounting section is cracked. gummed tape or the like. section.
The paper is jammed near the squeegee Clean the squeegee rack. Adjust the squeegee rack
8
rack. partition plate.
The paper is jammed in the dryer exit unit. Pull out the dryer exit unit and then strongly push it back into Have on hand a replacement
9 position. If the problem recurs, the engineer will visit you to unit depending on the
perform checkout. situation.
The paper jams at a particular place. The engineer will visit you to perform checkout. Furnish the Have on hand a replacement
10 detailed information about the problem. unit depending on the
situation.

[Engineer check list]


Impor-
No. Condition check Action 1 Action 2
tance
1. Paper jams near dryer exit unit
Conduct an I/O check to effect transport path If the clearance is not as specified, adjust the stroke length Adjust the clearance
changeover, then pull out the dryer exit unit to and apply screw locking bond (Loktite 242). (Tertiary
1-1
check the height of the transport path guide stabilization item)
and sheet metal guide.
Check whether the springs for pressing the Engage the springs. Properly install the springs.
1-2
dryer exit unit plastic roller are disengaged.
Set the dryer exit unit in position and check If the joints are not properly set, adjust the positional Adjust the positional
1-3 whether the three joints are properly set. relationship between the dryer exit unit and dryer drive relationship (within the range
section. of mounting play).
With the dryer exit unit returned to its proper Check the discharge sensor. If the lever movement is Replace the dryer exit unit,
position, conduct an I/O check to determine abnormal, replace the sensor. If the sensor is normal, check dryer drive section sensor, or
1-4
whether the D771 sensor properly detects the wiring because the connector section could be faulty. harness. Check the wiring
inserted paper. connections.
The paper frequently jams at the dryer exit Replace the dryer exit unit. Replace the unit.
1-5 although the problem cause is not identified
in checks 1-1 through 1-4.
2. Paper jams near dryer rack
Retract the dryer rack and check whether the If the web belt is damaged, replace it. Replace the web belt.
web belt is damaged. (During the first visit, the belt
roller must also be replaced
with the modified one, which
2-1 ¤
is designed for eliminating
excess play. Refer to the
associated separate
documentation.)
Retract the dryer rack and check whether the If the duct is broken, replace it. Replace the duct.
2-2 duct near the rack mounting section is ¤
damaged.
Remove the outer cover from the dryer rack If the swing shaft mounting section, replace the dryer rack. Replace the dryer rack.
2-3 and check whether the swing shaft mounting ¤
section of the dryer rack is broken.

75
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Distribution/Processor Section Paper Jamming Error Indications and Remedies

W2601 (7), (8) [Engineer check list] (second page)


Slowly set the dryer rack in its position to If the magnet catch does not work, adjust its position until it Adjust the dryer rack
2-4 check whether the magnet catch properly works. position.
works.
Check whether the drive belt roller pins of the If the dryer drive roller idles even when it is depressed by Replace the dryer rack.
2-5
dryer rack are damaged. force, replace the dryer rack.
Check whether the dryer fan unexpectedly Replace the dryer fan. Replace the dryer fan.
2-6 stops, remains stopped for a while, and then
starts running again.
3. Paper jams near squeegee rack
Strongly press the squeegee rack in the If the transmission gear moves more than 1 mm, adjust the Adjust the squeegee rack
setting direction to check whether the dryer rack. partition plate.
3-1
transmission gear moves more than 1 mm in
the retraction direction.
4. Paper jams in crossover rack section
Check whether the crossover racks are lifted Remove and reinstall all the crossover racks. Remove and reinstall the
4-1 ¡
above their positions. crossover racks.
Check the automatic cleaning housing for the If the rubber or housing is damaged, replace it. Replace the cleaning rubber
4-2
crossover racks. or housing.
Check whether the automatic cleaning rubber If the rubber has three lumps, replace it with the Rocky S Replace the cleaning rubber
4-3
has two lumps. type (2-lump type needed). or housing.
Check whether the crossover rack gears and If the gears or nip springs are missing, replace the affected Replace the affected
4-4
nip springs are disengaged. crossover rack. crossover rack.
Check whether the processing rack chain Remove the processor exhaust fan section cover to visually Tighten the setscrew and
runs while the processor is driven. check the chain motion. If the chain is not running, check apply screw locking bond
4-5 ¡
the processing rack drive motor and tighten the gear screw (Loktite 638).
and apply screw locking bond to it.
Check whether the paper jams frequently in Check whether the entry guide is damaged. Remove the If the guide is damaged, When it is
the P1 crossover rack. crossover entry roller and check whether the blade is replace the P1 crossover obvious
dislocated. rack and blade. that the
paper
4-6
frequently
jams in
the P1
section
Check whether the processor exhaust fan is If the fan is not running, replace it. Replace the fan.
4-7
running.
5. Paper jams in processing rack section
Lift up the affected processing rack and Replace any defective parts. Replace the gears or rack. When it is
check for an improperly mounted guide and obvious
disengaged gears. that the
5-1
paper
jams in
the rack
Drive the affected rack by hand to check for If the rollers do not rotate, the rollers may be damaged. Replace the rack.
5-2
roller rotation. Therefore, replace the rack.
Ask the customer whether FSC tablets are Remove slime and furnish relevant instructions to the Clean the rack.
5-3 introduced. If not, it is possible that the rack customer. Introduce one FSC tablet into the PS tank. If the
rollers may be slimy. PS solution is significantly soiled, change it.
Check whether the entry guide section of the If the entry guide is heavily soiled, clean the P1 processing Clean the upper guide.
5-4
P1 processing rack is heavily soiled. rack.
6. Paper jams in dryer drive section
Check whether the print feed section belt Check the motor/harness connection in the dryer drive Replace the dryer drive
6-1 runs while the processor is driven. section. motor (unit). Reconnect the
harness.
Check whether the dryer drive section was If a wrong combination is used, replace the dryer drive Replace the dryer drive
replaced in the past. The LP1500 SC and section with the correct one. motor (unit). Achieve
6-2
LP2000 SC employ different motor/gear motor/gear reassembly.
combinations.
7. Paper jams in distribution section
Note the error log (W2406 error) to check Check the distribution section. See the W2406 error check When the
whether the paper frequently jammed in the list. error
7-1
distribution section. frequently
occurs
8. Other
Check whether the cover section interlock Properly set the cover to check whether the interlock switch Reset the cover. Replace
8-1
switch is normal. functions. the interlock switch.
Check whether the CTP/PAC/CTL board If the circuit protector is activated, replace the circuit board Replace the circuit board.
8-2
circuit protector is activated. with a fuse-mounted type.

76
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

Technical Information

1. MAIN CONTROL UNIT EQUIUM5500 (XL) RECOVERY CD OPERATING


PROCEDURE

<Contents>

The procedure for using the recovery CD and boot device change FD supplied with the main control unit
EQUIUM5500(XL) is described below.

1. Function of the recovery CD


Operating systems, Internet Explorer 4.0, and various types of drivers can be recovered for hard
disks from which the 2GB and 8GB partitions have been created in advance. A1 system software
needs to be installed separately.
NOTE: Two versions of recovery CDs, Rev.1 and Rev.2, are available as of August, 2001. The
recovery CD Rev.2 is supplied with the equipment from June, 2001 onward. For version
identification, see step 9. Rev.2 contains a timer card driver and can be installed
automatically, while Rev.1 is not provided with a timer card driver. This needs to be
installed separately. The timer card driver is available in the \driver\XL-G\pcitimer file in the
CD-ROM for A1 Ver.5.0-0E-592 or higher. A CD-ROM of Ver.5.0-0E-592 or higher should
therefore be kept on hand.

2. Conditions in which the software can be recovered by using the recovery CD


• The OS does not start because the equipment stops at a black screen at the time of startup.
• The equipment stops after a sequence of operations are performed.

3. Keep the following items on hand.


Recovery CD, boot device change FD, A1 system software, data backup FD, and the software to be
used (e.g., B1, C4/C5)

4. Recovery CD operating procedure


(1) If the OS does not start from the hard disk, press the system start switch and then install the
recovery CD into the main control unit. The program stored on the recovery CD will then start
automatically.
NOTE: When the OS starts from the hard disk, follow the directions given in (2) in step 4.

(2) Boot switching procedure to be used when the OS does not start from the CD-ROM
With the power turned off, install the boot device change FD into the main control unit.
Next, press the system start switch.

77
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

Frontier Series Boot Device Change FD V1.00


1 HDD1 BOOT
2 HDD2 BOOT
3 CD-ROM BOOT

After the above display appears, type in [3] from the full keyboard and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the above operations, remove the boot device change FD.
• Install the recovery CD.
• Press the main control unit reset switch to restart the equipment.

(3) With the following display on the screen, press the [Y] key on the full keyboard.

Do you want to recover?

Is it okay?
When you are done, please press the [Y] key.
If you want to quit, please press the [N] key.
Yes[Y] No[N]

(4) With the following display on the screen, press the [Y] key on the full keyboard.

All data on hard disk will be lost!

Are you really sure it's okay?


Please press the [Y] key if you want to execute.
Please press the [N] key if you want to quit.
Yes[Y] No[N]

(5) The progress of recovery can be monitored on the screen. Wait until the recovery operation
is complete.

(6) After the end screen appears, remove the recovery CD.

"Recovery of Pre-installed Software" is completed.


Please remove the CD-ROM or floppy disk, press any key and restart
the machine.

(7) Press the [ENTER] key. The equipment will start again.

(8) Windows NT4.0 License Agreement


[1] When the WindowsNT SETUP screen is displayed after the Windows flag mark appears,
click the "Next" button.
[2] After the License Agreement screen appears, select "I accept -" and click the "Next"
button.
[3] After the Windows NT4.0 SETUP finish screen appears, click the [Finish] button. The
Windows NT4.0 will then start.

78
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

(9) When the Log on screen appears, press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Del] keys simultaneously to log
on to the system.

(10) To log on to the system, use FRONTIER as the user name and FRONTIER as the password.
NOTE: To enter these data, use uppercase characters.

(11) To use the main control unit HDD which has thus far been in use, specify and delete all the
folders and files in the D drive, using Explorer, and also empty the entire Trash. The D drive
may be formatted instead. See step 7.
NOTE: Using the Disk Administrator, check to be sure that the Disk 0 drive characters are
"C" and "D." (Start - Program - Administrative Tools - Disk Administrator)
Incidentally, a message "No signature on disk 0" is displayed at the first start of the
Disk Administrator. Click [YES], ignoring this message.
If the drive is not C or D, change the drive characters. (Using the Disk Administrator, select
the drive character changing partition and specify TOOL-Drive Letter-.)
There may be a case in which the spare (Disk 1) HDD is the D drive. First, change the spare
HDD drive name to F and then change the drive name of the second partition for the main
HDD (Disk 0) to D.

(12) Install the A1 system software.


Have on hand a FD whose data have been backed up. Install the A1 system software CD-
ROM. After the installation screen starts automatically, select "Reinstallation" and click [Next]
to reinstall the software.
NOTE: When the recovery CD is of the first version, install the timer card driver, referring to
the "Timer Card Driver Installation Procedure", without removing the CD-ROM after
completion of the reinstallation. See step 6.

(13) When the boot device change FD was used in step 4.(2), install the disk again and enter
HDD1 BOOT [1].

(14) Install the other Frontier software.

5. Operations executed by the recovery CD


(1) Installation of Windows NT4.0 and Service Pack 5 in the C drive
(2) Installation of the hardware-inherent drivers (display, network, sound, power-off)
(3) Installation of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2
(4) Installation of the SCSI driver and setup of SYM_256K.REG
(5) Termination of the scsiprint and scsiscan devices
(6) Registration of user name FRONTIER
(7) Setting of the Windows NT start wait time to 5 sec (effective after the second restart)
(8) Change of the time format to h:mm:ss tt
(9) Installation of the timer card driver for Rev.2

79
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

6. Timer card driver installation procedure


(1) Install the A1 system software CD-ROM and, using Explorer, double-click \driver\XL-
G\pcitimer "Setup" on the CD-ROM.
(2) With the following screen displayed, click [Next], and installation of the timer card driver will
start.

(3) With the following screen displayed, select No and click [Finish]. Although Yes is selected in
the figure below, selecting No makes the subsequent operations easier to perform.

(4) Remove the A1 system software CD-ROM.

80
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

7. Disk Administrator
(1) Display given by the Disk Administrator

(2) Display for formatting the D drive

81
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

8. Main control unit IDE configuration

Primary

Disk0
(Master)

IDE
Secondary

Disk1 CD-ROM
(Master) (Slave)

Disk 1 is not used under normal conditions.


For Disk 1, no active partition is set. When it is to be used as a startup disk, set it for "active
partition", using the Disk Administrator or any other suitable tool.

9. Recovery CD version identification

* This mark is provided


when the version is
Rev.2.

82
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

2. NEW MAIN CONTROL UNIT HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

<Contents>

The following precautions should be observed when maintaining the scanner mounted on the new
main control unit EQUIM 5500FF (SP2000: #6357 and above).

(1) Before connecting or disconnecting the keyboard or the mouse, be sure to turn off the circuit
breaker on the left-hand side of the scanner.
When the EQUIM 5500FF is in the standby state, the standby power is supplied to both the
keyboard and the mouse. If the keyboard and mouse are connected after turning on the circuit
breaker, the condition is not recognized by the equipment.

(2) The start switch should be depressed at least five seconds after the circuit breaker is turned on.
If the start switch is depressed too early, the main control unit may not start up. The main
control unit does not start either if the start switch has been depressed before the circuit breaker
is turned on.

83
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

3. DATA BACKUP FD

<Contents>

The contents of the data backup FDs for the scanner and printer supplied with FRONTIER350/370
and the information on the data update timing are described below.
The FD for each of the scanner and printer contains the factory-set data shown in the attached table.
If operations are performed as directed for each item, the data file in the main control unit hard disk
drive (HDD) will be updated. It is therefore recommended to carry out data saving on the data FD
after performing such operations.
Incidentally, the latest printer data are stored in the CTL20 circuit board memory. To save the
CTL20 data, select the desired parameter and operation data from "MENU 45T DATA SAVING" and
press "OK", and the data will be stored on the main control unit HDD.
After that, save the data on the floppy disk, following the instructions given in "MENU 417 DATA
BACKUP."
As indicated in the attached table, the system software Ver.4.0, Ver.5.0, and Ver.6.0 data backup
FDs are interchangeable.

84
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

As of May 22, 2001


Scanner Backup FD
Ver.4.0 → Ver.5.0 →
No. Item Path Filename Ver.5.0 Ver.6.0 Related menu
compatibility compatibility

1 Lens registration table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN Lens.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43G Lens Registration]

2 Light source aperture table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN D.New.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [433/434 135/120 Light Source Aperture Table]

3 Optical magnification calibration table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN Z.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43J Optical Magnification Calibration]

4 Focus calibration table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN FCalib.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43K Focus Calibration]

5 Focus position adjustment table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN FAdjust.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43C Carrier Focus Position Adjustment]

6 Film position information table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN Film.* Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [44H MFC10Y Monitor Image Position Adjustment]

7 ND filter density measurement table D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN Density.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43N ND Filter Density Measurement]

8 Dust reference filter D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\SCAN GomiLight.Table Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43E CCD Data Display]

9 Spectral calibration D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\IMGP EZ171scnsc-*.* Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [43P Spectral Calibration]

10 Film DX code data D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\IMGP dxcode.dat Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [42F Film Type Setting]

11 Special film channel data (negative) D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\IMGP filmch-nega.dat Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [42E Special Film Channel Setting]

12 Special film channel data (reversal) D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\IMGP filmch-rv.dat Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [42E Special Film Channel Setting]

13 Special film channel relation data D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\IMGP link-dx-filmch.dat Yes Yes Updated upon execution of [42E Special Film Channel Setting]

85
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

As of May 22, 2001


Printer Backup FD
Ver.4.0 → Ver.5.0 →
No. Item Path Filename Ver.5.0 Ver.6.0 Related menu
compatibility compatibility
1 Operation panel Japanese/English display D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN OPPARA.TXT Yes Yes Operation Panel Menu [LANGUAGE][SYSYTEM]
[451 Paper Magazine Registration]
[452 Paper Feed Length Adjustment]
2 Printer mechanism fine adjustment D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN MCPARA.TXT Yes Yes
[45M Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment]
[45V Precut Length Setting]
3 Image position fine adjustment parameter D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN MCADJ.TXT Yes Yes [458 Image Position Fine Adjustment]
[42J Paper Condition Method Setup]
[451 Paper Magazine Registration]
4 Exposure parameter D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN LDPARA.TXT Yes Yes [45G Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup]
[45H Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment]
[45J Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print] *1
[451 Paper Magazine Registration]
[461 Pump Output Measurement/Setting]
[462 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting]
[463 Processing Temperature Setting]
5 Processor setting parameter D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN PRPARA.TXT Yes Yes [464 Replenisher Rate Setting]
[465 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting]
[466 Low Volume Setup]
[467 Processor Temperature Calibration]
[46B Processor Operating Condition Setup]
[42J Paper Condition Method Setup]
6 Calibration result D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN PRLUT**.TXT Yes Yes [45L Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy]
Density measurement automatically updated upon execution of Density Measurement *2
7 Printer operation information D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN SSRUNIFO.TXT Yes Yes [41F Installation Information Setup]
Printer operation information (transport
8 D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN MCRUNIFO.TXT Yes Yes Automatically updated
system
9 Laser deterioration record D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN LDIM.TXT Yes Yes Automatically updated
10 Mode stabilization log D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN LDSHG.TXT Yes Yes [454 G,B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup]
11 Processor operation information D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN PRRUNIFO.TXT Yes Yes Automatically updated
12 Printer information D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN SSOTHIFO.TXT Yes Yes Automatically updated [414 Timer Setup]
13 Printer function setup D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN MCSETUP.TXT Yes Yes [45B Printer Function Select]
14 Processor information D:\FUJIFILM\FRONTIER\PARAM\PRIN PRSETUP.TXT Yes Yes Operation Panel Menu [SYSTEM][PROC.INST.MODE]
* Timing in which the SRAM information in the printer is updated.
* The data file saved in the scanner is updated at the time of execution of Post-operation Check, Data Backup, or Data Saving.
*1: Even for [45D], [45E], and [45F], the contents may vary because of the presence of a copy of ROS EEPROM. No data will be read when only the beginning is provided.
*2: When "The ambient variable connection, the master magazine registration" is set for YES, calibration is executed at the start of transport or at the time of installation of the magazine.
[42J]Paper Condition Method Setup [45M]Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment [461]Pump Output Measurement/Setting
[451]Paper Magazine Registration [45Q]Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data [462]Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting
[452]Paper Feed Length Adjustment [45R]Clearing All Operation Data [463]Processing Temperature Setting
[454]G,B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup [45V]Precut Length Setting [464]Replenisher Rate Setting
[458]Image Position Fine Adjustment [45W]R-LD I/O Check [465]Evaporation Correction Rate Setting
[45B]Printer Function Select [45X]G-SHG I/O Check [466]Low Volume Setup
[45D]R Laser (R-LD) Data [45Y]B-SHG I/O Check [467]Processor Temperature Calibration
[45E]G Laser (G-SHG) Data [46B]Processor Operating Condition Setup
[45F]B Laser (B-SHG) Data [46D]Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data
[45G]Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup
[45H]Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
[45J]Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print
[45L]Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy

86
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

4. CIRCUIT BOARD CHANGE FROM GMB20 TO GMC20

<Contents>

The GMB20 circuit board will be changed.

<Reason for Change>

The memory capacity needs to be increased in order to adapt to future functional enhancement.
NOTE: The new type of circuit board will coexist with the current type for some time. To avoid
confusion, the name of the new circuit board will be "GMC20 circuit board."

<Part Number>

Index Number Part Name Part Number


SP06-33 GMC20 857C898406

<Designated Machines>

#6576 and above

<Compatibility>

(1) Machines preceding those designated (GMB20 circuit board-mounted equipment)


It is possible to mount the GMC20 circuit board on these machines.

(2) Designated machines (GMC20 circuit board-mounted equipment)


It is possible to mount the GMB20 circuit board on these machines.
To bring about a functional improvement in the future, it is necessary to replace the current
circuit board with the GMC20 circuit board.

<DIP switch setup>

Different DIP switch settings are used for the GMB and GMC boards.
DIP switch
1 2-5 6 7 8
Circuit board
GMB20 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
GMC20 ON OFF ON OFF ON
NOTE: When switching to the GMC board, make sure that DIP switch No. 6 is ON.

87
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

5. SCANNER AIR COMPRESSOR AND FLOW RATE SENSOR

<General description>
For film cooling purposes, the Frontier's scanner uses an air compressor (PU351) to provide cooling
air. While the air compressor is running, a flow rate sensor is used to check whether the
predetermined cooling air flow rate is being maintained and has not dropped.

1. Sensor output and flow rate


The table below shows the relationship between the flow rate sensor and flow rate. The
indicator lamp goes off when the output voltage of the flow rate sensor (D351) is between 2.6 and
3.0 V during the operation of the air compressor (PU351). (The detection range varies with the
unit depending on the inherent differences among the employed detection circuit parts.)
For adequate film cooling performance, the target flow rate is set at 26 liters per second.
Although two different flow rate sensors are used as indicated in Minilab Technical Information
MTI No. ED122, they exhibit the same performance characteristics when the sensor output is
between 2.0 and 3.0 V. Therefore, no detection performance difference arises no matter which
flow rate sensor is used.

If the detection level predetermined for a sensor output range of 2.6 to 3.0 V is not attained when
checkout is performed at scanner startup, the W-1125 error message "Film cooling air
compressor flow rate is too low - Clean compressor air filter as directed in documentation"
appears.
If this phenomenon occurs during fine scanning, the above error does not occur, but the resulting
prints are as described in Section 7, Abnormalities Encountered When Lamp Goes Off during
Film Scanning, in the "Image Troubleshooting Guide".
The filter for the film cooling air compressor needs to be cleaned at 3-month intervals as
explained in Section 5.14, Film Cooling Air Compressor Filter Cleaning, in the Applied Operating
Instructions volume of the Instruction Manual. However, if the above phenomenon occurs or if
the flow rate sensor (D351) output is close to 3 V when an I/O check is conducted during an air
compressor operation, the filter must be cleaned immediately. It is recommended that the filter

88
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

be cleaned without delay particularly when it is used for a Minilab machine that is installed at a
shop or other dusty location.
The compressor temperature characteristics (spontaneous heat generation by the compressor)
are such that the flow rate obtained during printing may be as much as 5% lower than when the
compressor is used immediately after power ON.

2. Inspection procedures
1) Checking the supply voltage
Power is supplied to the air compressor after its voltage is reduced to 100 VAC by the
transformer for the scanner power supply (200 to 240 VAC). For operating the compressor at
the rated flow rate, 100 VAC power needs to be properly supplied. Check that the AC power
supply terminal strip is properly set up for the actual input voltage supplied to the scanner.
2) Checking the flow rate sensor
Remove the carrier and open I/O check menu 43A. Operate the PU351 and check the air
coming out of the air nozzle that is positioned below the scanner section and to the left of the
lens. When the air gushes out, the compressor is normal. Roughly cover the air nozzle end
with your finger to obstruct the air flow and check whether the output of the flow rate sensor
(D351) lowers. If the output remains unchanged, it is conceivable that the flow rate sensor
may be faulty.

3. Compressor use at high altitude locations


When the air compressor is used at high altitudes, the resulting air flow rate is lower than usual
because the air concentration decreases in proportion to the altitude. The air compressor can be
operated normally at altitudes of up to 2000 m or so. At an altitude of higher than 2000 m,
however, an error may occur due to an insufficient air flow rate. When the Frontier 350/370/390
is installed at such a high altitude location and the occurrence of an error is anticipated, a high-
altitude air compressor can be supplied as an option. A new bulletin will be soon issued to
inform you of the part number of this high-altitude air compressor.

89
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

6. OPTICAL SECTION ND FILTER CONTAMINATION AND UNEVENNESS


UPPER/LOWER PRINT DENSITY
<Contents>

As announced in Minilab Technical Information No.ED055 under the title of "Image Abnormality
(Unevenness) Countermeasures," the problem of unevenness in upper/lower print density may
occur due to contamination of the ND filter/CDD glass or a message I-1453 "Film bar-code cannot
be read" may appear.
The degree to which prints are affected by the contamination of the ND filter (whether or not the
problem of unevenness upper/lower print density occurs) is dependent on the type of film carrier
used and the print size.
In the event of unevenness in upper/lower print density, the problem should be effectively handled
with reference to the following information.
1. ND Filter Usage
The ND filter should be used at the time of scanner correction (during the pre-operational check
or when the carrier is installed for the fist time on the day of operation). It is not used for actual
fine scanning. The term "scanner correction" here refers to the step of brightness correction
(CCD output level uniformization) performed for each of the scanning conditions shown below.
2. Operating Conditions
With the NC135Y or NC240Y carrier, correction data for use under the following four conditions
are obtained.
(1) For prescanning
(2) For print scanning (3R-4R)
(3) For medium-magnification printing (5R-6R)
(4) For high-magnification printing (8R or larger)
For negative films, the ND filter is used for scanner correction using (1), (2), and (3). The IX240
reversal film (with the NC240Y carrier) is used for (1) and (2).
When the MFC10Y is used (135 or 120 mirror box), no ND filter is used at the time of scanner
correction under any conditions (print size and film type).

The problem of unevenness in upper/lower print density due to ND filter contamination may occur
when the ND filter is used at the time of scanner correction.
Since the CCD output is adjusted with a contaminated ND filter at the time of scanner correction
and no ND filter is used for actual fine scanning, a pattern which is the reverse of the ND filter
contamination may appear as upper/lower print density irregularities on prints.
Conclusion:
The problem of unevenness in upper/lower print density due to ND filter contamination may occur
in any of the following cases.
• Negative prints of size 6R or smaller are produced with NC135Y
• Negative prints of size 6R or smaller are produced with NC240Y
• Reversal prints of size 4R or smaller are produced with NC240Y

90
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

7. W-1128 DUST ADHESION-CAUSED ERROR COUNTERMEASURES

<Contents>

Cases have arisen in which the entire film carrier is replaced in the event that a "W-1128 Dust
adhesion-caused" error occurs and the cause of the error is clearly attributable to a film carrier
(NC135Y, NC240Y, MFC10Y), for instance, the error occurs only in a specific carrier. The dust
adhesion-caused error-related parts of the film carrier are the film mask and the film mask diffusion
plate. To cope with this problem, take countermeasures, following the steps described below.

<Countermeasures>

Clean the film mask and the film mask diffusion plate. Also clean all the other parts of the film
carrier that will come into contact with the film.
Especially, be sure to clean the back side of the film mask diffusion plate (carrier back side).
When use is made of an automatic film carrier (NC135Y or NC240Y), pieces of threads may
become attached to the upper guide section.
If the problem cannot be corrected even after the above countermeasures are taken, it is suspected
that the film mask diffusion plate has suffered damage or there is dust and dirt inside it. In that
case, replace the film mask diffusion plate, following the procedure given in the Service Manual.
Replacement of the plate can be done easily.

For the NC135Y : See Subsection 11.2.15 of the Service Manual under "Film mask diffusion plate
replacement." Part No. 357C896753A Base, optical
For the NC240Y : See Subsection 11.3.21 of the Service Manual under "Film mask diffusion plate
replacement." Part No. 357C897313 Base
For the MFC10Y : See Section 6.22 of the MFC10Y Service Manual/Installation Guide under
"Diffusion plate replacement." Part No. 345C897466A Diffuser assembly

91
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

8. PRESCAN SCREEN FRAME POSITION SHIFT

<Contents>

A shift in film frame position may occur on the prescan screen when the NC135Y is used with
Frontier 350/370. In the event of a film frame position shift, it may be concluded that a negative
feed error has occurred in the NC135Y. When the film is in such a condition as explained below,
however, the frame position may be slightly shifted due to limitations of Frontier's image detection
function. In that case, the image position should be corrected by using the operation keyboard (see
Step 4 for Subsection 4.5.2 of the Basic Operating Instructions under "Feeds image at low speed
key").

<Cases in which a positional shift tends to occur easily>

1. Flare is present outside the leading frame.

Flare

Direction of negative
insertion Leading frame

Erroneously detected
frame position

The edge of the flare is mistakenly judged to be the edge of the leading frame, resulting in a shift
in leading frame position.

2. Beginning of leading frame is very underexposed

Direction of negative
insertion

Erroneously detected
frame position

The beginning of the leading frame in the direction of insertion is not detected but a midpoint in
the image is mistakenly judged to be the edge, resulting in a shift in leading frame position.

92
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

3. Flare on an intermediate frame

Direction of
negative insertion

Erroneously detected
frame position

The edge of the flare is mistakenly judged to be the edge of an intermediate frame, resulting in a
shift in frame position.

4. Excessively high base density


If the base density of the negative film is excessively high due to the passage of time or to high
temperature, there is a high possibility of image edge detection error because of the relatively low
image detection threshold. Such negatives can be generally identified by discoloring of the film
edge or by fogging between film bar codes.

5. Ultra-over negative
For ultra-over negatives (+4 or +5 or higher), there is a high possibility that flare will appear
outside the exposed frames. Consequently, a shift in frame position may occur for the same
reason as in 3.

93
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

9. NC135Y VARIABLE FILM MASK GEAR ENGAGEMENT ERROR

<Contents>

Do not force the NC135Y variable film mask to move. Straining the mask may cause the internal
gear to skip, resulting in a shift in mask position or an equipment malfunction.
When the NC135Y is removed from the main body of the SP1500/SP2000 after completion of fine
scanning, the variable mask position is "F" (full size position: aperture 24.9 mm). (Main unit system
software Ver.6.0 or earlier)

<Reason>

Although the NC135Y variable film mask is set in the full-open position (aperture: 40.4 mm) in the
prescan mode, it is changed to an appropriate aperture position, according to the print size for each
frame, F/Hv (aperture: 21.0 mm) or P (aperture: 14.3 mm), at the time of fine scanning, and
returned to the F position at the completion of fine scanning for film discharge.
Consequently, the variable film mask is in the F size position when the NC135Y is removed from the
main body of the SP1500/SP2000 after film discharge.
It has been found by analysis of carriers (NC135Y) returned as defective parts that in some cases
the variable film mask position has deviated from normal due to gear engagement error . This
suggests that an attempt was made to move the variable mask by force.
More specifically, it can be concluded that an attempt was made, at the time of carrier removal, to
widen the variable film mask from the F size position further toward the outer fine scan position.
In the event that a negative feed error has occurred during fine scanning, the variable film mask may
be in the position corresponding to "P" or "Hv", depending on the frame print size at the time of
occurrence of the error, if the NC135Y is removed from the main body of the SP1500/SP2000
without correcting the error. When installing the NC135Y again, the mask should not be moved by
force because it is automatically set in the correct position.
For main unit system software Ver.7.0 and higher, we intend to change the variable mask position
after film discharge to the full-open position.

94
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

10. STEPS TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF CARRIER MALFUNCTION


(W-1202/W-1214/W-1215)

<Contents>

Any of the following carrier malfunction error messages may be displayed even though the condition
is caused by a light source lamp abnormality.

Error messages
No. Message
Pre-Scan cancelled.
W-1202
Reinstall film, then press [YES/Enter] key again.
Film feeding failed.
W-1214
Feed out film. Remove carrier and clean it.
Negative feeding error occurred.
W-1215
Remove carrier, then remove negative.

<Reason>

Prior to a carrier operation such as prescanning or fine scanning, the light source lamp is checked
for overcurrent. If the light source lamp is found abnormal, the carrier operation is suspended. In
that case, any of the carrier malfunction error messages shown in the table above appears although
the error message W-1238 ought to be displayed.

<Steps>

If the correct error message "W-1238 Scanning Lamp abnormality detected. Replace lamp."
appears after restarting of the system; perform the operation as directed in the message.
If the light source lamp is abnormal, the motor cannot be rotated in [44] Adjustment/Maintenance
[44E-44G] Carrier I/O Check even though the feed motor is normal.
In the event of lamp abnormality, "Malfunction" is displayed as an indication of the lamp condition in
[43] Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance [435] Input Check.

95
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

11. E-1247 ERROR COUNTERMEASURES

<Contents>

The steps to be taken in the event of occurrence of error "E-1247 Carrier EEPROM data abnormal"
are described below.
This error is detected and indicated if the CPU on the CTB20 circuit board of the scanner judges that
the carrier mechanical data stored in the EEPROM on the film carrier circuit board has been
destroyed.
The mechanical data includes data for "carrier focus position adjustment" (which is to be performed
at the time of installation), "sensor calibration", "pitch correction", "mask home correction pulse", and
"door close position offset pulse."

<Error Occurrence Timing>

At the time when the carrier is removed or reinstalled during mechanical data write operation (carrier
red LED ON)
(The data may not be destroyed even in the event of an error. In that case no error will occur even
when the carrier is reinstalled.)

<Prevention of Error Occurrence>

To prevent the occurrence of error E-1247, do not pull out the carrier when the carrier red LED is lit.

<Recovery from Error>

With the MENU44P "Film carrier ID setup/delete" screen displayed, select the corresponding carrier
ID and execute "Download."

<Operation at the Time of Installation>

As a countermeasure against the above error, be sure to execute "Data backup" on the MENU 44P
screen at the time of installation. (Refer to the installation manual.)

96
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

12. MFC10Y FILM SLIDER PAD CLEANING

<Contents>

A gap-filling pad (P/No.386D897492A) is affixed on the back side of the MFC10Y film slider so that
the leading edge of the film will not be caught between the film slider and the cover at the time of
scanning. If the sliding load for the film slider increases due to accumulation of dust on this pad,
the film slider may not operate smoothly, resulting in occurrence of color bleeding on prints or jaggy
image abnormality.
To prevent the occurrence of such a problem, clean the pad, following the cleaning procedure
described below. The recommended cleaning interval is about once a week. It is also
recommended that the pad be cleaned with the use of lens cleaning cloth "TORAYSEE" (produced
by TORAY, available at glasses shops).

<Cleaning Procedure>

(1) Set the film slider in the home position (left-hand


side). Normally, when the film slider is removed
from the scanner after printing, it is in its home
position.

(2) Put the lens cleaning cloth into the gap between
the pad at the left of the film slider and the back
light.

(3) Clean the pad by moving the lens cleaning cloth to


the left and right ten times as shown in the figure.

(4) Install the MFC10Y in the scanner. When a


message I-1490 "Prepare for the diffusion plate
cleaning" appears, select [clean].

(5) Insert the lens cleaning cloth into the film slider
from its front left side and then clean the pad by
moving the cloth to the left and right ten times as
shown in the figure.

97
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

13. POSITIONAL SHIFT BETWEEN HIGH MAGNIFICATION MODE MONITOR PRINT


FRAME AND ACTUAL PRINT

When prints are produced at high magnification (Cropping "ON" or not) with the use of the
NC135Y/NC240Y film carrier, there may occur a positional shift between the print frame on the monitor
screen and the relative center on the print.
This positional shift is attributable to design factors such as described below, and it does not mean any
equipment fault.
When it is necessary to produce prints at high magnification as in the case when trimming prints, it is
recommended to use the MFC10Y film carrier.

<When the NC135Y is used>

1. Causes of positional shift


(1) Positional shift in the film cross direction
This phenomenon is caused by the difference between the film feed path width and the
actual film width.
The film feed path width is 35.1 +0.1/-0 mm while the film width is about 34.6-34.8 mm.
Since the film is reversely fed for fine scanning after the print range is specified by the use of
the prescan image print frame on the monitor screen, there is a possibility of a positional shift
occurring due to the difference between the feed path width and the film width.
(2) Positional shift in the film feed direction
The feed direction depends on the capability of the frame image detection sensor and the
film feed accuracy. In actuality, a maximum of about 0.3 mm of shift may occur due to a
relative positional shift between prescanning and fine scanning.

In cases (1) and (2) above, the center positional shift on the print is proportional to the print
magnification, so that it is significant when the print magnification is high. Although the NC135Y is
used as an example in the above explanation, the same problem occurs with the NC240Y.

(3) Optical axis shift


[1] Shift ascribable to the optical system
The projected image of the carrier center is shifted with a change in optical
magnification. However, as this shift is equivalent, in terms of CCD pixels, to only 10
pixels over the entire magnification range, it is practically negligible compared to the
shifts in cases (1) and (2) above.
[2] Shift ascribable to the carrier
A maximum of 0.2 mm of shift may occur due to the relative positional shift between the
carrier mount position and the optical axis. In terms of CCD pixels, this positional shift
is equivalent to about 15 pixels (0.2 mm x 1.2-0.6 [magnification] ÷ 0.008 mm [pitch per
pixel]).
(4) Shift ascribable to the printer
This problem is caused by a paper exposure positional shift in the feed/cross direction. It can
be checked and corrected by opening the maintenance menu and executing MENU "45H" "Main
Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Syne. Rough Adjustment."

98
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

2. Positional shift correction


For causal factors (3) and (4), the problem can be corrected because the same pattern of
positional shifts recur. In major factors (1) and (2), however, the same pattern dose not recur
and, in actuality, adjustment is practically impossible when the NC135Y/NC240Y is used.

<When the MFC10Y is used>

In the MFC10Y, it is the film slider (mask), not the film, that is moved, whereas the film is fed in the
NC135Y/NC240Y. More exact image positioning can therefore be secured when the MFC10Y is
used.
With the MFC10Y, stable trimming can be achieved if the equipment setup is correct, because there
are no such factors of NC135Y as described in (1) and (2) above.

1. Causes of positional shift


(1) Monitor image position setup
This setup can be performed by the maintenance menu for the carrier. The image position
can be adjusted by entering numerical values for the four sides (up, down, left, right) for each
mask.
(2) Backlash setup
This setup can be performed by the "MFC10Y Machine Data Setup" menu. The backlash of
the film slider can be adjust when the direction of its movement differs between the
prescanning and fine scanning modes. Any shift from the print in the film slider feed
direction can be corrected by adjusting its numerical value.

In addition, the factors of NC135Y shown in (3) and (4) above are common to the MFC10Y. Stable
trimming can therefore be achieved by making adjustments (1) and (2) above and executing "Main
Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Syne. Rough Adjustment."

99
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

14. OCCURRENCE OF ERROR "E-1424 DOWNLOADING CARRIER PROGRAM


FAILED"

<Contents>

An error message "E-1424 Downloading carrier program failed" appears if after version upgrading
of the Frontier System Software A1, Digital Imaging Software Application "FRONTIER" is reinstalled,
through the use of the C4/C5 software, on FRONTIER 350/370/390 under the following conditions.

<Conditions>

A log-in operation is performed, with the application software for FRONTIER 350/370/390 started,
using SE2, the Digital Imaging Software Application "FRONTIER" (C4/C5) installed on FRONTIER
350/370/390 by "M49B Explorer." Then the system is restarted, following the message shown on
the screen. (An E-1424 error would occur at the time when the system is restarted.)

<Cause of the Error>

When the system is restarted under the above conditions, the power has not been completely turned
off and the image processing section of the SP1500/SP2000/SP2500 is still in operation (it has not
been reset). This results in the occurrence of the above error.

NOTE 1 : For the procedure for installing the Digital Imaging Software Application "FRONTIER"
on FRONTIER 350/370/390, refer to Subsection 2.2.4.2 of the DI PRINT/DATA
WRITING SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL (PP3-B163E3).
NOTE 2 : To install an optional software on FRONTIER 350/370/390, be sure to use the shift
startup procedure and perform installation from the desktop screen.
Supplementary remarks:
An E-1424 error also occurs if the reset switch on the front panel of the main control unit
is depressed after the SP1500/SP2000/SP2500 has been started.

100
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

15. NOTES ON PAPER CONDITION SETUP

1) Paper condition setup


The paper condition setup data is magazine specific. Therefore, it does not apply to the use of a
different magazine.

2) Master magazine and condition upkeep print


- With the master magazine registered, corrections are made each day with reference to the
condition upkeep print. The data for different channels are automatically adjusted to
compensate for a shift from the state prevailing on the previous day.
- The results of condition upkeep print corrections made for the master magazine after a paper
end do not affect the data for different channels.

3) After a paper type change, effect initialization because roundabout steps would otherwise be
followed to perform condition setup.

4) Condition setup after a paper end

Versions 5.0-589 and earlier


If paper condition setup is not completed for a magazine that is set in position after a paper end,
the display shows the W-2507 error message "Paper condition setup is not completed for the
currently used magazine - Perform paper condition setup". Even if you temporarily clear the
error message and set the magazine in position again, the same message appears again. If
you do not perform paper condition setup for the currently used magazine, the feedback of the
condition upkeep data about the master magazine does not apply to the currently used
magazine.

Versions 6.0 and later


If you choose "No" when the W-2507 error message appears in situations where the paper is
set after a paper end, the error message does not reappear until the next paper end is reached.
It also well to remember that the feedback of master magazine data applies.

No matter what version is used, the W-2533 error message "Ten days elapsed since the last
paper condition setup - You should perform paper condition setup" appears 10 days later.
If you do not perform paper condition setup for the currently used magazine, the feedback of
master magazine data does not apply to the currently used magazine.

101
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

16. SCANNER-PRINTER COMMUNICATION ERROR HANDLING AND ANALYSIS


PROCEDURES

<Contents>

In the event of occurrence of a scanner-printer communication error (E-2102, E-2103, E-2109, W-


2108, or W-2110), locate the problem, using the Scanner-Printer Communication Error Analysis
Procedure, and take appropriate corrective actions in accordance with the directions which follow
the corresponding probable cause number in the Communication Error Causal Factor Map.

Scanner-Printer Communication
Error Analysis Procedure

Scanner-Printer Communication
Error Causal Factor Map

<References>

1. Scanner-Printer Communication Error Analysis Procedure


2. Scanner-Printer Communication Error Causal Factor Map

102
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Scanner-Printer Communication Error Analysis Procedures


Unit to check Main checks

IEEE 1394 cable (common to the scanner and printer) Check the cable for marks indicating that the cable was bent, broken, or crushed.
Check whether the cable is properly grounded.
(Check whether an excessively long mounting screw is used and brought into contact with the frame.)
Check whether the 1394 interface connector is squarely connected.
Probable causes: No. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 (Check whether a lateral force is applied to the connector due to a cable flexure.)
Check whether the inside and outside of the 1394 interface connector are deformed.

Circuit protector use by printer circuit boards When the FMA20 board has a circuit board number suffixed by the letter D or later, it is of a fuse-mounted type.
FMA20/FMC20/CTL20/PAC20 When the FMC20 board has a circuit board number suffixed by the letter F or later, it is of a fuse-mounted type.
When the CTL20 board has a circuit board number suffixed by the letter F or later, it is of a fuse-mounted type.
Probable causes: No. 13, 33, 44, and 58 When the PAC20 board has a circuit board number suffixed by the letter C or later, it is of a fuse-mounted type.

Circuit protector use by scanner GLO20 board When the GLO20 board has a circuit board number suffixed by the letter F or later, it is of a fuse-mounted type.

Probable causes: No. 1

Printer flat cable Check for a deformed cable connector.


FMA20-FMC20 cable/FMC20-CTL20 cable Check for poor contact between the flat cable and connector.
Probable causes: No. 30, 31, 32, 40, 41, 42, and 43 Check whether the flat cable between the FMC20 and CTL20 is of the specified black shielded type.

Printer electrical system section Check whether the CB15, CB14, CB13, and NFB4 are tripped (be careful with 100/200 VAC power).
Check whether the NFB1 lever is placed in the power-ON position (be careful with 200 VAC power).
Check the TB1, TB2, and T1 terminal strips for screw looseness (be careful with 100/200 VAC power).
Probable causes: No. 64, 65, 66, 68, 70, 71, 72, 73, 76, 77, 80, 81, Check the NF3 for nut looseness (be careful with 200 VAC power).
82, and 84 Check the NFB4 terminal for screw looseness (be careful with 200 VAC power).

Printer electrical system section Check that a voltage of 100 VAC is present across the T1 100 V terminals (be careful with 100 VAC power).
Check that a voltage of 200 VAC is present across the T1 200 V terminals (be careful with 200 VAC power).
Check the NF3 to determine whether a voltage of 200 VAC is present between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4 (be
careful with 200 VAC power).
Check whether a voltage of 200 VAC is present between TB2 terminals 5 and 6 (be careful with 200 VAC power).
Check the NFB4 to determine whether a voltage of 200 VAC is present between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4 (be
careful with 200 VAC power).
Probable causes: No. 67, 69, 74, 75, 78, 79, 83, and 85 Check whether a voltage of 200 VAC is present between the following terminals (be careful with 200 VAC power):
Single-phase: Between TB1 terminals 1 and 4. Three-phase three-wire: Between TB1 terminals 1 and 3.

103
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Printer PAC20 board Check whether the inside and outside of the PAC5 connector are deformed.
Touch the PAC5 connector and harness to check if the relay on the PAC20 board does not actuate.
Check whether the inside and outside of the PAC7 connector are deformed (be careful with 100 VAC power).
Probable causes: No. 59, 60, 62, and 63 Touch the PAC7 connector and harness to check if the relay on the PAC20 board does not actuate (be careful with 100 VAC power).

Printer PAC20 board Check that the measured CP1 resistance value is about 0 Ω.
Probable causes: No. 60, 61, and 63

Printer FMA20 board Check whether the inside and outside of the 1394 interface connector are deformed.
Probable causes: No. 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 27, Check whether the inside and outside of the FMA1, FMA3, FMA4, and FMA5 connectors are deformed.
28, 29, and 30 Check whether the inside and outside of the PWA3 and PWA6 are deformed.

Check that the voltage between the TP9 and TP12 terminals is about +5 V. Touch the FMA4, PWA3 connector, and harness to
Printer FMA20 board
check that the voltage remains unchanged.
Check that the voltage between the TP10 and TP11 terminals is about +3.3 V. Touch the FMA4, PWA3 connector, and harness to
check that the voltage remains unchanged.
Check that the voltage between the TP15 and TP16 terminals is about +12 V. Touch the FMA3, PWA6 connector, and harness to
check that the voltage remains unchanged.
Check that the voltage between the TP13 and TP14 terminals is about +3.3 V.
Probable causes: No. 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 25, and 26 Check that the voltage measured between the L14 and L15 terminals is about 12 V (check for a CP1 blowout).
(When measuring the voltage, exercise care so that the tester leads do not come into contact with each other.)

Printer FMC20 board Check whether the inside and outside of the FMC1, FMC3, and FMC20 connectors are deformed.
Probable causes: No. 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, and 40 Check whether the inside and outside of the PWA6 connector are deformed.

Printer FMC20 board Check that the voltage between the TP2 and TP4 terminals is about +5 V. Touch the FMC3, PWA6 connector, and harness to check
that the voltage remains unchanged.
Probable causes: No. 36, 38, and 39

Printer CTL20 board Check that the U42 number is suffixed by the letter C.
Check whether the inside and outside of the CTL1, CTL3, and CTL13 connectors are deformed.
Check whether the inside and outside of the PWA2 connector are deformed.
Probable causes: No. 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 55, 56, and Check that the JP2 jumper is placed in the backup position. Also, check that the JP2 jumper is not deformed.
57 Check that the paper tube outside the BT1 is not stained by internal leakage.

Printer CTL20 board Check that the voltage between the TP1 and TP2 terminals is about +5 V. Touch the CTL1, CTL3, PWA2 connector, and harness to
check that the voltage remains unchanged.
Probable causes: No. 49, 51, 54, 55, and 57 Check that the BT1 voltage is 3.6 V or higher.

104
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Printer GLO20 board Check whether the inside and outside of the 1394 interface connector are deformed.
Probable causes: No. 2, 3, 4, and 5 Check whether the inside and outside of the CN2 are deformed.

Printer GLO20 board Check that the measured F1 resistance value is about 0 Ω.
Probable causes: No. 3 and 5

CAUTIONS
- If any undue force is applied to connectors to check for poor contact or such a check is conducted many times, the connectors and wires may be damaged. You should minimize the number of connector checks.
- If you depress the circuit protector pushbutton (white reset switch) until it bottoms, the circuit protector becomes damaged.

105
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Scanner-Printer Communication Error Causal Factor Map


Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion
Communication error between scanner and printer

Scanner GLO20 circuit board 1 Circuit protector F1 failure (circuit board end symbol: Measure the resistance of F1 and check to be sure that ¡ Replace the GLO20 circuit board.
Earlier than E) it is close to 0 Ω.

1394 connector 2 Poor contact of the connector Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡
pins are not deformed.

F1 3 Broken wire in F1 Measure the resistance of F1 and check to be sure that ¡ Replace the GLO20 circuit board.
it is close to 0 Ω.

CN2 4 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
in CN2.

5 Poor contact of CN2 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness. If
harness sides. necessary, check the supply voltage for the printer.

IEEE1394 cable 6 The cable is bent inside the scanner or printer or at a Check to see that the cable shows no sign of being bent ¡ Replace the IEEE1394 cable.
(common to both scanner and printer) position near the exterior. or crushed.

1394 connector 7 Poor contact of the connector Check to ensure that the connector is securely and ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
properly inserted.

Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ Replace the IEEE1394 cable.
pins are not deformed.

Check to ensure that there is no foreign matter inside ¡ Remove any foreign matter.
the connector.

1394 connector side 8 Incorrect number of ferrite core turns Check to see that the 1394 connector is not pulled or ¡ ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
ferrite core pushed by the cable.

9 Incorrect ferrite core mount position

1394 cable GND screw 10 Incorrect screw position

11 Excessive long or short screw or no screw Check to ensure that the specified screw is used for ¡ ¡ Use the specified screw to short the cable to ground. If the
grounding. screw length is too long, the screw will come into contact with
the frame, resulting in a grounding failure.

12 Washer missing between the cable hardware and Check to ensure that a washer is installed between the ¡ Insert a washer between the cable hardware and the printer
the frame. cable hardware and the scanner frame. frame.

Printer FMA20 circuit board 13 Circuit protector CP1 failure (circuit board end Measure the resistance of the circuit protector and ¡ Replace the FMA20 circuit board.
symbol: Earlier than C) check to be sure that it is close to 0 Ω.

1394 connector 14 Poor contact of the connector Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡
pins are not deformed.

FMA3 connector 15 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
in FMA3.

16 Poor contact of FMA3 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP15 (A+12V) ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
and TP16 (GND), lightly touch the FMA4 harness and is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
connector to ensure that the voltage value is close to 12 harness, accordingly.
V and it does not fluctuate.

106
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion

FMA4 connector 17 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
in FMA4.

18 Poor contact of FMA4 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP9 (D+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
TP12 (DGND), lightly touch the FMA4 harness and is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
connector to ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V harness, accordingly.
and it does not fluctuate.

While measuring the voltage between TP10 (D+3.3V) ¡ ¡


and TP11 (DGND), lightly touch the FMA4 harness and
connector to ensure that the voltage value is close to 3.3
V and it does not fluctuate.

TP9 (D+5V) - TP12 19 The connector is not inserted in PWA3 on the power Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
(DGND) unit. in PWA3 on the power unit.

20 Poor contact of PWA3 on the power unit Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the power supply side is deformed, replace the power unit. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP9 (D+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the power supply side or the
TP12 (DGND), lightly touch the PWA3 harness and harness, is the cause of the problem. Replace the power unit
connector to ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V or the harness, accordingly.
and it does not fluctuate.

TP10 (D+3.3V) - TP11 21 The connector is not inserted in PWA3 on the power Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
(DGND) unit. in PWA3 on the power unit.

22 Poor contact of PWA3 on the power unit Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the power supply side is deformed, replace the power unit. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP10 (D+3.3V) ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the power supply side or the
and TP11 (DGND), lightly touch the PWA3 harness and harness, is the cause of the problem. Replace the power unit
connector to ensure that the voltage value is close to 3.3 or the harness, accordingly.
V and it does not fluctuate.

TP15 (A+12V) - TP16 23 The connector is not inserted in PWA6 on the power Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector into the specified position.
(DGND) unit. in PWA6 on the power unit.

24 Poor contact of PWA6 on the power unit Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the power supply side is deformed, replace the power unit. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP15 (A+12V) ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the power supply side or the
and TP16 (GND), lightly touch the PWA6 harness and harness, is the cause of the problem. Replace the power unit
connector to ensure that the voltage value is close to 12 or the harness, accordingly.
V and it does not fluctuate.

107
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion

TP13 (A+3.3V) - TP14 25 D1, U2, U100, or U19 on the FMA20 circuit board is Measure the voltage between TP13 (A+3.3V) and TP14 ¡ Replace the FMA20 circuit board.
(AGND) faulty. (AGND) and check to be sure that it is close to 3.3 V.

CP1 fuse 26 The CP1 fuse is blown. (When the circuit board Measure the voltage between L14 and L15 and check to ¡
end symbol is D or higher, the circuit board uses a be sure that it is close to 12 V. (Be careful so that the
fuse.) tester leads do not come into contact with each other
during the measurement.)

FMA1 connector 27 Poor fit between the connector and the FMC20 Check the connectors for a good fit. ¡ Fit the connector into the FMC20 connector.
connector on the FMC20 circuit board.

28 Poor contact of the FMA1 connector Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ Replace the FMA20 circuit board with a one whose end symbol
pins are not deformed. is D or higher (a circuit board using a fuse).

FMA5 connector 29 The flat cable is not inserted in the FMA5 connector. Check to ensure that the flat cable is inserted in the ¡ Securely insert the connector and lock it on both the left-hand
connector and it is locked on both the left-hand and and right-hand sides.
right-hand sides.

30 Poor contact between the FMA5 connector and the Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ Replace the FMA20 circuit board or the harness whichever is
flat cable pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and deformed.
harness sides.

Flat cable (between FMA20 31 Poor contact between the FMA20 circuit board Check if the connector-flat cable pressure contact is free ¡ Replace the flat cable (between FMA20 and FMC20).
and FMC20) FMA5 connector and the flat cable of rattle or float.

32 Poor contact between the FMA20 circuit board


FMC20 connector and the flat cable

FMC20 circuit board 33 Circuit protector CP1 failure (circuit board end Measure the resistance of the circuit protector and ¡ Replace the FMC20 circuit board.
symbol: Earlier than E) check to be sure that it is close to 0 Ω.

FMC20 connector 34 Poor contact of the FMC20 connector Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the FMC20 circuit
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and board. If the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

FMC3 connector 35 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserter. ¡ Securely insert the connector.

36 Poor contact of FMC3 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP2 (+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
TP4 (GND), touch the FMC3 harness and connector to is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V and it does harness, accordingly.
not fluctuate.

TP2 (+5V) - TP4 (GND) 37 The connector is not inserted in PWA6 on the power Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector.
unit. in PWA6 on the power unit.

38 Poor contact of PWA6 on the power unit Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the power supply side is deformed, replace the power unit. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP2 (+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
TP4 (GND), touch the PWA6 harness and connector to is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V and it does harness, accordingly.
not fluctuate.

108
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion

FMC1 connector 39 The flat cable is not inserted in the FMC1 connector. Check to ensure that the flat cable is inserted in the ¡ Securely insert the connector and lock it on both the left-hand
FMC1 connector and locked on both the left-hand and and right-hand sides.
right-hand sides.

40 Poor contact between the FMC1 connector and the Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
flat cable pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

Flat cable (between FMC20 41 The flat cable is not of the specified shielded type. Check to ensure that the flat cable is covered with a ¡ Replace the flat cable (between FMC20 and CTL20).
and CTL20) black shield.

42 Poor contact between the FMC1 connector and the Check if the connector-flat cable pressure contact is free ¡
flat cable of rattle or float.

43 Poor contact between the CTL13 connector and the


flat cable

CTL20 circuit board 44 Circuit protector CP1/CP2 failure (circuit board end Measure the resistance of the circuit protector and ¡ Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
symbol: Earlier than E) check to be sure that it is close to 0 Ω.

U42 45 The end symbol is not C. Check to ensure that the symbol is U42C. ¡ Replace U42 with U42C.

CTL13 connector 46 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the flat cable is inserted in the ¡ Securely insert the connector and lock it on both the left-hand
CTL13 connector and locked on both the left-hand and and right-hand sides.
right-hand sides.

47 Poor contact between the CTL13 connector and the Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
flat cable pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

CTL1 connector 48 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector.
in CTL1.

49 Poor contact of CTL1 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP1 (D+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
TP2 (DGND), touch the CTL1 harness and connector to is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V and it does harness, accordingly.
not fluctuate.

TP1 (D+5V) - TP2 (DGND) 50 The connector is not inserted in PWA2 on the power Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector.
unit. in PWA2 on the power unit.

51 Poor contact of PWA2 on the power unit Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP1 (D+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
TP2 (DGND), touch the PWA2 harness and connector to is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V and it does harness, accordingly.
not fluctuate.

JP2 shorting pin 52 JP2 on the CTL20 circuit board is not on the backup Check to ensure that the JP2 shorting pin is inserted on ¡ Install the shorting pin on the backup side.
side. the backup side (No.2-No.3).

53 Poor contact of JP2 Check to ensure that the JP2 pin is not deformed. ¡ Replace the CTL20 circuit board (the circuit board using a fuse).

109
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion

BT1 backup battery 54 BT1 is not sufficiently charged. Measure the voltage between the BT1 + and - terminals ¡ Start the printer, using the standby switch, and leave it standing
(Ni-Cd battery) and check to be sure that it is 3.6 V or higher. for about 30 minutes.

55 Failure of BT1 Check to ensure that the paper tube outside BT1 is not ¡ Replace the CTL20 circuit board with one whose end symbol is
soiled with leakage. F or higher (a circuit board using a fuse).

Check to ensure that the voltage of BT1 is 3.6 V or ¡ ¡


higher when the printer is on and it falls below 3.0 V
immediately after the printer is turned off.

CTL3 connector 56 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector.
in CTL3.

57 Poor contact of CTL3 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

While measuring the voltage between TP1 (D+5V) and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
TP2 (DGND), touch the CTL3 harness and connector to is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
ensure that the voltage value is close to 5 V and it does harness, accordingly. (When replacing the circuit board, use a
not fluctuate. circuit board whose end symbol is F or higher.)

PAC20 circuit board 58 Circuit protector CP1-5/8-13 failure Measure the resistance of the circuit protector and ¡ Replace the PAC20 circuit board.
check to be sure that it is close to 0 Ω.

PAC5 connector 59 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector.
in PAC5.

60 Poor contact of PAC5 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides.

Touch the PAC20 circuit board PAC5 connector and ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
harness to ensure that the relay on the PAC20 circuit is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
board does not actuate harness, accordingly. (When replacing the circuit board, use a
circuit board whose end symbol is C or higher.)

CP1 61 The CP1 fuse is blown. (When the circuit board Measure the resistance of CP1 and check to be sure ¡ Replace the PAC20 circuit board.
end symbol is C or higher, the circuit board is that it is close to 0 Ω.
provided with a fuse.)

PAC7 62 The connector is not inserted. Check to ensure that the connector is securely inserted ¡ Securely insert the connector.
in CTL3.

63 Poor contact of PAC7 Check to ensure that the connector itself or its internal ¡ If the circuit board side is deformed, replace the circuit board. If
pins are not deformed on any of the circuit board and the harness side is deformed, replace the harness.
harness sides. Be sure that 100 VAC is supplied to
PAC7. Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the
printer because AC7 continues to receive 100 VAC even
if the printer is turned off.

With the printer turned on, touch the PAC7 connector ¡ ¡ Locate which, the connector on the circuit board or the harness,
and harness to ensure that the relay on the PAC20 is the cause of the problem. Replace the connector or the
circuit board does not actuate. Be sure that 100 VAC is harness, accordingly.
supplied to the PAC7 and PAC7 harness. Be sure to
wear rubber gloves to avoid electric shock.

110
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion

Electrical section

CB15 64 CB15 has tripped. Check to ensure that CB15 has not tripped. ¡ Install CB15.

65 Poor contact of the CB15 fasten terminal block Check to ensure that the CB15 fasten terminal is ¡ ¡ Replace the harness.
securely inserted. Be sure that 100 VAC is supplied to
CB15. Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the
printer because CB15 continues to receive 100 VAC
even if the printer is off.

T1 (isolating 66 Poor contact of T1 100 V terminal Check the terminal block screws for looseness. Be ¡ Securely tighten the screw.
transformer) sure that 100 VAC is delivered from T1. Be sure to turn
off the circuit breaker for the printer because T1
continues to deliver 100 VAC even if the printer is turned
off.

67 No power output from the T1 100 V terminal Check to ensure that a voltage of about 100 VAC is ¡ If 100 V is not delivered although 200 V is applied to T1, replace
delivered from the T1 100 V terminal. T1 (isolating transformer). If 200 V is not applied, locate the
cause of the problem as directed below.

68 Poor contact of the T1 200 V terminal block Check the terminal block screws for looseness. Be ¡ ¡ Securely tighten the screw.
sure that 200 VAC is supplied to T1. Be sure to turn off
the circuit breaker for the printer because T1 continues
to receive 100 VAC even if the printer is turned off.

69 No power input to the T1 200 V terminal Check to ensure that a voltage of about 200 VAC is ¡ If 200 V is not applied, locate the cause of the problem as
supplied to the T1 200 V terminal. directed below.

CB13 70 CB13 has tripped. Check to ensure that CB13 has not tripped. ¡ Install CB13.

71 Poor contact of the CB13 fasten terminal block Check to ensure that the CB13 fasten terminal is ¡ ¡ Replace the harness.
securely inserted. Be sure that 100 VAC is supplied to
CB13. Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the
printer because CB13 continues to receive 100 VAC
even if the printer is turned off.

CB14 72 CB14 has tripped. Check to ensure that CB14 has not tripped. ¡ Install CB14.

73 Poor contact of the CB14 fasten terminal block Check to ensure that the CB14 fasten terminal is ¡ ¡ Replace the harness.
securely inserted. Be sure that 100 VAC is supplied to
CB14. Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the
printer because CB14 continues to receive 100 VAC
even if the printer is turned off.

NF3 (noise filter) 74 200 V is not delivered from NF3. Check to ensure that the voltage between the NF3 No.3 ¡ If the voltage between the NF3 No.3 and No.4 terminals is not
and No.4 terminals is close to 200 V. 200 V although the voltage between the NF3 No.1 and No.2
terminals is close to 200 V, replace NF3. If the voltage
between the NF3 No.1 and No.2 terminals is not close to 200 V,
locate the cause of the problem as directed below.

75 200 V is not supplied to NF3. Check to ensure that the voltage between the NF3 No.1 ¡ If 200 V is not applied, locate the cause of the problem as
and No.2 terminals is close to 200 V. directed below.

76 Poor contact of the NF3 terminal Check the NF3 No.1-No.4 terminal screws for ¡ ¡ Tighten the nut.
looseness. Be sure that 200 VAC is supplied to NF3.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the printer
because NF3 continues to receive 200 VAC even if the
printer is turned off.

111
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Visual
Measure Other
Unit Name Probable Cause Check Item Inspec-
-ment Check
Remedy
tion

NF4 (earth leakage 77 NFB4 has tripped. Check to ensure that NFB4 has not tripped. ¡ Install NFB4.
breaker)

78 200 V is not delivered from NFB4. Check to ensure that the voltage between the NFB4 ¡ If the voltage between the NFB4 No.3 and No.4 terminals is not
No.3 and No.4 terminals is close to 200 V. 200 V although NFB4 is set and the voltage between the No.1
and No.2 terminals is close to 200 V, replace NFB4. If the
voltage between the NFB4 No.1 and No.2 terminals is not close
to 200 V, locate the cause of the problem as directed below.

79 200 V is not supplied to NFB4. Check to ensure that the voltage between the NFB4 ¡ If 200 V is not applied, locate the cause of the problem as
No.1 and No.2 terminals is close to 200 V. directed below.

80 Poor contact of the NFB4 terminal Check the NFB4 No.1-No.4 terminal screws for ¡ ¡ Tighten the screw.
looseness. Be sure that 200 VAC is supplied to NFB4.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the printer
because NFB4 continues to receive 200 VAC even if the
printer is turned off.

TB2 (phase switching 81 Poor contact of the TB2 terminal Check the TB2 No.1-No.7 terminal screws for ¡ ¡ Tighten the screw.
terminal block) looseness. Be sure that 200 VAC is supplied to TB2.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker for the printer
because TB2 continues to receive 200 VAC even if the
printer is turned off.

NFB1 (main circuit 82 NFB1 is turned off. Check to ensure that the lever of NFB1 is placed in the ¡ Place the lever of NFB1 to the ON position.
breaker) ON position.

83 200 V is not delivered from NFB1. Check to ensure that the voltage between the TB2 No.5 ¡ If the voltage between the TB2 No.5 and No.6 terminals is not
and No.6 terminals is close to 200 V. close to 200 V although the screw for TB1 is not loosened, the
TB1 terminal block is close to 200 V, and the lever of NFB1 is
placed in the ON position, it means that NFB1 or the harness
connected to NFB1 is faulty. Locate and remove the cause of
the problem.

TB1 (power input 84 Poor contact of the TB1 Check the TB1 No.1-No.5 terminal screws for ¡ ¡ Tighten the screw.
terminal) looseness. Be sure that 200 VAC is supplied to TB1.
TB1 is directly connected to the distribution panel at the
site of installation, and 200 V is supplied even if the
main circuit breaker for the printer is turned off. Be sure
to turn off the circuit breaker for the distribution panel at
the site of installation and check to be sure that no
voltage is supplied to TB1.

85 200 V is not delivered from (or supplied to) TB1. Single-phase: Check to ensure that the voltage between ¡ Turn on the main circuit breaker for the distribution panel at the
the TB1 No.1 and No.4 terminals is close to 200 V. site of installation or connect the power lead-in cable.
3-phase, 3-wire: Check to ensure that the voltage
between the TB1 No.1 and No.3 terminals is close to
200 V.
3-phase, 4-wire: Check to ensure that the voltage
between the TB1 No.3 and No.4 terminals is close to
230 V.

112
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

17. LP1500SC/LP2000SC TIMER STOP ERRORS

<Contents>

In the event that any of the following listed errors occurs when the LP1500SC/LP2000SC (printer) is
started by the timer, the system stops the timer operation and turns off the power to the printer.
However, if the SP1500/SP2000 (scanner) is started by the timer after printer turn-off, the timer will
start the printer again. If the same error that caused the termination of the printer timer operation
occurs again, the power will again be turned off.
When the error does not arise after the printer restarts, the system will automatically restart
temperature control mistakenly. In that case, the shop's operator may attribute the problem to a
mere delay in the temperature control of the processing solution because both the scanner and the
printer are turned on. Since the problem is caused not by a processing solution temperature
control failure but by an error in the printer, appropriate countermeasures should be taken to correct
the error.

<Error Messages>

Error Number Error Message


(1) E-2608 Communication error occurred in Printer.
(2) E-2613 Processor Program error.
(3) E-2614~2617 * * processing tank temperature not rising.
(4) E-2619~2622 * * processing tank abnormal.
(5) E-2624~2627 * * safety thermostat activated.
(6) E-2629~2634 * * solution level has fallen.
(7) E-2504 AOM driver cooling fan malfunction.
(8) E-2505 FM cooling fan malfunction.
(9) E-2506 Scanning lamp cooling fan malfunction.
(10) E-2512~2514 * laser temperature adjustment outside specified range.
(11) E-2515~2517 Abnormal * laser temperature.
(12) W-2518 Abnormal temperature detected in Printer.
(13) E-2519 Abnormal AOM temperature.
(14) E-2534~2536 * laser temperature sensor abnormal.

<Examples>
(1) The system has been preset so that the printer turns on at 7:00 and the scanner at 9:00 in the
morning. The shop manager comes to work at 9:30.
After the printer starts at 7:00, an error "laser temperature adjustment outside specified range"
occurs around 7:30.
→ The printer turns off. → The printer turns on at the same time the scanner turns on at 9:00.
→ Both the scanner and the printer are on when the operator comes to the shop at 9:30.
→ The only problem is that the processing solution temperature is inadequate. (This problem is
caused by the error "laser temperature adjustment outside specified range.")
This error is not recorded in the error log. The error is not logged unless the printer turns on
and the scanner timer drive is reset.

113
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

(2) The system has been preset so that the printer turns on at 7:00 and the scanner at 9:00 in the
morning. The shop manager comes to work at 9:30.
After the printer starts at 7:00, an error "laser temperature adjustment outside specified range"
occurs around 7:30.
→ The printer turns off. → The printer turns on at the same time the scanner turns on at 9:00.
→ The error "laser temperature adjustment outside specified range" occurs again.
→ The printer turns off again.
→ The printer is not on when the operator comes to the shop at 9:30.
(Adequate measures can be taken to correct the condition because the error is recorded in
the error log.)

114
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

18. PRINTER SECTION INTERLOCK SWITCH CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTIONS

<Contents>

The construction and functions of the interlock switches for detecting the condition (opened or closed
state) of the printer section doors in the LP1500SC/LP2000SC are explained below.
There may be cases in which even when the printer section door is not open, a W-2430 or W-2431
error occurs and it is difficult to locate the cause of the error. In such a case, adequate measures
should be taken with reference to the information given below.

<Explanation>

The switches which open and close in accordance with the printer section doors act as safety
interlock switches. They are divided into two groups, those for use in system A and others for use
in system B, as shown in Table 1. In System A, the three detectors (switches) are connected in
series with one another. In System B, the five detectors (eight switches) are connected in series
with one another. The printer control board (CTL20) judges the conditions of systems A and B
based on the conditions of the two 24 V power systems (24V1 and 24V2 systems), which open or
close the detector switches, to produce an error message. For all the doors except the magazine
section door, two detector circuits are provided for each location.

[Table 1] System A System B


Magazine/cutter drive Paper feed system drive
Magazine section door detection D580 -
Lower side door detection D581A D581B
Middle side door detection D582A D582B
Upper side door detection - D583A and B
Distribution section door detection - D584A and B
Exposure section front cover detection - D585A and B
Control power supply 24V1 system 24V2 system

1. Relation with the Power Supply


If any one of the magazine section door (D580), lower side door (D581A), and middle side door
(D582A) in system A is opened, then the detection switch opens, turning off the 24V1 system.
If any one of the lower side door (D581B), middle side door (D582B), upper side door (D583A and
B), distribution section door (D584A and B), and exposure section front cover (D585A and B) in
system B is opened, then the detection switch opens, turning off the 24V2 system.
As can been seen from the Table 1, both of the 24V1 and 24V2 systems turn off when one or more
of the lower side door and middle side door is opened.

115
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

2. Relation with Error Messages


Printer section door-related errors are the following three.
(1) W-2429 "Magazine section door open. Close it. Processing paper fogged."
(This message appears if the magazine section door is opened during paper processing.)
(2) W-2430 "Magazine section door open. Close it."
(This message appears if the magazine section door is opened while an operation other than
printing is being performed.)
(3) W-2431 "Printer section door open. Close it."
(This message appears if a door other than that in the magazine section is opened.)
The conditions in which any of these errors occur are associated with the conditions of the interlock
switches, as shown in Table 2.

System System 24V1 System 24V2 System


[Table 2] Error Message
A B Output Output
The magazine section door is
OFF ON 0V 24V W-2429 or W-2430
opened.
The lower side door or middle
OFF OFF 0V 0V W-2431
side door is opened.
Any of the upper side door,
distribution section door, and
ON OFF 24V 0V W-2431
exposure section front cover is
opened.

As is clear from the above table, the opened condition of D580 (magazine section door) can be
detected only when system A is OFF and system B is ON. This makes it possible to judge that the
magazine section door is open despite the fact that the interlock system A is common to D581A and
D582A. Therefore, pre-cutting will not be performed where no need arises.

(Reference)
A two-series-circuit construction is adopted for the upper side door (D583A and B), distribution
section door (D584A and B), and exposure section front cover (D585A and B) because of the need to
conform to the safety requirements for laser-incorporated devices.

116
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

3. Interlock Circuit Block Diagram


A schematic drawing of the intra-power supply 24V system and interlock circuit is given below.
(Part of the actual circuit diagram is omitted.)

System A

D580 Magazine Section Door

200 VAC (from PAC20) System B D581A Lower Side Door

D581B Lower Side Door


24V
PS2 SLOT1
D582A Middle Side Door
24V1 0V
D582B Middle Side Door

D583A Upper Side Door

D583B Upper Side Door

D585A
Exposure Section Front

D585A
Exposure Section Front

D584A
Distribution Section Door

D584B
Distribution Section Door

24 V constant
supply circuit

24V1 circuit

RL103

24V 24V2 circuit


PS1 SLOT3
24V2 RL102 PWA8 PDC12

LP1500/2000 DC power supply section PDC20 circuit board

117
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

4. Interlock Operating Condition Check Points


The conditions of the switches in the normal state are shown below. When two or more doors are
opened at the same time, the switch conditions are different from those given below.

Location Detector System Condition Check Point Voltage


Magazine Section D580 A Closed PWA10 1-8 0V
Door Opened PWA10 1-8 24V
Lower Side Door D581A A Closed PWA10 2-9 0V
Opened PWA10 2-9 24V
D581B B Closed PWA10 3-10 0V
Opened PWA10 3-10 24V
Middle Side Door D582A A Closed PWA10 4-11 0V
Opened PWA10 4-11 24V
D582B B Closed PWA10 5-12 0V
Opened PWA10 5-12 24V
Upper Side Door D583A/B B Closed PWA10 6-13 0V
Opened PWA10 6-13 24V
Distribution Section D584A/B B Closed PWA10 1-3 0V
Door Opened PWA10 1-3 24V
Exposure Section D585A/B B Closed PWA10 7-14 0V
Front Cover Opened PWA10 7-14 24V
Interlock system A - - System A - Opened PWA10 4-8 0V
System A - Closed PWA10 4-8 24V
Interlock system B - - System B - Opened PWA9 pin 1 0V
- PWA10 pin 10
System B - Closed PWA9 pin 1 24V
- PWA10 pin 10

5. PDC20 Circuit Board Supply Voltage Check Points


For the interlock and output conditions, refer to Table 2.

Check Point
24 V (constant output) PWA8 3-7
24V1 PWA8 2-6
24V2 PWA8 1-5
(Pins 5, 6, and 7 are on the GND side.)

118
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

- The connector layout of the DC power supply (as viewed from the top of the power supply) is as shown in the figure below.

NFB3 NFB4

PWA9 PWA10 PWA5 PWA8 PWA6 PWA4 PWA3 PWA2 PWA1 PWA12

Fig. A Printer DC Power Supply Connector Layout

119
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

- Connection Pin Layout (Connector Number Order)


The pin layout of each connector (as viewed from above) is as shown in the figure below when the DC power supply connector is inserted in it. (They
correspond to Fig. A.)
Note that the pin layout varies with the type of connector. When checking the voltage with a tester, apply the tester pin from the side in which the harness is
inserted, referring to the figure given below.

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 10 9 8 7 6
4 5 6 4 5 6 3 4 5 4 3 2 1
PWA1 PWA2 PWA3 PWA4

8 7 6 5 6 5 4 1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 6 7 8
PWA5 PWA6 PWA8

4 3 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 2

2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 4
PWA9 PWA10 PWA12

120
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

19. CROSSOVER RACK REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS

<Contents>

Please instruct users to observe the following precautions in removing or installing the crossover
rack at the time of periodic inspection and maintenance.

[Removal]
Lift the crossover rack straight up until the whole of it is exposed to view.

Important: Never pull the crossover rack in the forward direction when it is slightly raised. If this
precaution is not followed, the cleaning nozzle or the rubber joint may be broken.

¡ ×

[Installation]
Align the rubber joint with the auto-cleaning hole and push the crossover rack until it clicks.

Important: Check the rubber joint for breakage, and also check if the crossover rack is properly
installed. Improper installation of the crossover rack may cause a paper jam or rubber
joint breakage.

Rubber Joint
Auto-cleaning Hole

<Information>

1. Note that there are two different types of automatic cleaning rubber joints.
Important: - If the rubber joint for the SFA232/238/248 is mistakenly used for Frontier, the drive
power may not be properly transmitted
due to floating of the crossover rack,
thereby causing a paper jam.
- If the rubber joint for Frontier is With two With three humps
humps
mistakenly used for the
SFA232/238/248, automatic cleaning
may not be performed properly.

121
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

2. When mounting the rubber joint in its position, properly orient it. Observe this precaution when
you attach the rubber joint to the automatic cleaning nozzle.

Important: - If a crossover rack is set in position while the rubber joint is reversely oriented, the
crossover rack lifts several millimeters above its normal position, thereby causing
a paper jam.

122
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Technical Information

20. PROCESSING RACK UPPER GUIDE CLEANING

<Contents>

If the emulsion side of the paper is scratched in the processor, clean the crossover and processing
racks. When washing the processing racks, also clean their upper guides.

* In particular, the upper guides for the PS3 and PS4 racks should be cleaned carefully.

(Upper Guide)

<Reason>

If a processing solution or dirt adheres to the upper guide for a processing rack, the paper may
suffer scuffing when it comes into contact with the adherent.

The problem of paper scratching in some cases may not be eliminated even after the crossover and
processing racks are cleaned. This phenomenon is attributable to the presence of adherents which
have failed to be removed from the upper guides.

<Supplementary Remarks>

To remove adherents from the upper guides, it is necessary to remove them from the processing
racks before cleaning.

Because of the construction of the processing racks, the adherents on the upper guides cannot be
removed by the normal procedure for rack cleaning at the time of periodic maintenance.

* For the upper guide removal procedure, refer to Subsection 19.1.2 of the Service Manual under
"Processing Rack Upper Guide Disassembly/Re-assembly."

NOTE: Check to be sure that "MENU465 Evaporation Correction" is set to "YES."

123
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

Error Countermeasures
No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1101 Film or mask When performing pre-scanning: MFC: See 135AFC/240AF MFC: See W-1208. MFC: See W-1208. MFC: See W-1208.
not installed. - 135AFC/240AFC: No film has been detected when W-1208. C: See W-1123. 135AFC/240AFC: See W-1123. 135AFC/240AFC: See W-1123. 135AFC/240AFC: See W-1123.
pre-scanning. (135AFC: (135AFC: Negative leading end sensor (135AFC: Negative leading end sensor (135AFC: Negative leading end sensor
- MFC: No mask has been detected when pre-scanning. Negative 240AFC: MTP1 sensor) 240AFC: MTP1 sensor) 240AFC: MTP1 sensor)
leading end
sensor
240AFC: MTP1
sensor)
W-1102 Light source - Pre-scanning has been performed with the light source The safety The light source Faulty light Faulty circuit Poorly 1. Check whether or not the safety thermostat is Replace the faulty parts. Confirm that the pre-scanning,
cover is section cover left open. thermostat is section cover is source section board: CTB20 connected or activated with the scanner I/O check in the fine-scanning, brightness and
opened. - Fine-scanning has been performed with the light source activated. not properly cover interlock circuit board, broken harness: maintenance mode. darkness corrections operate
section cover left open. closed. switch PWR20 circuit Interlock switch 2. Check whether or not the interlock switch is normally.
- An error has been detected during darkness or brightness board -to- PWR20 correctly pressed when closing the light source
correction because the light section cover was opened. circuit board -to- section cover.
CTB20 circuit 3. Replace the interlock switch.
board
I-1103 Stabilizing Lamp is warming up or stabilizing.
lamp.
W-1104 Scanner This message has been separated into W-1116 and Scanner Scanner Perform scanner correction in the
correction not W-1191.(For the system software Version 2.0 or later, correction could correction could pre-operational checks, or remove and reinstall
performed. W-1104, W-1116 and W-1191 do not occur.) not be not be the carrier with the monitoring screen displayed.
performed completed due
because a to an error.
screen other
than the
monitoring
screen was
displayed.
W-1105 Carrier not - Film carrier is not detected during brightness correction in 1. Poorly 2. Faulty circuit 3. Poorly 4. Broken Replace the film carrier and check whether or not (1) Replace the CTP20 circuit board. 1. When the CYA20, CYB20 or CYC20
installed. the pre-operational check. connected or board connected harness in the film feed is possible. (2) Replace the harness for the plug-in circuit board is replaced, follow the
- Film carrier is not detected during pre-scanning. broken harness MFC: CYA20 connector in the carrier connector. procedure given in the manual for
- Film carrier is not detected during fine-scanning. for the plug-in 135AFC: carrier Impossible: (1) Check the CTB20 circuit board.→(2) (3) Check the connector in the carrier. replacing the circuit board in the carrier.
connector CYB20 Check the harness for the plug-in connector. MFC:
240AFC: Possible: (3) Check the connector in the carrier. → CYA1, CYA2, CYA3
CYC20, CTB20 (4) Check the operation of the indicator LED in the 135AFC:
I/O check. →Broken harness in the carrier. CYB2, CYB3, CYB4
240AFC:
CYC4, CYC5, CYC6, CYC4A
W-1106 This film is (This message is not used.) Same as Same as W-1218, W-1219 Same as W-1218, W-1219 Same as W-1218, W-1219
not W-1218,
processed. W-1219
Printing
impossible.
W-1107 Carrier cover - 135AFC/240AFC has been installed with the carrier Same as Same as W-1210 Same as W-1210 Same as W-1210
opened. pressure cover left open.- Brightness correction has been W-1210
performed with the carrier pressure cover left open.-
Pre-scanning has been performed with the
135AFC/240AFC pressure cover left open.- Fine-scanning
has been performed with the 135AFC/240AFC pressure
cover left open.- An error is detected during brightness or
darkness correction because the carrier pressure cover has
been opened.

W-1108 Removing (This message is not used.) Faulty hard disk Faulty main 1. Restart the system. Same as left-hand column
cartridge drive. control unit. 2. Reinstall the system software.
failed. 3. Replace the main control unit.
W-1109 Scanner During brightness correction in the pre-operational check:
correction - 135AFC/240AFC: Film is detected.
cannot be - MFC: Film mask is detected.
performed
because film While scanner correction is performed after installing the
or mask carrier with the monitoring screen displayed:
exists. - 135AFC/240AFC: Film is detected.
- MFC: Mask adapter is detected.

W-1110 Mirror box not When starting scanning, an error occurred because both of 1. The mirror 2. Faulty mirror 3. Improperly 4. Improperly 5. Faulty mirror 1. Remove the carrier and then check whether or Check the items in the left-hand column to When the sensor is replaced or After the sensor position is
installed. the two mirror box sensors failed to detect the mirror box. box is not box slide guide installed mirror installed mirror box sensor. not the mirror box is installed.2. Check slide guide classify the cause, and then take the reinstalled, adjust the sensor position adjusted, perform printing to
installed. box sensor box sensor. movement.Without the carrier and mirror box appropriate action. using "I/O Check (43A)." confirm the error does not recur.
bracket or installed, move the slide guide toward the rear side,
guide. and check the slide guide returns to the front side by
itself when releasing hold of it. (3), (4), (5) ME
E-1111 Focus Scanning has been performed before executing focus Adjustment data Deleted Calibration is Perform “Focus Calibration (43K)” to check whether Perform “Focus Calibration (43K)” again. 1. Select "Focus Calibration (43K)."2. After adjustment, perform "Focus
calibration calibration. files were not adjustment data not executed or not the data exists. Install the chart jig and then perform Calibration (43C)" again to confirm
not taken over files due to after a new lens focus calibration.3. Select "OK."After the adjustment data exists, and
performed. during software improper registration. focus calibration, perform "Focus then select "Cancel."
upgrade. operation Position Adjustment (43C)" for each
carrier (MFC: for each mask).

124
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1112 Focus Scanning has been performed before executing focus This is the first Deleted Adjustment data Calibration is When replacing Install the carrier and perform "Carrier Focus Perform the adjustment. 1. Install the carrier and perform After adjustment, perform "Carrier
position position adjustment. installation of adjustment data files were not not executed the carrier, Position Adjustment (43C)."If the adjustment value "Carrier Focus Position Adjustment Focus Position Adjustment (43C)"
adjustment the carrier. files due to taken over after a new lens machine-data is displayed as "---", adjustment data does not exist. (43C)."2. Perform adjustment according again to confirm the adjustment
for each improper during software registration. download is not to the menu. data exists, and then select
carrier not operation upgrade due to performed. "Cancel." Do the following if
performed. improper necessary.1. Perform printing to
operation, etc. check whether or not the print is in
focus. 2. Enter the focus offset
value in the machine data setting
screen (44x), and perform printing
to confirm the print is in focus.

W-1113 Density - ND filter density measurement table data does not exist in The When replacing Install the 135AFC or 240AFC and execute “ND
measurement the hard disk.- ND filter density measurement table is not measurement the main control Filter Density Measurement (43N)”.
for ND filter loaded during brightness correction in the pre-operational data is deleted unit, etc., the
not check.- While brightness correction is performed after by accident measurement
performed. installing the carrier with the monitoring screen displayed, while using data is not
ND filter density measurement table is not loaded. Explorer. loaded from the
backup FD, or
the data in the
FD is corrupted.

W-1114 Light source - Light source aperture table data does not exist. The When replacing Perform “135 Light Source Aperture Table
aperture table - During brightness correction in the pre-operational check, measurement the main control (433)” and “120 Light Source Aperture Table
not created. light source aperture table is not downloaded to GMB. data is deleted unit, etc., the (434).”
- While brightness correction is performed after installing by accident data is not
the carrier with the monitoring screen displayed, light while using loaded from the
source aperture table is not downloaded to GMB. Explorer. backup FD, or
the data in the
FD is corrupted.

W-1115 Dark Because the scanner SS cannot check whether or not 1. Perform scanner correction in the pre-operational Replace the CDS20 circuit board. Check the GMB/GMC circuit board
correction not darkness correction has already been performed, the check. carefully.
performed. scanner SS assumes that darkness correction is also 2. Clarify the cause by using a function tester.
completed when brightness correction is completed.
- Darkness correction is not performed when setting
scanner conditions.
- Pre-scanning is performed before executing darkness
correction.
W-1116 Brightness - Brightness correction is not performed when setting
correction not carrier conditions because the carrier is installed for the first
performed. time after the system is turned ON.
- Brightness correction is not performed when pre-scanning
because the carrier is installed for the first time after the
system is turned ON.
E-1117 Lens Scanning has been performed before lens registration. Deleted Perform “Lens Registration (43G)” to check whether Perform the adjustment again. 1. Select “Lens Registration (43G)”. After adjustment, perform "Lens
registration adjustment data or not the adjustment data exists. 2. Open the scanner section cover so Registration (43G)" again to
not files due to that the seal in front of the lens unit can confirm the adjustment data exists,
performed. improper be seen, and then enter the lens ID and then select "Cancel."
operation number and lens focus length written
on the seal.
3. Select "Register."

After lens registration, perform "Optical


Magnification Calibration (43J)", "Focus
Calibration (43K)" and "Carrier Focus
Position Adjustment (43C)" (for each
carrier (MFC: for each mask)).
E-1118 Magnification Scanning has been performed before executing Adjustment data Deleted Calibration is Perform “Optical Magnification Calibration (43J)” to Perform the adjustment again. 1. Select "Optical Magnification After adjustment, perform "Optical
calibration magnification calibration. files were not adjustment data not executed check whether or not the data exists. Calibration (43J)." Magnification Calibration (43J)"
not taken over files due to after a new lens 2. Install the chart jig and then perform again to confirm the adjustment
performed. during software improper registration. focus calibration. data exists, and then select
upgrade. operation 3. Select "OK." "Cancel."

After focus calibration, perform "Focus


Calibration (43K)" and "Carrier Focus
Position Adjustment (for each carrier
(MFC: for each mask)).
E-1119 Focus Focus position adjustment for the installed carrier is not This is the first Deleted Adjustment data When replacing Install the carrier and perform "Carrier Focus Perform the adjustment. 1. Install the carrier and perform After adjustment, perform "Carrier
position performed. installation of adjustment data files were not the carrier, Position Adjustment (43C)." "Carrier Focus Position Adjustment Focus Position Adjustment (43C)"
adjustment the carrier. files due to taken over machine-data If the adjustment value is displayed as "---", (43C)." again to confirm the adjustment
for each improper during software download is not adjustment data does not exist. 2. Perform adjustment according to the data exists, and then select
carrier not operation upgrade. performed. menu. "Cancel."
performed. Perform the following if necessary.
1. Perform printing to check
whether or not the print is in focus.
2. Enter the focus offset value in
the machine data setting screen
(44x), and perform printing to
confirm the print is in focus.

125
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1120 Incorrect When pre-scanning film or installing a carrier, the system 1. Incorrect 2. Faulty mirror 3. Faulty carrier 1. Check whether or not the combination of carrier
combination detects the types of the installed carrier (MFC: carrier and combination of box sensor or mask sensor and mirror box is correct.
of carrier and mask) and mirror box. This error (W-1120) occurs if the carrier and (135 mirror box is used except for the MFC +
mirror box combination of the carrier and mirror box is incorrect. mirror box. brownie-size mask)
2. Check the type of the mirror box by performing
When performing Focus Position Adjustment, "Scanner I/O Check (43A)."
3. Perform "Carrier I/O Check (44?)."
W-1121 Carrier not - "Carrier Inclination Display (43D)" is performed when the Same as Same as W-1105. Same as W-1105. Same as W-1105.
installed. carrier is not installed. W-1105.
- Pre-scanning is performed when the carrier is not
installed.
- Fine-scanning is performed when the carrier is not
installed.
W-1122 Film is Film is detected during brightness or darkness correction. Same as Same as W-1213. Same as W-1213. Same as W-1213.
installed. W-1213.
W-1123 Film Film is not detected during focus offset process. 1. Dirty film 2. Poorly 3. Faulty circuit 4. 135AFC: 5. Broken 1. Clean the cover glass.→2. Open the upper guide 1. Clean the cover glass. 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
improperly sensor cover connected board or Faulty CYB20 harness in the and check the sensor using I/O check.→3. Check 2. Calibrate the sensor or replace the circuit board is replaced. Follow the procedure
installed. glass. connector in the incorrectly circuit board carrier the connectors in the carrier→4. Check the CYC20 board. given in the manual for replacing the
carrier. calibrated circuit board.→Broken harness 3. Check the connectors in the carrier. circuit board in the carrier.
sensor 135AFC: 2. When a photo transistor circuit board
CYB1, CYB1A, CYB1B, D404, D400, LEE1, is replaced, check the optical axis
D409, CYB6, D405, D401, D403, D411 between the sensors and perform
sensor calibration.

W-1124 Film During focus offset process: 1. Strip film has 2. A film Check whether or not the film type is correct. 1. Insert a film cartridge when “Cartridge” is
improperly - An error is detected because strip film has been inserted been inserted cartridge has selected.
installed. when “Cartridge” is selected. when been inserted 2. Insert strip film when “Strip” is selected.
- An error is detected because a film cartridge has been “Cartridge” is when “Strip” is
inserted when “Strip” is selected. selected. selected.
W-1125 Flow rate for During the light source section initialization to measure the Faulty Faulty CTB20 or Poorly Leaking or Adverse effect If the error persists even after the air filter is Replace the faulty parts. Confirm that this error does not
film cooling air flow rate, the compressor is activated by opening the compressor or PWR20 circuit connected or clogged air of E-1231(light cleaned: occur during scanner start-up.
air light source aperture. When checking the flow rate, 3.2 V or flowmeter board broken harness hose. source aperture Check the operation of the compressor using
compressor lower A/D value is detected. between the malfunction) Scanner I/O Check.
lowered. CTB20 and If the compressor does not turn ON:
PWR20 or (1) Light source aperture malfunction
power supply (2) Faulty CTB20 circuit board
for the
flowmeter/comp
ressor
W-1126 Light source (This message is not used.) Same as Same as W-1102. Same as W-1102. Same as W-1102.
cover W-1102.
opened.
W-1127 Dust Dust has been detected when performing pre-scanning. (See W-1128.)
adhesion to The dust-detecting method is the same as W-1128.
mirror box or
carrier
detected
during
pre-scanning.
W-1128 Dust The average value (AV0) of antilogarithm output is Dusty carrier Cotton waste or Dirty upper Reference data Characteristics Clean the mask section, diffusion plate under the If the decreased part of CCD output moves, If the error does not recur, perform The system returns to normal
adhesion to calculated after brightness/darkness correction of the valid mask or something else surface of the is not created of some CCD mask, opening of the upper cover and upper clean the carrier until the CCD output becomes scanner correction in the operation if the error does not
mirror box or pixel range specified by the main control unit. And CCD diffusion plate has adhered to mirror box or when replacing pixels has been surface of the mirror box, and then install the carrier. normal. pre-operational check. recur.
carrier output of the valid pixel range is filtered through a under the mask. the opening of diffusion plate the CCD unit. changed. If the error does not recur, perform the If the decreased part does not move or there is
detected one-dimensional frequency filter (low-frequency cut filter) the carrier on the rear side pre-operational check. no decreased part, install the standard mirror
during and the difference between the maximum and minimum upper cover. of the carrier If the error recurs, perform "CCD Data Display box and then create reference data.
scanner values is calculated. (43E)." CCD output decreases in part.
correction. If the calculated difference and the average value (AV0)
differs 10% or more, this error is displayed.
W-1129 Abnormal Pixels of abnormal light amount (30% or greater than the Interrupted Abnormal light Faulty CCD unit Abnormal lens This error occurs when bright (30% or greater than Perform brightness correction.
light amount standard output value of 128 pixels located on the center of optical axis by source the center of the CCD) pixels are detected.
pixels the CCD) are detected. (big) foreign Perform "CCD Data Display (43E)" to check the
detected matter brightness of the pixels. If only one pixel is
during abnormal, replace the CCD unit.
scanner If amount of light is insufficient at the center, foreign
correction. matter, in the light source section or on the lens may
be the possible cause.
E-1130 Auto light CCD output exceeds 18400 (80% of limit value of 23000) Poorly Faulty CDS20 Faulty CCD20 Use menu 43E to display CCD data. Operate the Replace the faulty parts. Perform scanner correction.
adjustment even if storage time is minimum (5µ sec.) when performing connected or circuit board circuit board light source aperture to check whether or not the
failed due to auto light adjustment. broken harness color changes. And then change the stored time of
high CCD between the changed (normal) color. If the output does not
output. CCD20 and change, a faulty circuit board or harness may be the
CDS20 circuit cause. If only one color is abnormal, replace the
boards. coaxial cable of "Not changed" with that of
"Changed." If the color changes, replace the CCD
unit. And then replace the coaxial cable of "Not
changed" with that of "Changed" on the CDS20
circuit board. If the color changes, replace the
coaxial cable. If the color does not change, replace
the CDS20 circuit board.

126
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1131 Offset Faulty system DA(n+1) value in the following formula is calculated by Poorly Faulty CCD20 Faulty CDS20 If only E-1131 has occurred, replace the CCD20 Replace the faulty parts. Perform scanner correction.
cancellation for adjusting using the field-through level AD value and current DA connected or circuit board circuit board circuit board. If any harness or the CDS20 circuit
failed. the CCD setting value. broken harness board is faulty, an error such as E-1130 occurs at
output value DA(n+1) = (512-AD(n))+DA(n) between the the same time. In that case, use menu 43E to
to "0." The calculated value is returned as the DA setting value for CCD20 and display CCD data. Operate the light source aperture
the offset cancel. CDS20 circuit to check whether or not the color changes. And then
This error (E-1131) occurs if the above sequence repeated boards. change the stored time of changed (normal) color. If
40 times but the offset cancel does not converge in the the output does not change, faulty circuit board or
specified range (512±50). harness may be the cause. If only one color is
abnormal, replace the coaxial cable of "Not
changed" with that of "Changed." If the color
changes, replace the CCD unit. And then replace
the coaxial cable of "Not changed" with that of
"Changed" on the CDS20 circuit board. If the color
changes, replace the coaxial cable. If the color does
not change, replace the CDS20 circuit board.
W-1132 Auto focus 1. During automatic focusing, insufficient contrast is 1. Film is not 2. Low-contrast 3. Improperly 4. Abnormal 5. Damaged AF Check the type of carrier (MFC: type of original and Solve the problem. Perform the adjustment corresponding Perform scanning to confirm the
failed. detected in all evaluated regions (135AFC/N240AG: 2 inserted. (MFC subject installed mask focus position chart on the mask). In the case of Item 2: to each item. error does not occur.
regions, MFC: 3 regions). only) (transparent (MFC only) adjustment data mask 135AFC/240AFC: - Insert film from the other end.
2. There is no contrast peak in the searched range. section in (135AFC/240AF Check Item 5. - Slightly shift film horizontally and insert it.
reversal film, or C only) - Inspect the chart. If the error recurs, press [OK] to return to the
unexposed MFC: monitoring screen.
reversal film) Check Item 1.
(MFC only) - Check whether or not film is inserted.
Check Item 2.
W-1133 Incorrect -During focus position adjustment, the carrier ID specified 1. The installed 2. Poorly 3. Faulty control 4. Faulty CTB20 5. Poorly 1. Quit the maintenance mode, install another 1. Install the correct carrier. 1. When the CYA20, CYB20 or CYC20
carrier ID. by the main control unit and that of the installed carrier do carrier is for the connected circuit board circuit board connected or carrier, and then check whether or not the error 2. If the system returns to normal with another circuit board is replaced, follow the
not match. other machine. connector in the broken harness, occurs in the maintenance mode. carrier installed, replace the CTB20 circuit procedure given in the manual for
- During focus offset, the carrier ID specified by the main carrier or faulty plug-in 2. Check the connectors in the carrier. board and plug-in connector harness. replacing the circuit board in the carrier.
control unit and that of the installed carrier do not match. connector or 3. Check the control circuit board. 3. Check the connectors in the carrier.
CTB circuit 4. Broken harness in the carrier MFC: CYA2, CYA3
board 135AFC: CYB2, CYB3
240AFC: CYC4, CYC4A
W-1134 Mirror box not During adjustment/maintenance, both of the two mirror 1. The mirror 2. Faulty mirror 3. Incorrectly 4. Incorrectly 5. Faulty mirror 1. Check whether or not 135AFC/240AFC is Check the items in the left-hand column to When the sensor is replaced or After the sensor position is
installed. boxes do not detect mirror box. box interferes box guide slider installed mirror installed mirror box sensor. installed with 120 mirror box installed. classify the cause, and then take the reinstalled, adjust the sensor position adjusted, perform printing to
- While creating light source aperture table, mirror box is with the carrier section box sensor box sensor. appropriate action. using "I/O Check (43A)." confirm the error does not recur.
not detected. installation and bracket or
the mirror box is guide.
disengaged.
W-1135 Incorrect While creating light source aperture table: Install the correct mirror box.
mirror box. - 120 mirror box is detected while 135 mirror box is
specified.
- 135 mirror box is detected while 120 mirror box is
specified.
W-1136 Density During ND filter density measurement, the measured Dirty or Faulty CCD Clean the ND filter. Clean or replace the ND filter. Replace the CCD unit.
measurement transparent rate is more than 20% higher or lower than the damaged ND sensor
for ND filter average transparent rate of 128 pixels. filter
failed. An error occurred because no valid pixel is found when the
pixel data is excluded.
W-1137 Carrier, mask During correction/maintenance, the carrier, mask or mirror 1. Carrier has 2. Mask has 1. Carrier has been removed. (See W-1105.) 1. Quit the maintenance menu, check whether 1. Carrier has been removed. (See
or mirror box box is installed or removed. been removed. been removed 2. Mask has been removed (MFC). (See W-1208.) or not the carrier, mask or mirror box is correctly W-1105.)
may be (See W-1105.) (MFC). (See installed, and then perform 2. Mask has been removed (MFC).
removed. W-1208.) adjustment/maintenance again. (See W-1208.)
2. Carrier has been removed. (See W-1105.)
3. Mask has been removed (MFC). (See
W-1208.)
W-1138 Lamp turned - The lamp is turned OFF during correction. The lamp is Turn ON the lamp in "I/O check (43A)". If the lamp Perform the item in the left-hand column.
off. - The lamp is turned OFF during maintenance. turned OFF in turns ON, press [OK].
- The lamp is turned OFF in "I/O check (43A)". "I/O check
(43A)".
W-1139 Mask During focus position adjustment, the installed mask is Same as Same as W-1208 Same as W-1208 Same as W-1208
improperly different from the one specified by the main control unit. W-1208
installed.
W-1140 Mask not During MFC focus position adjustment, MFC is removed. Same as Same as W-1208 Same as W-1208 Same as W-1208
installed. W-1208
I-1141 Stabilizing
lamp.
I-1142 Performing
darkness
correction.
X-1143 Scanner not
started up.
X-1144 Scanner
being
initialized.
X-1145 Working
normally.
X-1146 Error
occurred in
scanner.

127
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1147 Fine- Auto focusing, scanning information setup or fine scanning Faulty hard disk Faulty main 1. Remove, reinstall the carrier and perform 1. Remove, reinstall the carrier and perform
scanning not has been attempted before performing pre-scanning. control unit pre-scanning. pre-scanning.
performed. 2. Restart the system. 2. Restart the system.
3. Reinstall system software. 3. Reinstall system software.
4. Replace the main control unit. 4. Replace the main control unit.
X-1148 Waiting for
start of
fine-scan.
X-1149 Command
queuing
buffer
overflow.
X-1150 Maintenance
cancel
ended.
X-1151 Necessary
files not
located.
X-1152 Wrong file
format.
X-1153 Out of "no"
parameter
range.
X-1154 Out of
"negaPosi"
parameter
range
X-1155 Out of
"ccdTime0"
parameter
range.
X-1156 Out of
"ccdTime1"
parameter
range.
X-1157 Out of
"speed"
parameter
range.
X-1158 Out of "f"
parameter
range.
X-1159 Out of "d"
parameter
range.
X-1160 Out of
"scanId"
parameter
range.
X-1161 Out of "x"
parameter
range.
X-1162 Out of "y"
parameter
range.
X-1163 Out of "xSize"
parameter
range.
X-1164 Out of "ySize"
parameter
range.
X-1165 Out of "mask"
parameter
range.
X-1166 Out of
"ccdRTime"
parameter
range.
X-1167 Out of
"ccdGTime"
parameter
range.
X-1168 Out of
"ccdBTime"
parameter
range.

X-1169 Out of "reqAf"


parameter
range.

128
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
X-1170 Out of
"scnMag"
parameter
range.
X-1171 Out of
"optZoom"
parameter
range.
X-1172 Scanner
adjustment/
maintenance
program not
located.
X-1173 Out of
"scanCycle"
parameter
range.
X-1174 Out of
"rDelay"
parameter
range.
X-1175 Out of
"gDelay"
parameter
range.
X-1176 Out of
"bDelay"
parameter
range.
X-1177 Pre-scan
condition
setup not
performed.
X-1178 Out of
"bGain"
parameter
range.
X-1179 This is not a
lastly
requested
fine-scan.
X-1180 Film
information
not set.
X-1181 Out of "id"
parameter
range.
X-1182 Density
switching
LUT not
located.
X-1183 Error
occurred in
writing file.
X-1184 Error
occurred in
reading file.
X-1185 File not
located.
X-1186 Error Communication Faulty CCD20 Faulty CDS20 Faulty cable Poorly Faulty Check the connection between the CCD20 and Replace the CCD unit. Replace the CDS20 circuit board. Replace the main control
occurred in error between circuit board circuit board between connected CPU/SCSI CDS20 circuit boards. unit/SCSI/GIS
communicat- CCD20 and CCD20 and connector
ing with CDS20 circuit CDS20 circuit
ScanSH. boards boards
X-1187 Download
buffer
overflow.
X-1188 PC command
queuing
overflow.
X-1189 Error
occurred in
communicating
with CTB.
W-1190 Processing GMB or CTB error is detected while creating brightness
aborted correction table.
because error - Film carrier is removed.
detected - Light source section cover is opened.
during - Film remains in the carrier.
scanner - Faulty lens motor, conjugate length variable motor, etc.
correction.

129
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1191 Processing Pre-scanning has been attempted although brightness 1. Carrier is 2. Dust check Remove, reinstall the carrier and perform scanner 1. Remove, reinstall the carrier and perform
has been correction data downloading failed due to an GMB or CTB installed in a has failed after correction in monitoring screen. scanner correction in monitoring screen.
aborted due error when installing the carrier. screen other installing the If pre-scanning can be performed after scanner 2. Solve the problem due to another error.
to the - Film carrier is removed. than monitoring carrier. correction, the cause of the error is Item 1 in the
detection of - Light source section cover is open. screen. left-hand column. If the error recurs, restart the system.
an error - Film remains in the carrier. If the error recurs, check whether or not another
during - Faulty lens motor, conjugate length variable motor, etc. error occurs during scanner correction. Solve the
scanner problem if another error occurs.
correction.
The scanner
will be
corrected.
Remove the
carrier
momentarily,
then reinsert
it.
W-1192 Processing During brightness correction, a GMB or CTB error is
aborted detected when dust checking.
because error - Film carrier is removed.
detected - Light source section cover is open.
during - Film remains in the carrier.
scanner - Faulty lens motor, conjugate length variable motor, etc.
correction.

W-1193 Light amount If the lamp has burned out, auto light amount adjustment in 1. Burnt-out 2. Foreign 3. MFC: 4. Faulty CCD 5. Adverse 1. Check whether or not the lamp is ON. Replace the fatly parts or unit. Perform the adjustment corresponding
insufficient. auto focusing or in bright correction has been converged lamp matter in optical Incorrectly unit shutter or effect of E-1231 2. Remove the carrier and check whether or not Check whether foreign matter such as a piece to the replaced parts or unit.
Lamp may excessively. axis. installed mask abnormal CCD foreign matter exists. of film obstructs the optical axis.
malfunction. or insufficient green output. 3. Perform "CCD Data Display" to check that G
transmitted light output is normal.
amount due to
black center of
film.
W-1194 Film mask Brightness correction has been performed without the film 1. Film mask is 2. Damaged 3. Optical path 1. Remove the carrier and check whether or not the 1. Install film mask. Perform the pre-operational check
not installed. mask installed. not installed. chart on film is blocked. film mask is correctly set. 2. Replace film mask. to confirm the error does not recur.
mask. 2 or 3. Check for blocking matter in menu 43E “CCD 3. Remove blocking matter or replace the CCD
Data Display.” unit.
W-1195 This carrier is (This error does not occur except for the software Version The carrier is Faulty hard disk Replace the 1. Register the carrier in the Carrier ID Registration Same as left-hand column
not 1.7.) not registered. main control menu.
registered. (Ver.1.7) unit. 2. Restart the system, reinstall the software or
replace the main control unit.
E-1196 Focus “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C)” for IX240 film “Carrier Focus Install the carrier and perform "Carrier Focus Perform the adjustment. 1. Install the carrier and perform After adjustment, perform "Carrier
position should be performed for both cartridge and strip film. Position Position Adjustment (43C)." "Carrier Focus Position Adjustment Focus Position Adjustment (43C)"
adjustment Pre-scanning is performed using a film cartridge or strip film Adjustment If the adjustment value is displayed as "---", (43C)." again to confirm the adjustment
not that is not yet adjusted. (43C)” for IX240 adjustment data does not exist. 2. Perform adjustment according to the data exists, and then select
performed for film cartridge or menu. "Cancel."
this film type. strip film has not Do the following if necessary.
been 1. Perform printing to check
performed. whether or not the print is in focus.
2. Enter the focus offset value in
the machine data setting screen
(44x), and perform printing to
confirm the print is in focus.
I-1197 Setting
scanner
correction
table.
I-1198 Stabilizing - Lamp is stabilizing after dipping condition. The system is Software trouble The system is in formal condition if the error dialog If the software is abnormal:
lamp. - When inserting film or starting pre-/ not used for a disappears within 10 seconds. 1. Turn ON the lamp in I/O Check.
fine-scanning long time. If not, software is abnormal. 2. Restart the system software.
W-1199 Auto focus Contrast is Maximum value of contrast is not detected. Insufficient Excessively Scanner optical Faulty CCD or Insert the film from the other end. In the case of overexposed/underexposed film, Perform the optical axis adjustment, Replace the CCD/CDS20 circuit
failed. insufficient contrast overexposed/ axis is CDS20 circuit In the case of overexposed/underexposed film, ignore the error. optical magnification calibration and board.
during (reversal film) underexposed abnormal. board ignore the error. focus calibration.
automatic film
focusing.
W-1201 Perforation 135 film After pre-scanning with 135AFC, the width of all Feeding slip Drive belt Check whether or not perforation rupture exists. When perforation rupture is not found: Adjust the drive belt tension. Perform fine-scanning using film
rupture perforation perforations is checked. If perforation width more than due to dirty feed slippage due to 1. Clean the feed roller and feed lane. free of perforation ruptures.
exists. rupture is 24mm has been detected, this error occurs. roller surfaces. dirty or 2. Adjust the drive belt tension.
Frame detected. Perforation width is detected by the perforation sensor. deformed belt 3. Replace the drive belt.
position may (CTB) When perforation rupture is found:
not be Perform scanning with MFC.
correctly
detected.
W-1202 Pre-scan Pre-scanning 135AFC: This error does not occur. Faulty hard disk Faulty main 1. Restart the system. Same as left-hand column
cancelled. has not been 240AFC: This error does not occur. control unit 2. Reinstall system software.
completed 3. Replace the main control unit.
normally by
operator.
(CTB)

130
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1203 Carrier status Software This error occurs when receiving a carrier-related The carrier is Faulty hard disk 1. Remove, reinstall the carrier and perform Same as left-hand column
changed. trouble command Y while in state X. removed and pre-scanning again.
CTB status reinstalled. 2. Restart the system.
error 135AFC: 3. Reinstall system software.
X=Pre-scanning is possible (Negative leading end nip is 4. Replace the main control unit.
completed).
Y=Pre-scanning is needed.
X-1204 Parameter Software 135AFC:
section for trouble - Specified frame is not the last frame when canceling
CTB20 CTB frame data.
request parameter - Undefined parameter is received during 135AFC carrier
exceeds the error output check.
limit.
Common:
Undefined parameter for carrier machine data is received.
X-1205 CTB20/Fine- Software 135AFC:
scanning trouble - Specified frame number is more than 128 (maximum
cannot be Abnormal number of registration data) when writing frame data.
performed data for - Specified mask is outside the range.
with this writing frame
frame
information.
X-1206 CTB20/ Software If an undefined request or notification is received, this error
request trouble occurs.
unsupported Undefined
with present command
CTB error (CTB)
received.
W-1207 Error solved.
W-1208 Present film MFC mask Incorrect combination has been detected by MFC mask 1. Incorrectly 2. Both 135M 3. Poorly 4. Faulty CYA20 5. Broken 1. Install the mask correctly. If any dust is found, 1. Install the mask correctly. 1. When the CYA20 circuit board is
mask cannot type is sensors (D480 to D484). installed mask. and 240M connected or MSB20 harness in blow it off. 2. Install the button correctly. replaced, follow the procedure given in
be identified. abnormal. buttons are connector in (D480 to D484) carrier 2. Remove the button not to be used. 3. Check the connector in carrier: CYA7, MSB1 the manual for replacing the circuit
installed to the carrier circuit board 3. Check the connector in carrier. 4. board in the carrier.
mount mask. 4. - Replace the MSB20 circuit board.
- Check the MSB20 circuit board. - Replace the CYA20 circuit board.
- Check the CYA20 circuit board.
5. Check the harness in carrier.
W-1209 Light source Light source - Light source section cover open has been detected. Same as Same as W-1102 Same as W-1102 Same as W-1102
cover section cover- Request for moving light source aperture is received with W-1102
opened. is open. the light source section cover opened.
(CTB) - Request for moving light source section balance motor is
received with the light source section cover opened.
W-1210 Feeding film 135AFC/240 This error may not occur because this error cannot be 1. The feed lane 2. Poorly 3. Faulty guide 4. 135AFC: 5. Broken (For the system with microswitch) 1. Return the carrier to the factory because a 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
and scanning AFC pressure detected electrically. clearance connected open/close Faulty CYB20 harness in 1. Adjust the feed lane clearance and install the dedicated jig is required for the adjustment. board is replaced, follow the procedure
are canceled cover is However, software has the following detecting function. widens and also connector in sensor, circuit board carrier guide pin. 2. Check the connectors in carrier. given in the manual for replacing the
because open. 135AFC: the upper guide carrier. pressure cover 240AFC: 2. Check the connectors in carrier. 135AFC: circuit board in the carrier.
carrier's Pressure cover is open when performing initialization of pin for open/close Faulty CYB20 3. Check the operation of the guide open/close CTB6, D411
upper cover carrier section in the carrier I/O check. open/close sensor or circuit board sensor and pressure cover open/close sensor in the 240AFC:
is opened. sensor is MSA01 circuit carrier I/O check. CYC11, D446
removed. board 4. Check the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit board. 3. Replace the MSA01 circuit board
5. Check the harness in carrier. 4. Replace the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit board.
W-1211 Carrier not Carrier is not - Carrier is not installed when operating the carrier. 1. 2. Faulty Clean the plug-in connector pins on both sides 1. Clean, repair or replace the harness. When the CYA20, CYB20 or CYC20
installed. installed. - Carrier is removed while in operation. Disconnected, CYA20, CYB20, (carrier side and main body side). 2. Replace the CYA20, CYB20, CYC20 or circuit board is replaced, follow the
(CTB) - Carrier is removed with film inserted. worn or dirty CYC20, CTB20 If the error recurs when using other carriers, plug-in CTB20 circuit board. procedure given in the manual for
plug-in circuit board. connector on main body side is faulty. replacing the circuit board in the carrier.
connector pins. Poorly If the error does not occur when using other
connected carriers, plug-in connector on the carrier is faulty.
connector.
W-1212 Take out Film cartridge Cartridge detected by chucking sensor (D443) or cartridge 1. Cartridge 2. Poorly 3. Faulty SSI20 4. Broken 1. Check whether or not film cartridge remains in the 1. Remove the cartridge. When the CYC20 circuit board is
cartridge. is detected sensor (D456) when starting the system or installing the remains in the connected (cartridge harness in nest section. 2. Check the connectors in carrier: replaced, follow the procedure given in
when carrier. carrier. connector in detection), carrier 2. Check the connector in carrier. CYC2, D456, CYC2A, SSH1 the manual for replacing the circuit
installing the carrier. SSH20 3. 3. board in the carrier.
carrier. (CTB) (chucking - Check the sensor operation in the I/O check. - Replace the sensor circuit board: SSI20 or
detection) or - Check the CYC20 circuit board. SSH20
CYC20 circuit 4. Check the harness in carrier. - Replace the CYC20 circuit board.
board 4. Replace the harness.
W-1213 Film exists in Film is Film is detected by film detecting sensors during 1. Dirty sensor 2. Poorly 3. Faulty sensor 4. 135AFC: 5. Broken 1 1. Clean the cover glass. 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
carrier. detected initialization of 135AFC. cover glass. connected circuit board or Faulty CYB20 harness in - Clean the cover glass. 2. Calibrate the sensor or replace the sensor board is replaced, follow the procedure
when connector in incorrectly circuit board carrier - Open the upper guide and check the sensor circuit board. given in the manual for replacing the
installing the carrier. calibrated 240AFC: operation in the I/O check. 3. Check the connectors in carrier. circuit board in the carrier.
carrier. (CTB) sensor Faulty CYB20 2. Check the connectors in carrier. 135AFC: 2. When a photo transistor circuit board
135AFC: circuit board 3. Check the CYC20 circuit board. CYB1, CYB1A, CYB1B, D404, D400L, LEE1, is replaced, check the optical axis
LEC01, DTG20 4. Check the harness in carrier. D409, CYb6, D405, D401, D403, D411 between the sensors and perform
(negative sensor calibration.
leading end
detection),
LEC01, DTF20
(perforation
detection),
LEE20, DTF20,
DTE20 (scan
timing/check
tape detection)

131
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1214 Film feeding 135AFC film 135AFC: Film leading end nip is not completed. 1. 2. 240AFC: 3. Poorly 4. Faulty CTB20 5. Faulty nest Replace the carrier and check whether or not film (1) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
failed. Feed feed failure Start timing: When film is detected by film insertion sensor 135AFC/240AF - Damaged connected or or sensor circuit section can be fed. (2) Replace the plug-in connector harness. board is replaced, follow the procedure
out film. (CTB) Process: Film feed operation (max. 160 mm) is repeated 10 C: cartridge door. broken harness board, feed mechanism Film cannot be fed: (3) Replace the cartridge. given in the manual for replacing the
times while film insertion sensor detects film. Dirty sensor - Damaged in carrier motor, motor (240AFC) (1) Check the CTB20 circuit board. (4) Reattach film again. circuit board in the carrier.
cover glass. flexible flange in driver, clutch (2) Check the plug-in connector harness. (5) Check the connector. 2. When a photo transistor circuit board
cartridge Common: (5-phase motor: CN1 to CN3) is replaced, check the optical axis
- Incorrectly 135AFC: Film can be fed: 135AFC: CYB8, M400, CYB1, CYB1A between the sensors and perform
reattached film CYB20, LEC20, Check whether or not the cartridge door can be sensor calibration.
trailing end LEE20, DTF20, opened and closed smoothly using a cartridge
DTG20 opening/closing tool.
240AFC:
CYC20, LEF20,
DTI20
W-1215 Film feeding 135AFC film 135AFC: While pre-scanning, fine-scanning, ejecting film or 1. 2. 3. Poorly 4. Faulty film 5. Faulty circuit Replace the carrier and check whether or not film (1) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
error rewind failure moving position, perforation sensor detects film jamming. - Damaged - Heavily curled connected or feed motor, board can be fed. (2) Replace the plug-in connector harness. board is replaced, follow the
occurred. (CTB) flexible flange in film broken harness motor driver or 135AFC: Film cannot be fed: (3) Remove the film. procedure given in the manual for
cartridge - Splicing tape in carrier clutch CYB2, LEC01, (1) Check the CTB20 circuit board. (4) Replace the cartridge. replacing the circuit board in the carrier.
- Incorrectly stuck to film DTF20 (2) Check the plug-in connector harness. (5) Reattach the film again. 2. When a photo transistor circuit board
reattached film (perforation (6) Check the connector. is replaced, check the optical axis
trailing end detection), Film can be fed: between the sensors and perform
LEC01, DTG20 (3) Film is heavily curled or splicing tape is stuck to sensor calibration.
(film leading film.
end detection), (4) Damaged flexible flange in cartridge
LEE20, DTF20
(scanning timing
detection)
W-1216 Non- 240 This error does not occur. 1. Check film rupture, splicing tape or checking tape. (1) Remove the tape from perforation.
standardized perforation - Film rupture (2) If the film cannot be repaired, print the film
perforation width error - Splicing tape with MFC.
type (CTB) or checking
detected. tape is stuck to
perforation.
W-1217 Film cannot Abnormal This error does not occur. This error is treated as film 1. Dirty sensor 2. There is no 3. 4. 5. (1) Dirty sensor was calibrated. (1) Clean the sensor and perform calibration 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
be fed out 240 cartridge extraction failure. cover glass. film in the - Damaged - Fogged IX240 - Faulty circuit (2) Check whether or not the cartridge door is again. board is replaced, follow the procedure
from (CTB) cartridge. cartridge door. reversal film is board: smoothly opened and closed, and film is smoothly (2) Replace the cartridge door. given in the manual for replacing the
cartridge. - Damaged inserted. LEF20, DTI20 extracted and rewound. (3) Change the scanner setting to "Positive." circuit board in the carrier.
flexible flange in - Faulty nest (MTP1, TAP), (3) Extract the tongue and check whether or not the (4) Check the connectors in carrier: CYC11, 2. When a photo transistor circuit board
cartridge section CYC20 film leader is transparent. D447, LEF1, CYC3, DTI1 is replaced, check the optical axis
- Incorrectly mechanism - Poorly (4) Check the connector in carrier. (5) Replace the CYC20, LEF20 or DTI20 circuit between the sensors and perform
reattached film connected or board. sensor calibration.
trailing end broken harness
in carrier
W-1218 This cartridge 240 IPI error “Undeveloped” tab is detected by VEI sensor (D442) when 1. Faulty nest 2. Poorly 3. Faulty circuit 4. Broken 5. Incorrectly (1) (1) Check the connectors in carrier: CYC2, 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
is not (CTB) chucking cartridge. section. connected board: harness in folded IPI tab - Check the IPI tab SSG20 replaced, follow the procedure given in
processed, connector in CYC20, SSG20 carrier - Check the connector in carrier. (2) Replace the SSG20 circuit board. the manual for replacing the circuit
so cannot be carrier. (IPI detection) (2) Check the IPI sensor in the I/O check. (3) Replace the CYC20 circuit board. board in the carrier.
used. (3) Check the CYC20 circuit board. (4) Replace the nest section.
(4) Check the nest section.
(5) Check the harness in carrier.
W-1219 This cartridge 240 chucking Cartridge chucking sensor remains OFF after rotating the 1. EK cartridge 2. Faulty nest 3. Poorly 4. Faulty circuit 5. Broken (1) Check the spool position. (2) Check the (1) Move the spool to the correct position "4". 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
is not error (CTB) spool 28 degrees during chucking operation. with false VEI 4 section connected board: CYC20 harness in connector in carrier. (2) Check the connectors in carrier: CYC2, replaced, follow the procedure given in
processed, (The mark of the cartridge is not 4 "Developed.") connector in or SSH20 carrier (3) Check the spool & VEI sensor in the I/O check. CYC2A, SSH1 the manual for replacing the circuit
so cannot be carrier (4) Check the CYC20 circuit board. (3) Replace the SSH20 circuit board. board in the carrier.
used. (5) (4) Replace the CYC20 circuit board.
- Check the nest section. (5) Replace the nest section.
- Check the harness in carrier.
W-1220 Cartridge's Abnormal 1) The sensor (D441) detects “Door Close” when inserting 1. Faulty door 2. Poorly 3. Faulty circuit 4. Broken 5. Faulty door (1) Check the door open/close motor. (1) Replace the door open/close motor. 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
door section 240 door the cartridge. open/close connected board: CYC20 harness in open/close (2) Check the door open/close operation in the I/O (2) Check the connectors in carrier: CYC7, replaced, follow the procedure given in
malfunction. open/close 2) The sensor (D441) detects "Door Open" when ejecting motor connector in or SSH20 (door carrier mechanism check. M441, CYC2, CYC2A, D441 the manual for replacing the circuit
operation the cartridge. carrier. open/close (3) Check the CYC20 circuit board. (3) Replace the SSF20 circuit board. board in the carrier.
(CTB) detection) (4) Check the nest section. (4) Replace the CYC20 circuit board.
(5) Check the harness in carrier. (5) Replace the nest section.
W-1221 Unsupported 135 splice The check tape sensor (D411) on the 135AFC detects 1. Incorrectly 2. B/W film is 3. Poorly 4. Faulty circuit 5. Broken (1) Check the printing mode. (1) Select the correct printing mode. 1. When the CYB20 circuit board is
splice tape detection “ON-OFF” more than 21 times when pre-scanning. calibrated check pre-scanned in connected board: CYB20, harness in (2) Check the sensor calibration. (2) Perform the check tape sensor calibration. replaced, follow the procedure given in
detected. error tape sensor. a mode other connector in LEE20, or carrier (3) Check the check tape sensor in the I/O check. (3) Check the connectors in carrier: CYB1, the manual for replacing the circuit
than B/W mode. carrier DTE20 (4) Check the CYB20 circuit board. CYB1B, LEE1, CYB6, D411 board in the carrier.
(5) Check the harness in carrier. (4) Replace the DTE20 circuit board. 2. When the check tape sensor is
(5) Replace the CYB20 circuit board. replaced, check the optical axis
between the photo transistors and
perform sensor calibration.
W-1222 Film is AFC film This error is deleted because the system cannot distinguish Abnormal In the case of fogging, ignore the error and
inserted in insertion the insertion error with film jamming. DX/FNS perform scanning.
wrong direction error detection due to
direction. (CTB) fogging
W-1223 Film too long. AFC film 135AFC: IX240 film 135 cine-film 1. Perform printing with MFC.
length error The film insertion sensor does not detect “No Film” after the longer than 40 (more than 36 2. Cut film when 135AFC is used.
(CTB) film is driven1700mm when pre-scanning. exp. is used. exp.) is
240AFC: inserted.
This error does not occur because a film extraction error
function has already occurred instead.

132
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1224 Cartridge 240 cartridge This error does not occur. (W-1219 occurs.) 1. Chucking 2. Poorly 3. Faulty 4. Faulty circuit 5. Faulty nest (1) Check the connector in carrier. (1) Check the connectors in carrier: CYC2, 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
improperly motor sensor does not connected cartridge motor board: section (2) Check the motor operation in the I/O check. D456, CYC2A, SSH1, CYC1, M444 replaced, follow the procedure given in
installed. time-out error detect chucking connector in SSI20 (cartridge (3) Check the cartridge chucking in the I/O check. (2) Replace the motor. the manual for replacing the circuit
(CTB) within 600 ms carrier. detection), (4) Check the CYC20 circuit board. (3) Replace the SSI20 or SSH20 circuit board. board in the carrier.
because driving SSH20 (5) Check the load in the nest section. (4) Replace the CYC20 circuit board.
load is (chucking (6) Check the harness in carrier. (5) Replace the nest section.
increased in the detection),
nest section. CYC20
W-1225 Carrier's Sensor 135AFC: 1. Sensor 2. Poorly 3. Faulty sensor 4. Faulty circuit 5. Faulty nest (1) Check whether or not the sensor calibration was (1) Perform sensor calibration without film 1. When the CYB20 or CYC20 circuit
sensor calibration When installing the carrier, sensor calibration is performed calibration has connected circuit board board section performed correctly. inserted. (If the sensor cover glass is dirty, clean board is replaced, follow the
incorrectly error (CTB) if the checksum in the machine data is incorrect. If the LED been performed connector in 135AFC: 135AFC: (2) Check the connector in carrier. it.) procedure given in the manual for
calibrated. setting value and comparator setting value is 0 or 255, this with film carrier. LECO1, LEE20 CYB20 (3) Check the sensor in the I/O check. (2) Check the connectors in carrier. replacing the circuit board in the carrier.
error occurs. installed. (perforation 240AFC: (4) Check the circuit board. 135AFC: 2. When a sensor circuit board is
detection), CYC20 135AFC: CYB20 CYB1, CYB1A, CYB1B, D401, D400, LEE1, replaced, check the optical axis
Common: DTG20 (film 240AFC: CYC20 CYB6, D405, D401, D403 between the photo transistors and
This error occurs when the setting values is outside the leading end (5) Check the harness in carrier. perform sensor calibration.
specified range. detection),
LEF20, DTF20,
DTE20
(Scanning
timing or check
tape detection)
240AFC:
LEF20, DTI20
E-1226 Lens control Conjugate The upper position sensor (D103) detects the conjugate Faulty Poorly Faulty CTB20 Check whether or not the conjugate length drive If conjugate length drive section is in the upper If conjugate length drive section is not Restart the system to confirm the
sensor length upper length variable section after the motor (M101) is driven. conjugate connected or circuit board section is in the upper limit. limit and home position sensor is normal, the in the upper limit and home position scanner initialization is completed
(conjugate limit error length variable broken harness If it is in the upper limit: position of sensor/actuator is abnormal. sensor is abnormal: normally.
length upper (CTB) upper position between the Faulty conjugate length home position sensor Repair or replace the faulty parts. - Replace the conjugate length home
limit) sensor (D103) CTB20 circuit Perform I/O check while shading the sensor. If the position sensor.
abnormality or conjugate board and sensor turns ON, mechanical trouble may be the - Repair or replace the harness
detected. length variable conjugate cause. If the sensor remains OFF, conjugate length between CN9 on the CTB20 and the
home position length upper home position sensor is faulty. home position sensor.
sensor (D102), limit/home If it is not in the upper limit: - Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
or abnormal position sensor Conjugate length upper limit sensor is faulty.
shading function
E-1227 Lens control Conjugate The lower position sensor (D104) detects the conjugate Faulty Poorly Faulty CTB20 Faulty conjugate length lower limit sensor Replace the faulty parts/conjugate length lower Repair or replace the harness between Restart the system to confirm the
sensor length lower length variable section after the motor (M101) is driven. conjugate connected or circuit board limit sensor. CN9 on the CTB20 and the conjugate scanner initialization is completed
(conjugate limit error length variable broken harness length lower limit sensor. normally.
length lower (CTB) lower position between the
limit) sensor (D104). CTB20 circuit
abnormality board and
detected. conjugate
length lower
limit sensor
E-1228 Lens control Conjugate The home position sensor (D102) does not detect the home Faulty circuit Faulty Poorly Mechanical Faulty main Perform Scanner I/O Check in the maintenance If meshing error is found or abnormal sound is - Replace the CTB20 circuit board. Check the operation in Scanner I/O
sensor length position when the conjugate length variable section is board: conjugate connected or malfunction in power supply mode to clarify the cause. heard: - Replace the PWR20 circuit board. Check, or restart the system to
(conjugate initialization driven toward the home position for 14000 pulses. CTB20, PWR20 length variable broken harness conjugate If meshing error is found or abnormal sound is (1) Replace the conjugate length drive section. - Repair or replace the harness confirm the scanner initialization is
home) error (CTB) motor or between the length drive heard: (2) Replace the conjugate length motor. between CN3 on the CTB20 circuit completed normally.
abnormality conjugate CTB20 circuit section - Check the movement of the conjugate length drive (3) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. board and PWR1 on the PWR20 circuit
detected. length home board and section. (4) Repair or replace the harness between board.
position sensor, motor, sensor, - Check the harness between the CN5 on CTB20 CN15 on the CTB20 circuit board and conjugate - Repair or replace the harness
or abnormal main power and conjugate length motor. If the harness is length motor. between PWR6 on the PWR20 circuit
shading function supply or broken, replace it. board and main power supply.
PWR20 circuit - Replace the main power supply.
board If the motor does not rotate: (2) Replace the conjugate length motor.
- Check whether or not the other motors rotate.
- Check the motor harness.
If only conjugate length and shutter motors are
faulty, CP3 on the CTB20 circuit board may be
tripped.

If the sensor does not detect:


Check whether or not the other sensors are normal.
If all sensors are abnormal, CP7 on the CTB20
circuit board may be tripped.
E-1229 Lens control Lens The home position is not detected when the lens is driven Faulty circuit Faulty lens Poorly Mechanical Faulty main Perform Scanner I/O Check in the maintenance If meshing error is found or abnormal sound is - Replace the CTB20 circuit board. Check the operation in Scanner I/O
sensor (lens initialization toward the home position for 3000 pulses. board: motor or lens connected or malfunction in power supply mode to clarify the cause. heard: - Replace the PWR20 circuit board. Check, or restart the system to
home) error (CTB) CTB20, PWR20 home position broken harness lens drive (1) Replace the conjugate length drive section. - Repair or replace the harness confirm the scanner initialization is
abnormality sensor, or between the section or lens (2) Replace the conjugate length motor. between CN3 on the CTB20 circuit completed normally.
detected. abnormal CTB20 circuit unit (3) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. board and PWR1 on the PWR20 circuit
shading function board and (4) Repair or replace the harness between board.
motor, sensor, CN15 on the CTB20 circuit board and conjugate - Repair or replace the harness
main power length motor. between PWR6 on the PWR20 circuit
supply or board and main power supply.
PWR20 circuit - Replace the main power supply.
board (2) Replace the conjugate length motor.

If sensor does not detect:


- Replace the lens home position
sensor.
- Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
- Repair or replace the harness
between CN9 on the CTB20 circuit
board and lens home position sensor.

133
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1230 Shutter Shutter The shutter home position is not detected after the shutter Faulty circuit Faulty shutter Poorly Mechanical Faulty main Perform Scanner I/O Check in the maintenance If meshing error is found or abnormal sound is heard: If the sensor does not function: Check the operation in Scanner I/O
control initialization is driven for 1000 pulses. board: motor or shutter connected or malfunction in power supply mode to clarify the cause. (1) Replace the shutter unit including shutter motor. (1) Check whether or not the other Check, or restart the system to
sensor error (CTB) CTB20, PWR20 home position broken harness shutter unit (2) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. sensors are normal. If all sensors are confirm the scanner initialization is
(home) sensor, or between the (3) Repair or replace the harness between CN15 on abnormal, check the harness related to completed normally.
abnormality abnormal CTB20 circuit the CTB20 circuit board and shutter motor. the CTB20 circuit board.
detected. shading function board and If the motor does not rotate: - CN0 on CTB20 -to- each sensor in
motor, sensor, - Check whether or not the other motors rotate. If scanner section
main power only conjugate length and shutter motors are faulty, - CN10 on CTB20 -to- each sensor in
supply or CP3 on the CTB20 circuit board may be tripped. If all light source section
PWR20 circuit motors do not rotate, driving power (+24V) may not - CN8 on CTB20 -to- temperature
board be present. sensor in scanner section
- Replace the CTB20 circuit board. - CN2 on CTB20 -to- PWR1 on PWR20
- Replace the PWR20 circuit board. (2) Perform I/O check while shading the
- Repair or replace the harness between CN3 on the sensor. If the sensor turns ON,
CTB20 circuit board and PWR1 on the PWR20 mechanical trouble may be the cause. If
circuit board. the sensor remains OFF, the sensor is
- Repair or replace the harness between PWR6 on faulty.
the PWR20 circuit board and main power supply. (3) Replace the shutter home position
- Replace the main power supply. sensor.
- Replace the shutter motor. (4) Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
(4) - Repair or replace the harness between CN15 (5) Repair or replace the harness
on the CTB20 circuit board and shutter motor. between CN9 on CTB20 circuit board
- Repair or replace the harness between CN16 on and shutter home position sensor.
the CTB20 circuit board and main power supply.
E-1231 Light source Light source The light source aperture home position sensor (D201) or Faulty circuit Faulty light Poorly Mechanical Faulty main Perform Scanner I/O Check in the maintenance If meshing error is found or abnormal sound is If the sensor does not function: Check the operation in Scanner I/O
aperture aperture standby sensor (D203) does not function when the aperture board: source aperture connected or malfunction in power supply mode to clarify the cause. heard: (1) Check whether or not the other Check, or restart the system to
control initialization is driven toward the home position for 150 pulses. CTB20, PWR20 motor, light broken harness filter unit (1) Replace the light source aperture unit. sensors are normal. If all sensors are confirm the scanner initialization is
sensor error (CTB) source aperture between the (2) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. abnormal, check the harness related to completed normally.
(home) home position CTB20 circuit (3) Repair or replace the harness between the CTB20 circuit board.
abnormality sensor or light board and CN14 on the CTB20 circuit board and light (2) Perform I/O check while shading the
detected. source aperture motor, sensor, source aperture motor. sensor. If the sensor turns ON,
waiting position main power If the motor does not rotate: mechanical trouble may be the cause. If
sensor, or supply or - Check whether or not the other motors rotate. the sensor remains OFF, the sensor is
abnormal PWR20 circuit If only light source aperture and balance filter faulty.
shading function board motors are faulty, CP1 on the CTB20 circuit (3) Replace the light source aperture
board may be tripped. If all motors do not rotate, home position sensor.
driving power (+24V) may not be present. (4) Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
- Replace the CTB20 circuit board. (5) Repair or replace the harness
- Replace the PWR20 circuit board. between CN10 on CTB20 circuit board
- Repair or replace the harness between CN3 and light source aperture home position
on the CTB20 circuit board and PWR1 on the sensor.
PWR20 circuit board.
- Repair or replace the harness between PWR6
on the PWR20 circuit board and main power
supply.
- Replace the main power supply.
- Replace the shutter motor.
(4) - Repair or replace the harness between
CN14 on the CTB20 circuit board and light
source aperture motor.
- Repair or replace the harness between CN13
on the CTB20 circuit board and main power
supply.
E-1232 Balance filter Balance filter The balance home position sensor does not function when Faulty circuit Faulty balance Poorly Mechanical Faulty main Perform Scanner I/O Check in the maintenance If meshing error is found or abnormal sound is If the sensor does not function: Check the operation in Scanner I/O
control initialization the motor is driven toward the home position for 2000 board: filter motor or connected or malfunction in power supply mode to clarify the cause. heard: (1) Check whether or not the other Check, or restart the system to
sensor error (CTB) pulses. CTB20, PWR20 balance filter broken harness filter unit (1) Replace the balance filter unit. sensors are normal. If all sensors are confirm the scanner initialization is
(home) home position between the (2) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. abnormal, check the harness related to completed normally.
abnormality sensor, or CTB20 circuit (3) Repair or replace the harness between the CTB20 circuit board.
detected. abnormal board and CN14 on the CTB20 circuit board and light (2) Perform I/O check while shading the
shading function motor, sensor, source aperture motor. sensor. If the sensor turns ON,
main power If the motor does not rotate: mechanical trouble may be the cause. If
supply or - Check whether or not the other motors rotate. the sensor remains OFF, the sensor is
PWR20 circuit If only light source aperture and balance filter faulty.
board motors are faulty, CP1 on the CTB20 circuit (3) Replace the balance filter home
board may be tripped. If all motors do not rotate, position sensor.
driving power (+24V) may not be present. (4) Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
- Replace the CTB20 circuit board. (5) Repair or replace the harness
- Replace the PWR20 circuit board. between CN10 on CTB20 circuit board
- Repair or replace the harness between CN3 and balance filter home position sensor.
on the CTB20 circuit board and PWR1 on the
PWR20 circuit board.
- Repair or replace the harness between PWR6 on
the PWR20 circuit board and main power supply.
- Replace the main power supply.
- Replace the shutter motor.
(4) - Repair or replace the harness between
CN14 on the CTB20 circuit board and balance
filter motor.
- Repair or replace the harness between CN13 on
the CTB20 circuit board and main power supply.

134
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1233 Error MFC slide (1) State of sensor (D485) does not change from "Shaded" 1. Abnormal 2. Faulty circuit 3. Poorly 4. Faulty slide 5. Broken Replace the carrier. (1) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. 1. When the CYA20 circuit board is
occurred in table motor to "Transparent" after the slide table moves 15 mm from the plug-in board: CYA20, connected table motor or harness in (2) Replace the plug-in connector harness. replaced, follow the procedure given in
slider control initialization mask setting position. connector CTB20, SSD20 connector in slide table motor carrier If film cannot be fed: (3) Check the connectors in carrier: (5-phase the manual for replacing the circuit
sensor (home error (2) State of sensor (D485) does not change from "Shaded" harness (slide table carrier driver (1) Check the CTB20 circuit board. motor: CN1 to CN3), M480, CYA6, SSD1 board in the carrier.
position). to "Transparent" after the slide table moves 14 mm toward home position (2) Check the plug-in connector harness. (4) Replace the slide table motor or slide table 2. Adjust the position of all masks.
the mask setting position. detection) motor driver.
If film can be fed: (5) Replace the CYA20 or SSD20 circuit board.
(3) Check the connector in carrier.
(4) Check the operation of feed motor in the I/O
check.
(5) Check the slide table stop sensor in the I/O
check. (Rotate the slide table stop position detecting
plate by hand.)
(6) Check the CYA20 circuit board.
(7) Check the harness in carrier.
E-1234 Film nip 135 nip motor The nip home position sensor (D407) does not turn ON 1. Faulty motor, 2. Poorly 3. Faulty circuit 4. Broken 5. Motor gears (1) Check the operation of the motor in the I/O (1) Replace the motor. 1. When the CYB20 circuit board is
control initialization when the motor (M401) is driven for 3144 pulses to initialize broken drive connected board: CYC20 harness in not properly check. (2) Grease soft nip cam. replaced, follow the procedure given in
sensor error the 135AFC soft nip. belt or loose belt connector in or SSE20 (soft carrier meshing due to (2) Check whether or not the motor gear meshing (3) Replace the belt or adjust belt tension. the manual for replacing the circuit
(home) tension carrier. nip home increased load occurs. (4) Check the connector in carrier: CYB9, M401, board in the carrier.
abnormality position (3) Check whether or not the drive belt is broken or CYB6, D407 2. Adjust the belt tension.
detected. detection) belt tension is loose. (5) Replace the CYB20 or SSE20 circuit board
(4) Check the connector in carrier.
(5) Check the operation of soft nip home position
sensor.
(6) Check the CYB20 circuit board.
(7) Check the harness in carrier.
E-1235 Variable film 135 LHP The home position sensor does not turn ON/OFF when 1. Film mask 2. Film mask 3. Poorly 4. Faulty circuit 5. Broken (1) Marks on mask and pinion do not match. (1) Replace the F/P exchanging mechanism. 1. When the CYB20 circuit board is
mask control motor initializing the 135AFC carrier. drive motor rack and pinion connected board: CYB20, harness in (2) Check the operation of the mask drive motor in (2) Replace the mask motor. replaced, follow the procedure given in
sensor initialization meshing error meshing error connector in SSE20 (film carrier the I/O check. (3) Check the connector in carrier: CYB9, M403, the manual for replacing the circuit
(home) error due to carrier mask home (3) Check the connector. CYB1, CYB1B, D409 board in the carrier.
abnormality interference position (4) Check the operation of mask sensor in the I/O (4) Replace the CYB20 or SSE20 circuit board.
detected. detection) check.
(5) Check the CYB20 circuit board.
(6) Check the harness in carrier.
E-1236 Cartridge 240 door The door open/close sensor (D441) on the 240AFC 1. Loose door 2. Faulty door 3. Poorly 4. Faulty circuit 5. Broken (1) Check whether or not the motor mounting (1) Tighten the motor mounting screws. 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
door control motor remains “Close” after the motor is driven toward door open/close open/close connected board: CYC20, harness in screws are loose. (2) Replace the motor. replaced, follow the procedure given in
sensor initialization “Open” position for 536 pulses. motor (M441) motor (M441). connector in SSF20 (door carrier (2) Check the operation of the door motor in the I/O (3) Check the connector in carrier: CYC7, the manual for replacing the circuit
(home) error mounting carrier open/close check. M441, CYC2, CYC2A board in the carrier.
abnormality screws. detection) (3) Check the connector in carrier. (4) Replace the CYB20 or SSF20 circuit board.
detected. (4) Check the operation of the door open/close
sensor in the I/O check.
(5) Check the CYB20 circuit board.
(6) Check the harness in carrier
E-1237 Spool control Spool motor The VEI sensor (D442) does not function VEI when driving 1. Faulty spool 2. Poorly 3. Faulty circuit 4. Broken (1) Check the operation of the spool motor in the I/O (1) Replace the spool motor. 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
sensor initialization the spool motor (M442) twice. motor connected board: CYC20 harness in check. (2) Check the connectors in carrier: CYC7, replaced, follow the procedure given in
(home) error connector in or SSH20 (VEI, carrier (2) Check the connector in carrier. M442, CYC2, CYC2A, SSH1 the manual for replacing the circuit
abnormality carrier. chucking (3) Check the operation of the VEI sensor in the I/O (3) Replace the CYB20 or SSH20 circuit board. board in the carrier.
detected. detection) check.
(4) Check the CYC20 circuit board.
(5) Check the harness in carrier.
W-1238 Scanning Abnormal - The port indicating lamp is monitored for abnormality The lamp is Abnormal lamp Turn the lamp OFF in "I/O Check (43A)", cool the Replace the lamp.
lamp lamp (CTB) every 25 ms. If the same value is monitored two about to burn power supply lamp for a few minutes, remove the lamp and check
abnormality consecutive times, this error occurs. out. whether or not the lamp is about to burn out.
detected. - Lamp power supply voltage fluctuates because the lamp
is about to burn out.
W-1239 Scanner Abnormal The port indicating safety thermostat error is monitored Clogged light Faulty light Clogged light Faulty light - Clean the light source section air filter. - Keep enough space between the scanner and None
section temperature every 25 ms. If the same value is monitored two source section source section source section source section - Check the operation of the cooling fan. the wall.
temperature in scanner consecutive times, this error occurs. air filter cooling fan air outlet safety - Reset the safety thermostat. - If the safety thermostat cannot be reset,
too high. section thermostat replace the safety thermostat.
(safety
thermostat
error) (CTB)
E-1240 Error MFC slide The slide table stop sensor (D486) on the MFC does not 1. Loose screws 2. Faulty slide 3. Poorly 4. Faulty circuit 5. Slide table Replace the carrier. (1) Replace the CTB20 circuit board. 1. When the CYA20 circuit board is
occurred in table drive function when the table is driven for 3.0 mm. securing knob. table feed motor connected or board: CYA20, interference (2) Replace the plug-in connector harness. replaced, follow the procedure given in
slider drive error broken harness CTB20, SSJ20 If film cannot be fed: (3) Check the connectors in carrier: (5-phase the manual for replacing the circuit
axis stop in carrier (slide table stop (1) Check the CTB20 circuit board. motor: CN1 to CN3), M480, CYA4, D486 board in the carrier.
sensor (home sensor) (2) Check the plug-in connector harness. (4) Tighten the screw securing the slide table
position). stop position detecting plate, or replace the
If film can be fed: slide table motor or slide table motor driver.
(3) Check the connector in carrier. (5) Replace the SSJ20 circuit board.
(4) Check the operation of feed motor in the I/O (6) Replace the CYA20 circuit board.
check.
(5) Check the slide table stop sensor in the I/O
check. (Rotate the slide table stop position detecting
plate by hand.)
(6) Check the CYA20 circuit board.
(7) Check the harness in carrier.
W-1241 Carrier The carrier - Fine-scanning is performed without the carrier installed. Same as Same as W-1211 Same as W-1211 Same as W-1211
removed. has been - The carrier has been removed while fine-scanning. W-1211
removed
when
fine-scanning
.

135
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
X-1242 Process not There is no 135AFC:
performed frame data. - Specified frame information is not registered when
due to lack of fine-scanning.
frame - Specified frame information is not registered when moving
information. frame position.
- Specified frame number is more than 128 (maximum
number of registration data) when reading frame data.
W-1243 Cartridge Reshaped The TPA sensor (D455) functions “Two-time reshaped film” Two-time 1. When printing reshaped film, print it with 2.
reshaped. cartridge is because length between the TP and the DTP is less than reshaped film MFC. (1) Check the operation of TAP
detected. 77.6mm. cartridge is 2. If it is not a reshaped film, check TAP sensor sensor.
inserted. in the I/O check. (2) Perform sensor calibration.
W-1244 Carrier's Magnetic A single track cannot be read three times when data are Solid matter Faulty edge Loose, poorly - Check whether or not the edge following Call technical representative in the case of
magnetic head reading written to all four tracks on the trailer section. stuck to following connected or mechanism operates smoothly. abnormal adjustment.
head is error magnetic head. mechanism on broken harness. - Check whether or not the screws mounting the
stained. magnetic head. magnetic head are tight.
- Check the performance of the reading head.
If the reading performance is lower than the
standard, clean the reading head.
If the reading performance is higher than the
standard, clean the writing head.
W-1245 Carrier cover Pressure Pressure cover is open when installing the carrier. (This Same as Same as W-1210 Same as W-1210 Same as W-1210
is open. cover is open error does not occur because the cover sensor has been W-1210
when deleted.)
installing the
carrier.
W-1246 Film is too Nip of both
short. feed rollers is
Cannot be released.
scanned at (CTB/135)
correct frame
position.
E-1247 Carrier Carrier Carrier is Faulty carrier Faulty CTB20 Faulty GMB/C Remove and reinstall the carrier. - Remove and reinstall the carrier slowly. Perform carrier program download. Check whether the harness is
EEPROM EEPROM removed during circuit board circuit board circuit board - Do not Remove the carrier while the indicator poorly connected or broken.
data data is initialization. lamp lights red.
abnormal. abnormal.
W-1248 Wrong carrier Carrier
installed. NC135AG or
NC240AG
has been
installed.
W-1249 Carrier status CTB status
changed. error
occurred
when using
the 135ANL.
W-1250 Feeding film Film feed
failed. jamming
Remove film. occurred
when using
the 135ANL.
(CTB/AFC)
W-1251 Feeding film Film rewind
failed. jamming
Remove film. occurred
when using
the 135ANL.
(CTB/AFC)
W-1252 Undefined This error is
error not used.
occurred.
W-1253 Initializing of Slide table
carrier failed. locking is
detected
during
initialization.
W-1254 Initializing of Slide table
carrier failed. locking is
detected
during
initialization.
W-1255 Feeding Mount loader
motor or does not
feeding drive move from
clutch the home
malfunctions. position.
W-1256 Mount Film mount
feeding error cannot be fed
occurred. to the mount
positioning
sensor.

136
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1257 Mount Film mount
feeding error cannot be fed
occurred. to the mount
positioning
sensor.
W-1258 Undefined This error is
error not used.
occurred.
W-1259 Undefined This error is
error not used.
occurred.
W-1260 Mount Film mount is
remains in detected
carrier. during
initialization.
W-1261 Undefined This error is
error not used.
occurred.
W-1262 Mount Film mount is
remains in detected
carrier. during
initialization.
W-1263 Mount exit Jamming has
error occurred in
occurred. the mount
receiving
section.
W-1264 Slider driving Slide table
motor drive motor
abnormal. locking is
detected.
W-1265 Mount Film mount is
remains in detected
carrier. during
initialization.
W-1266 Undefined This error is
error not used.
occurred.
W-1267 Feeding Mount loader
motor or does not
feeding drive return to the
clutch home
malfunctions. position.
W-1268 Mount(s) not Film mount is
found. not installed
when
printing.
I-1269 Detecting of Film mount is
leading frame incorrectly
failed. set.

I-1270 No mount is Only the sort


set to print. mount is set.
E-1301 Image GMB- Definition only.
processing Peripheral
section
malfunction.
E-1302 Image GMB-Image Definition only.
processing bus
section
malfunction.
E-1303 Image GMB-IM Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1304 Image GFM-MMU Signal is not activated within about 100µsec after image Faulty GFM20 Faulty GMB/C (1) Replace the GFM circuit board. Replace the circuit board. None Perform printing to confirm
processing sending command is transferred to the GFM20 circuit circuit board. circuit board (2) Replace the GMB/C circuit board. scanning operation is normal.
section board.
malfunction.
E-1305 Image GFM-SPL1 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1306 Image GFM-SPL2 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1307 Image GFM-SAE Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.

137
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1308 Image GIP-MMU Signal is not activated within about 100µsec after image Faulty GIP20 Faulty GMB/C (1) Replace the GIP circuit board. Replace the circuit board. None Perform printing to confirm
processing sending command is transferred to the GIP20 circuit board. circuit board. circuit board (2) Replace the GMB/C circuit board. scanning operation is normal.
section
malfunction.
E-1309 Image GIP-SKI Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1310 Image GIP-MKS1 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1311 Image GIP-MKS2 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1312 Image GIP-MOR Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1313 Image GIP-JYN1 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1314 Image GIP-JYN2 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1315 Image GIP-MTA Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1316 Image GIP-SAE Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1317 Image GLO-KR1 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1318 Image GLO-GIB Mode switching is not completed within about 50msec. after Faulty GLO20 Faulty GMB/C (1) Replace the GLO circuit board. Replace the circuit board. None Confirm the front print can be
processing the memory mode switching command is sent to overlay circuit board. circuit board (2) Replace the GMB/C circuit board. performed normally.
section memory controller on the GLO20 circuit board.
malfunction.
E-1319 Image GLO-1394 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1320 Image GIS-IIS1 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1321 Image GIS-IIS2 Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
E-1322 Image GIS-FSC Definition only.
processing
section
malfunction.
X-1351 Image H/W setting Upper module attempts to set an invalid value to H/W of the
processing parameter GMB image processing section.
section error
abnormality
occurred
X-1352 Image H/W setting - Image transfer is attempted when H/W of the GMB is in
processing status error busy state.
section - Faulty H/W
abnormality
occurred
X-1353 Image IIS1 FIFO full This error is not used.
processing
section
abnormality
occurred
X-1354 Image Common Image processing is attempted when the setting common to
processing page not set the order is not yet sent from the main control unit to GMB.
section
abnormality
occurred

138
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
X-1355 Image Individual Image processing is attempted when the settings for
processing page not set individual frames are not yet sent from the main control unit
section to GMB.
abnormality
occurred
X-1356 Image Abnormal
processing sequence
section table
abnormality
occurred
X-1357 Image System call
processing error
section
abnormality
occurred
X-1358 Image Incorrect
processing event
section parameter
abnormality
occurred
X-1359 Image Incorrect
processing event
section received
abnormality
occurred
X-1360 Image Undefined
processing event
section received
abnormality
occurred
X-1361 Image Event
processing sending failed
section
abnormality
occurred
X-1362 Image Image
processing transfer
section time-out
abnormality
occurred
W-1401 Scanning Specified Definition only.
lamp not time has not
stabilized. elapsed after
After the scanner
stabilized, lamp is lit.
perform This error
pre-scanning. does not
output
because the
error is output
from the
scanner.

W-1402 Printer Laser unit Definition only. 1. Printing is 2. Abnormal 1. Perform printing after the LCD display on the
temperature has not performed temperature processor indicates "Standby" state.
adjustment reached immediately control (for 5 2. Restart the processor.
not stabilized. specified after the minutes)
temperature. processor is
This error turned ON.
does not
output
because of
specification
modification.

W-1403 Processor Processing Definition only.


temperature section has not
adjustment reached
not stabilized. specified
temperature.
This error does
not output
because of
specification
modification.

W-1404 Carrier not Carrier is not Carrier is not installed. Same as Same as W-1105 Same as W-1105 Same as W-1105
installed. installed. W-1105

W-1405 MFC mask MFC mask is MFC mask is not installed. Same as Same as W-1208 Same as W-1208 Same as W-1208
not installed. not installed. W-1208

139
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1406 %MAGAZINE% Paper Paper magazine is not installed.
not installed or magazine is
paper end not installed.
processing in
progress.
W-1407 When Print size and Print size and paper width do not match.
selecting paper width
"Auto", the do not match.
magazine
corresponding
to the
selected print
size
W-1408 Back print Back printing Back printing is specified with medium weight paper.
cannot be is specified
performed with medium
with specified weight paper.
paper.
W-1410 Error An error Main control unit: Image processing module returns error Faulty hard disk 1. Restart the system.
occurred occurred during order auto setup. or main control 2. Reinstall system software.
during the during order Abnormal pre-scanning data, abnormal argument from unit 3. Replace the main control unit.
auto auto setup. upper module or memory reservation failure
correction.
W-1411 Error An error Main control unit: Image processing module returns error Faulty hard disk 1. Restart the system.
occurred occurred during frame auto setup. or main control 2. Reinstall system software.
during the during frame Abnormal pre-scanning data, abnormal argument from unit 3. Replace the main control unit.
auto auto setup. upper module or memory reservation failure
correction.
W-1413 Magnification Print Definition only.
too high. magnification
is outside the
specified
range.
I-1414 To obtain the Specified Specified time has not yet passed after the scanner lamp
best print time has not lights.
quality, yet passed
stabilize after the
scanning scanner lamp
lamp. lights.
I-1415 Monitoring An error An error occurred in monitoring. Process cannot be
cancelled due occurred in continued. Error factor is displayed on the screen.
to error monitoring.
occurrence. Process
cannot be
continued.
I-1416 Scanner is Scanner Scanner correction is in progress.
being correction is
corrected. in progress.
W-1417 Error An error Main control unit: Image processing module returns error Faulty hard disk 1. Restart the system.
occurred occurred during auto setup. or main control 2. Reinstall system software.
while creating during auto Abnormal pre-scanning data, abnormal argument from unit 3. Replace the main control unit.
monitoring setup. upper module or memory reservation failure
images.
W-1418 %MAGAZINE% Paper Paper magazine is not detected during index format
not installed magazine is consistency check.
or currently in not detected
during index
paper end format
process. consistency
check.
W-1419 Width of Incorrect Incorrect paper width is detected during index format
index format paper width is consistency check.
and paper detected
during index
width of format
magazine do consistency
not match. check.
I-1420 Post- Processor is Operator's indication is rejected because a command for
operational in operation post-operational check is issued while in processing.
check cannot when starting
be started the
because post-operatio
printer is still nal check.
processing
another job.
I-1421 Post- NG is Operator's indication is rejected because NG is received
operation received from from processor at the beginning of the post-operational
check not printer at the check.
started due to beginning of
error the
occurrence in post-operatio
printer. nal check.

140
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1422 Connection “No “No response” is received from printer at the beginning of Same as Poorly Faulty GLO or Check the 1394 cable. Replace the 1394 cable/Replace the FMA20 None After replacing 1394 cable or
with printer response” is the post-operational check. E-2102 connected or CTL circuit Replace the FMA20 circuit board. circuit board. FMA20 circuit board, restart the
failed. received from broken cable, or board system and perform the
printer at the 1394 post-operational check.
beginning of communication
the post- error due to
operational faulty FMA20
check. circuit board

E-1423 Downloading GMB/C Main control unit: nnSystem down loader notifies error. Poorly Faulty GIS Faulty Faulty main Incorrectly set Check the power for GMB/C circuit (Open the main control unit, and
image downloading This error occurs when down loader has not received reply connected SCSI circuit board GMB/C20 circuit control unit SCSI-related board.→Replace the SCSI cable.→Replace the GIS disconnect/connect each circuit board
processing failed at from GMB/C for 10 seconds. cable or board (SCSI circuit data (at circuit board.→Replace the GMB circuit (especially memory board). Sometimes this
section system harness board or main shipment) board.→Reinstall system software.→Replace the method solves the problem.)
program start-up. body) main control unit.
failed. Restart
the system.
E-1424 Downloading Carrier This error occurs when the main control unit has not Same as Faulty CTB20 Poorly Faulty Poorly When E-1423 occurs, this error also occurs. (See Replace the faulty parts. (Open the main control Restart the system and confirm the
carrier program received reply from CTB via GMB for 10 seconds. E-1423 circuit board connected or GMB/C20 circuit connected or E-1423.) unit, and disconnect/connect each circuit board scanner initialization is completed
program download broken harness board broken harness Check the LED (D1) on the CTB20 circuit board. (especially memory board). Sometimes this normally.
failed. failed at between CTB between CTB If the LED is OFF: method resolves the problem.)
system and GMB and main power (1) Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
start-up. supply (2) Replace the harness between CN1 on the
CTB20 and main power supply.
If the LED is ON:
(1) Replace the harness between CN5 on CTB20
and CN4 on GMB20.
(2) Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
(3) Replace the GMB20 circuit board.

E-1425 Printer Processor Main control unit: An error is returned during processor Same as Poorly Faulty Faulty hard disk When E-1424 occurs, this error also occurs. (See Replace the 1394 cable.→Replace the FMA
initialization initialization initialization (EZPRN_DO_INIT) E-1424 connected 1394 FMA/FMC/CTL/ or main control E-1424.). circuit board.→Replace the FMC circuit
failed. Call failed during cable GLO/GMB unit board.→Replace the CTL circuit
technical system Output driver process (EzPrin.exe): circuit board If E-1424 does not occur: board.→Replace the GLO circuit
representative. initialization An error is returned when Create Process of initialization Replace the 1394 cable.→Replace the FMA circuit board.→Replace the GMB circuit
(communication sequencer (PrnInit.exe) fails. board.→Replace the FMC circuit board.→Replace board.→Reinstall system software.→Replace
error) the CTL circuit board.→Replace the GLO circuit the main control unit.
board.→Replace the GMB circuit board.→Reinstall
system software.→Replace the main control unit.
W-1426 Remote Printer’s Main control unit: When sending remote power control The circuit Poorly Poorly Faulty FMA20 Faulty CTL20 Check the circuit breaker.→Check the 1394 cable Turn ON the circuit breaker. With regard to the installation Start up the printer from the
printer remote power command to nnSystem on GMB: breaker of the connected or connected or circuit board circuit board (on both scanner and printer sides).→Check the Replace the 1394 cable. procedure after replacing the CTL20 scanner.
operation ON failed at (1) Command time-out (5 sec.) occurs. printer is OFF. broken 1394 broken harness harness between FMC20 and CTL20.→Replace the Replace the harness between FMC20 and circuit board, refer to Installation
failed. system (2) An error is notified. cable between FMA20 circuit board. CTL20. Manual.
start-up. FMC20 and Replace the FMA20 circuit board.
CTL20 Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
W-1427 Connection Error Main control unit: Error returned when the printer status Poorly (software) Check the cable connection between the scanner Check the cable connection between the None Restart the system to confirm the
with printer returned notice registering command is issued at start-up. connected or and printer. Check whether or not FG is loose. scanner and printer. Check whether or not FG is error does not recur.
failed. when the broken 1394 loose.
printer status cable
notice
registering
command is
issued at
start-up.
W-1428 Connection Error Main control unit: Error returned when the magazine status Poorly (software) Check the cable connection between the scanner Check the cable connection between the None Restart the system to confirm the
with printer returned retrieving command is issued to printer at start-up. connected or and printer. Check whether or not FG is loose. scanner and printer. Check whether or not FG is error does not recur.
failed. when the broken 1394 loose.
magazine cable
status
retrieving
command is
issued to
printer at
start-up.
W-1429 Carrier cover The carrier The carrier pressure cover is open. Same as Same as W-1210 Same as W-1210 Same as W-1210
opened. pressure W-1210
cover is
open.
W-1430 Light source The light The light source section cover is open. Same as Same as W-1102 Same as W-1102 Same as W-1102
section cover source W-1102
opened. section cover
is open.
W-1431 Software Error Error occurred when reading the resource manager’s Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system software.
error occurred parameter setting. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
occurred. when reading unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
the resource
manager’s
parameter
setting.

141
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1432 Communication Error Main control unit: SCSI error or communication time-out (2 Poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty GMB Check or replace the SCSI cable.→Replace the GIS Check or replace the SCSI cable.→Replace the
error occurred min.) occurred when transferring image processing connected SCSI connected SCSI connected GIS circuit board circuit board.→Replace the GMB circuit GIS circuit board.→Replace the GMB circuit
occurred when setting condition into GMB20 circuit board. cable board on main circuit board (DMA to board.→Reinstall system software.→Replace the board.→Reinstall system software.→Replace
between parameters to control unit memory) main control unit. the main control unit.
main GMB.
controller and
image
processor
(sending
parameter
failed).

E-1433 Communication Error Main control unit: SCSI error or communication time-out (2 Poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty Check or replace the SCSI cable.→Replace the GIS Check or replace the SCSI cable.→Replace the
error occurred min.) occurred when transferring image process start connected SCSI connected SCSI connected GIS GMB/GFM/GIP/ circuit board.→Replace the GFM circuit GIS circuit board.→Replace the GFM circuit
occurred when starting command for fine-scanning into GMB20 circuit board. cable board on main circuit board GLO or other board.→Replace the GIP circuit board.→Replace board.→Replace the GIP circuit
between JOB list control unit circuit board the GLO circuit board.→Replace the CDS circuit board.→Replace the GLO circuit
main (DoFineIp_xx (Image transfer board.→Replace the GMB circuit board.→Reinstall board.→Replace the CDS circuit
controller and x) is not system software.→Replace the main control unit. board.→Replace the GMB circuit
image completed.) board.→Reinstall system software.→Replace
processor the main control unit.
(image
processing
control
failure).
E-1434 Communication JOB list Main control unit: SCSI error, 1394 communication error or Poorly - Poorly Faulty When pre-scanning or status display is possible Check or replace the 1394 cable. Check or Check the circuit boards in the image
error occurred results in NG. time-out occurred when receiving image process result connected 1394 connected SCSI GMB/GFM/GIP/ without system restarted: replace the SCSI cable. Replace the FMA processing section with the function
between main command from GMB20 circuit board. cable, faulty cable GLO or other - Printer section is not ready to receive images. circuit board. Replace the FMC circuit tester.
controller and GLO or CTL - Poorly circuit board - Printer fails ISO transfer. board.→Replace the CTL circuit board.
image circuit board. connected or (Image transfer When pre-scanning or status display is impossible: →Replace the GLO circuit board. →Replace the
processor faulty SCSI is not - Scanner hangs up. GIS circuit board. →Replace the GFM circuit
(image board or GIS completed.) board. →Replace the GIP circuit board.
processing circuit board →Replace the GMB circuit board. →Reinstall
circuit board system software. →Replace the main control
GMB unit.
malfunction).
E-1435 Error Time-out is Main control unit: Time-out is noticed in transferring image Poorly If E-2102 or E-2108 does not occur concurrently: Check the circuit boards in the image Replace the related circuit boards in
occurred in noticed in from scanner to printer (EZPRN_NOTIFY_SHEETSTS). connected 1394 Replace the GLO circuit board. →Replace the FMA processing section with the function tester. order. (Check the input signal in
transferring transferring (Printer detects time-out (10 sec.) although GMB assumes cable, faulty circuit board. →Replace the FMC circuit board. advance with the function tester.)
image from image from that image transfer is completed.) GLO or CTL →Replace the CTL circuit board.
scanner to GMB to circuit board. If E-2102 or E-2108 occurs concurrently:
printer. printer. Replace the 1394 cable. →Replace the GLO circuit
board. →Replace the FMA circuit board. →Replace
the FMC circuit board. →Replace the CTL circuit
board.
W-1436 Software Error Error occurred during index frame image editing. Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
error. Re-start occurred or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
scanner and during index unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
printer. frame image
editing (set
Frame
Image).
W-1437 Magnification Scanning Scanning condition calculation results in NG. This error may
too high. condition occur when printing index print and magnification is too
calculation high.
results in NG.

W-1438 Software Error Error occurred when transferring data between the internal Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
error. occurred modules. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
when unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
acquiring HW
parameter
from SIP.

W-1439 Software SIP’s index Error occurred when transferring data between the internal Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
error. print image modules. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
creation unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
results in NG.

W-1440 Software Error Error occurred when transferring data between the internal Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
error. occurred modules. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
when unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
acquiring
SIP’s index
print image.

W-1441 Software Error Error occurred when acquiring parameter set from resource Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
error. occurred manager. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
when unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
acquiring
parameter set
from resource
manager.

142
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1442 Software Error Error occurred when transferring data between the internal Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
error. occurred at modules. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
the JOB list unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
start-up(DoFi
nelp_xxx).

E-1443 Communication JOB list Main control unit: SCSI error or time-out (2 min.) occurred Poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty Check or replace the SCSI cable. →Replace the Check the circuit boards in the image Replace the related circuit boards in
error occurred results in NG. when transferring image process condition and image connected SCSI connected SCSI connected GIS GMB/GFM/GIP/ GIS circuit board. →Replace the GFM circuit board. processing section with the function tester. order. (Check the input signal in
between main process start commands into GMB20 circuit board during cable board on main circuit board GLO or other →Replace the GIP circuit board. →Replace the advance with the function tester.
controller and file print such as index print or DSC print. control unit circuit board GLO circuit board. →Replace the GMB circuit
image (Image transfer board. →Reinstall system software. →Replace the
processor is not main control unit.
(parameter completed.)
setting error).
W-1445 Normal Error SCSI communication error or IIS1 FIFO FULL occurred Poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty or poorly Faulty GMB Check or replace the SCSI cable. →Replace the
pre-scanning occurred in when transferring image process condition, image process connected SCSI connected SCSI connected GIS circuit board GIS circuit board. →Replace the GMB circuit board.
was not GMB during start condition and image process start commands into cable board on main circuit board (DMA to →Reinstall system software. →Replace the main
performed. pre-scanning. GMB20 circuit board during pre-scan. control unit memory) control unit.

W-1446 Error Error Error occurred when transferring data between the internal Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
occurred occurred modules. or main control (2) Reinstall system software.
while when unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
retrieving acquiring
parameters scan
from image parameter
processing from SIP
module. during the
consistency
check.
W-1447 FID cannot be Error Error occurred when reading FID. (Error notified during Fogged or Check the film. When the film is the cause, print it with MFC.
read. Press occurred image detection.) incorrectly
[Cancel] to when reading processed film
rewind film. FID.
Check CID,
and install film
again.
W-1448 Back printer Back printer is Back printer is not installed. 1. Incorrect back 2. Faulty D544 3. Broken Check the position of the back printer. 1. Install the back printer properly. 2. Replace D544.
not installed. not installed. printer setting harness for Perform I/O check (for item 2 or 3). 3. Replace the harness.
position D544
W-1449 No valid Number of Number of detected frame was zero during frame detection. 1. Optical axis 2. Lamp burned 3. Faulty Replace the (1) If W-1193 occurred during brightness correction,
frame detected Image size is very small. interrupted out. hardware. GMB20 circuit perform the pre-operational check again.
detected frame was during - Harness board or CCD (2) Replace the lamp.
during frame zero during brightness between GMB4 unit. (3) Disconnect and connect the harness or image
detection. frame correction at and CTB5 processing circuit boards.
detection. pre-operational - CTB20 circuit (4) Replace each circuit board.
check. board
- GIS circuit
board
- GFM circuit
board
- CDS20 circuit
board
W-1450 Error Magnetic Main control unit: (Scanner SS notifies that) Error occurred 1. 2. Faulty 3. Loose or 4. Faulty CYC20 5. Poorly (1) Check the pressure cover is locked. (1) Check the pressure cover is locked properly. 1. When the CYC20 circuit board is
occurred information when reading magnetic information. - Pressure cover MRH90 (read poorly circuit board. connected (2) Check the magnetic head. (2) If the magnetic head is dirty, clean it. If it is replaced, follow the procedure manual
while reading reading error is not closed head) circuit connected harness in (3) Check the connector in carrier. corroded, replace the MRH90 circuit board. for replacing the circuit board in the
magnetic completely. board. connector in carrier (4) Check the MRH20 circuit board. (3) Adjust the mounting position of the MRH90 carrier.
information. - Dusty carrier (5) Check the CYC20 circuit board. circuit board, or replace it.
magnetic head. (6) Check the harness in carrier. (4) Check the CYC10, MRHC, MTHP and MRH1
connectors in carrier.
(5) Replace the CYC20 circuit board.

I-1451 Negative is 135 film 135 film reverse insertion.


inserted reverse
upside down. insertion.
W-1452 Printer cannot Error Definition only.
start printing detected in
because printer during
of %PRINTE consistency
R_STATUS%. check.
I-1453 Film bar-code 135 bar-code 135 bar-code reading error.
cannot be reading error.
read.
X-1454 Internal error. Software Software trouble
trouble
I-1455 Abnormal Magnetic Main control unit: Magnetic information does not conform to
magnetic information Red Book.
information contents
on film. error.
E-1456 Downloading Downloading
135ANL 135ANL
programs program
failed. failed at
system
start-up.

143
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1461 Reading Filed print
digital image image cannot
file failed. be obtained
from the
Imaging
Controller.
W-1462 Digital image There is
processing contradiction
error. in image file
format of the
Imaging
Controller.
I-1463 Digital image Error
read occurred
cancelled due during file to
to error print. Printing
occurrence. cannot be
continued any
more.
W-1464 Printer not in Paper
stand-by. definition
notification
results in NG.
I-1466 Move slider to Diffusion plate Diffusion plate is cleaned before scanner correction of MFC.
diffusion plate is cleaned
cleaning before
position? scanner
correction of
MFC.
I-1467 Moving slider Moving Moving diffusion plate to cleaning position is in progress.
to diffusion diffusion plate
plate cleaning to cleaning
position. position is in
progress.
W-1468 Mask type Mask type of Mask type of MFC is incorrect.
incorrectly MFC notified
detected. from scanner
SS is
incorrect.
W-1471 Image file Image file for
cannot be digital image
generated. export cannot
be created
due to
Frontier disk
full, etc.
E-1472 Communication Printing Main control unit: CTL printing status notification time-out Poorly If E-2102 or E-2108 does not occur concurrently: Check the circuit boards in the image Replace the related circuit boards in
error occurred status (15 sec.) occurs while “Image transfer OK” is received from connected 1394 Replace the GLO circuit board. →Replace the FMA processing section with the function tester. order. (Check the input signal in
between notification GMB. Also E-1435 is not received. cable, faulty circuit board. →Replace the FMC circuit board. advance with the function tester.)
scanner and time-out GLO or CTL →Replace the CTL circuit board.
printer. occurs while circuit board. If E-2102 or E-2108 occurs concurrently:
“Image Replace the 1394 cable. →Replace the GLO circuit
transfer OK” board. →Replace the FMA circuit board. →Replace
is received the FMC circuit board. →Replace the CTL circuit
from GMB. board.

W-1473 Incorrect Composite


template. format to the
extended SIP
failed.
W-1474 Magnification Scanning
too high. condition
calculation
results in NG.
W-1475 Template Template
width and width and
magazine paper width
paper width do not match.
mismatched.
I-1476 Film with Film with
FTPM loaded. FTPM is
loaded.
I-1477 "Series Film with
Scene" film Series Scene
loaded. is loaded.
W-1478 "Series "Series
Scene" Scene"
magnetic magnetic
information information
incorrect. does not
conform to
Red Book.

144
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1479 Template Template and
image size print sizes
does not specified in
match print frame/
size. character
print do not
match.
W-1480 Cannot be Specified
printed with cropping area
this cropping. is out of the
range.
E-1481 Hard disk Hard disk Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
failure error is control unit.
occurred detected in
during the data copy
data copy. process
during post-
operational
check.

E-1482 Hard disk Hard disk Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
failure fault is control unit.
occurred. detected
when file is
imported from
or exported to
the Imaging
Controller.
E-1483 Index image Image data Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
data cannot file cannot be control unit.
be read. read out when
editing index
print.
W-1484 Printer Printer
initialization initialization
failed. failed at
system
start-up.
W-1485 Couldn't Image file for
generate digital image
image file due export cannot
to insufficient be created
disk space. due to
Frontier disk
full, etc.
W-1486 Writing image Image file
file failed. export fails
because
network
connection is
down.
W-1487 Print size and Print size and
magazine paper width
paper width do not match.
do not match.
W-1488 Template Template
width and width and
print width paper width
mismatched. do not match.
W-1489 Scanner Scanner
correction not correction or
performed diffusion plate
because the cleaning
mask for MFC cannot be
is installed. performed
because the
mask for MFC
is installed.
I-1490 Prepare for Clean the
the diffusion diffusion plate
plate before the
cleaning. scanner
correction of
MFC.
I-1491 Clean the Film slider on
diffusion MFC has
plate. reached the
diffusion plate
cleaning
position.
W-1492 Carrier not Carrier is not
installed. installed.

145
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
I-1493 Setting up the Correction
correction table setup is
table. in progress
because the
current table
is different.
W-1494 An error An error
occurred in occurred in
calling the calling the
exposure exposure
condition condition
retrieve. retrieve.
W-1495 Auto is Paper types
currently of the upper
selected. and lower
magazine do
not match.
X-1495 Parameter to
display error
(%TableItem%)
incorrect.
X-1496 Sub-system Error SS: Sub
ID is incorrect system ID is
(%NUM%). incorrect
when an error
display is
requested.
→software
trouble
X-1497 Incorrect Error SS:
Error No. Error number
is incorrect
when an error
display is
requested.
→software
trouble
E-1498 Error table Error SS: The contents of error table file is incorrect. Faulty hard disk (1) Reinstall system software. Perform the same operation to confirm
item →Faulty hard disk on main control unit on main control (2) Replace the main control unit. the error does not occur.
( %TableItem unit If another error is displayed, take
% ) cannot be appropriate action.
omitted.
E-1499 Error table Error SS: The contents of error table file is incorrect. Faulty hard disk (1) Reinstall system software. Perform the same operation to confirm
items →Faulty hard disk on main control unit on main control (2) Replace the main control unit. the error does not occur.
( %TableItem unit If another error is displayed, take
% ) are appropriate action.
incorrect.
I-1501 Selected This message
function appears when
cannot be selecting an
used. unsupported
function.
I-1502 Insert FD.
W-1503 FD not
inserted.
I-1504 Insert next FD.
W-1505 Wrong FD This message Damaged or Replace the floppy disk, or format it again. Replace the floppy disk, or format it again.
inserted. appears when incorrectly
the inserted formatted floppy
FD is disk
incorrect.
E-1506 Reading of Faulty hard disk (1) Reinstall system software. Perform the same operation to confirm
control on main control (2) Replace the main control unit. the error does not occur.
information unit
file failed.
I-1507 Data backup
completed
abnormally.
I-1508 Cancel data
backup.
W-1509 Not enough
free space on
hard disk.
W-1510 Date value
exceeds the
limit.
W-1511 Next
timer-ON time
exceeds the
limit.
W-1512 Insufficient
FD free
space.

146
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1513 Unsorted print
remains.
W-1521 PU800B is not
turned ON
or is
disconnected.
W-1522 PU800B is not
turned ON
or is
disconnected
W-1523 Pricing unit is
not turned ON
or is
disconnected.
W-1524 Backup data File reading error occurred when downloading data from Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
for PU800B PU800B. or main control (2) Reinstall the system software.
cannot be unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
read.
W-1525 Backup data File writing error occurred in uploading data to PU800B. Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
for PU800B or main control (2) Reinstall the system software.
cannot be unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
written.
I-1526 Production Error while reading the production information log file.
information
log file not
found.
W-1527 Production Error occurred when writing production information log file. Faulty hard disk (1) Restart the system.
information or main control (2) Reinstall the system software.
cannot be unit (3) Replace the main control unit.
written into
file.
E-1530 F-DI device
registration
failed.
W-1531 F-DI device
registration
failed.
W-1532 Registration Error occurred when registering F-DIA logical output device.
to F-DI not
performed.
W-1533 Stopping the Printing of the Digital Image Import has failed.
image file
output.
W-1534 Order not
unlocked.
W-1535 Cannot be
serviced.
E-1536 Cannot be
serviced.
E-1537 Cannot be
serviced.
W-1538 F-DI
registration
not
performed.
E-1539 Cannot be
serviced.
I-1540 No order can
be printed
with the
selected
paper width.
W-1541 Print service
not
performed.
W-1542 Print service
not
performed.
W-1543 Print service
not
performed.
W-1544 Print service
not
performed.
W-1545 Print service
not
performed.
W-1546 Print service
not
performed.
W-1547 Print service
not
performed.

147
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1548 Printer not in
standby.
E-1549 Cannot be
serviced.
E-1551 Dialog cannot
be displayed.
E-1552 Cannot start Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
Red-eye/Soft/ control unit.
Cross.

E-1553 Cannot Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
continue control unit.
Red-eye/Soft/
Cross
process.
E-1554 Cannot Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
continue control unit.
Red-eye/Soft/
Cross
process.
E-1555 Cannot Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
continue control unit.
Red-eye/Soft/
Cross
process.
W-1556 This frame
cannot be
selected.
I-1557 Characters
can be
entered in
selected
template.
I-1558 Printing the
image being
composed.
W-1560 Creating
order failed.
W-1561 Sending order
failed.
W-1562 Adding order
failed.
W-1563 Deleting order
failed.
I-1564 Printing
external file.
Wait!
W-1565 Registering
device into
F-DI failed.
W-1566 Pre-scan not
performed,
W-1567 Digitizing
cannot be
performed
with MFC.
W-1568 Exceeds the
available
times of
scanning.
E-1571 Message Perform the same operation again. Reinstall system software. If the error recurs, replace the main
definition file control unit.
not found or
defective.
W-1572 Incorrect font
size value.
W-1573 Logo or title
exceeds area.
W-1574 Frame with
selected No.
already
mounted.
W-1575 Pre-scan not
performed,
W-1580 Editing error
log info failed.
W-1581 Editing
working
information
failed.

148
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1582 Editing
production
information
failed.
W-1583 Editing
system
information
failed.
W-1584 Editing quality
information
failed.
W-1585 Reading of
sending Pre-
Maintenance
data failed.
W-1586 Service to be
exported not
selected.
I-1587 Reading print
mag. fine
adjust data.
I-1588 Saving print
mag. fine
adjust data.
W-1589 Carrier/mask
and
composite
type
mismatch,
W-1590 RC50D
cannot be
used with the
present
printer
process type.
W-1591 Frame
specified on
invoice not
detected.
W-1592 Frame not
detected.
I-1593 %TEMPLATE%
I-1594 Reading
service name
list.
I-1595 Connect to
Imaging
Controller for
updating data.
E-1596 Service info
cannot be
read.
W-1597 Pre-scan
cannot be
performed,
I-1598 Processing
Red-eye/Soft/
Cross %HQ%
.
E-1599 An error Check the network connection. Restart Imaging Controller. Restart the system.
occurred.
Cannot
continue
Red-eye/Soft/
Cross
process.
W-1601 Film remains Negative
in the 135ANL remains in
feeder ANL negative
section. feed section.
W-1602 Film remains Negative
in the 135ANL remains in
catcher 135ANL
section. negative
catcher
section.
E-1606 135ANL Negative
negative holder
holder closing malfunction
movement (close)
abnormal.

149
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1607 Film Negative
overlapping overlap is
detected in detected in
the 135ANL. 135ANL.
W-1608 Feeding film Film jamming
failed in the occurred in
135ANL negative
negative holder
holder section.
section.
W-1609 Feeding film Film jamming
failed in the occurred in
135ANL the negative
negative feed section.
feeder
section.
E-1610 The 135ANL
negative
holder
opening
operation
abnormal.
W-1701 This is the
last frame.
W-1702 Because the
carrier or
mask was
removed,
W-1703 The custom
setting No. is
invalid.
W-1705 Because the
exposure
condition
retrieve in
progress,
E-1706 This function
is not
supported.
E-1710 Templates are Bordered
not available print size is
for the selected
bordered during
print. mounted/
frame/
character
print.

E-1720 Couldn't use AC mask is


AC mask, installed
because B7 when B7
option is not software is
installed. not installed.

E-1721 Couldn't find There is no AC


the AC type corresponding
for your to the bar-code
bar-code when an AC
input. type is input.

E-1722 AC type not Enter key is


selected. pressed when
AC type is not
yet
determined.
E-1723 AC type is On the
incorrect or it system
is not yet set. connected to
DI Manager
Pro, enter key
is pressed
when AC type
is not yet
determined.
E-1730 Single Scan This message
Digitizing Kit appears
is not during
available. hardware
configuration
check for
single-scan
digitizing.

150
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1731 Cartridge is Film-feeding Check prints and perform pre-scanning again if
removed cartridge of necessary.
while RVMAC is
Fine-Scan. removed
during
fine-scanning.
I-1732 Mount end. There is no
film mount in
film-feeding
cartridge.
I-1733 Optional Pre-scanning
software for using RVMAC
SC135Y is is performed
not installed. without B6
software
installed.
W-1735 A paper size Print width is
with more more than
than 203 mm and
203.0mm feed length is
width and with less than 152
less than mm.
152.0mm
length exists.
It may cause
a trouble.
I-1736 Print size has This message
been prompts the
changed. user to check
whether or
not the
correct
magazine is
installed
when print
size is
changed.
I-1737 Nega sheet
index printing
is processing.
W-1738 Couldn't 135AFC is not
pre-scan. used when
printing
negative
sheet index
prints.
I-1741 The print size Selected
for the nega template is
sheet index not registered
printing is not or not
registered. displayed.
E-1750 Cannot 135 negative
perform the sheet index
nega sheet print cannot
index printing be continued
because the due to
frame incorrect
information is frame data.
not detected.
W-1751 Cannot send Status
the status information
information cannot be
to? sent due to a
communication
error.
W-1752 Cannot get Order
the order information
information for auto
from? printing
cannot be
received due
to a
communication
error.
E-1802 Process is Perform the same operation again. Check the Replace the CCD unit. Replace the CDS20 circuit board.
cancelled operation before this error message is displayed.
because an Use the function tester for checking.
error occurred
during the
setup of the
scanner
correction
table.

151
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-1803 Abnormal Check the air flow sensor in the I/O check. Replace the air flow sensor. Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
flow rate
detected in
flowmeter.
W-1901 Storing the An error
exposure occurred
condition while saving
failed. exposure
condition
data.
W-1902 Cannot print Print request
because the cannot be
printer processed
memory is because the
full. frame
memory on
the printer is
full.
W-1903 Cannot output Frame
because the memory is
image data occupied by
occupy large image data
amounts of because the
memory. output
process to
Imaging
Controller
cannot be
performed.
E-1904 Single Scan Single-scan Perform the same operation again. Replace the faulty circuit board.
Digitizing Kit digitizing kit is Use the function tester for checking.
is not not detected
available. during system
start-up.
I-1905 Mount is 135 film
inserted mount is
incorrectly. incorrectly
installed
when using
RVMAC
(SC135Y).
I-1906 Mount end. Pre-scanning
is performed
when only the
sort mount is
set in the
cartridge on
RVMAC
(SC135Y).
W-1907 Paper width Paper width
of magazine does not
and nega match during
sheet index consistency
printing check for
mismatched. negative
sheet index
print.
W-1908 No frame for Frame for
nega sheet negative
index printing sheet index
and stop the does not
nega sheet exist.
index printing.
W-1930 %MAGAZINE% Paper
not installed or magazine is
paper end not installed.
processing in
progress.
W-1931 %MAGAZINE% Paper
not installedmagazine is
or paper end not detected
processing induring the
progress. index format
inconsistency
check.
W-1932 Print size and Print size and
magazine paper width
paper width do not match.
mismatched.

152
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-1933 Magazine Paper width
paper width mismatch is
and print size detected
of index during the
format index format
mismatched. inconsistency
check.
W-1934 Template Template size
width and and paper
magazine width do not
paper width match.
mismatched.
I-1935 The Error
high-speed occurred
mode while in
cancelled due high-speed
to error mode.
occurrence. Process
cannot be
continued any
more.
(Equivalent to
I-1415)
W-1936 An error Error
occurred in occurred
generating when creating
image in the monitoring
high-speed image while in
mode. high-speed
mode.
(Equivalent to
W-1417)
E-1937 Initializing Download
135ANL files for
failed. 135ANL does
not exist.
W-1938 Print size Print length
exceeds the exceeds the
limit. specified
value.
I-1939 The post- Printing is in
operational progress, or
check cannot printed paper
be started remains in the
because printer when
printing is in starting the
progress or the post-operatio
printed paper nal check.
remains in the
printer.
X-2101 Undifined 1. Defined Output DP: An error code notified from
error error does not SSMN_NOTIFY_ERROR is not found in the error code list.
exist.
E-2102 Communication Communication No response is received within a specified time after a Poorly Poorly Faulty GLO, (Open the main control unit and then disconnect
error occurred time-out has command is issued. connected 1394 connected 1394 FMA, CTL circuit and connect the 1394 board)
between occurred. Specified times are as follows. cable. cable FG. board
scanner and EZPRN_WASH_RACK: 385 sec.
printer. EZPRN_ALLOC_CANVAS: 180 sec.
(Command EZPRN_GET_NUMVEROFPRT: 90 sec.
time-out) Other commands: 60 sec.
With regard to some commands, time-out does not occur.
E-2103 A This error is Definition only. Not displayed.
communication deleted.
error
occurred.

X-2104 Unknown 1. Undefined Output DP: The received command is not found in the
command command is command table.
received. received.

X-2105 Registry 1. There is no Data save sequence (EzSave.exe) or Data download


access failed. key in sequence (EzLoad.exe): The function RegAcc::RefString,
registry. which receives values from registry, returns FALSE.
W-2106 Performing Uncalibrated Output DP: Maintenance is already activated (flagged) Quit the maintenance mode and then perform
printer magazine is when receiving EZPRN_DO_MENT. paper condition setup.
maintenance. detected
Set up during printer
printing maintenance.
conditions.
E-2107 Data files not 1. Data files The "fopen()" for data file results in error. The data is Damaged FD Reinstall system software. →Replace the hard Check or replace the floppy disk.
opened. cannot be Data received from printer is incorrect. corrupted. disk. →Replace the main control unit.
opened when The contents of read data file is incorrect.
saving or
loading data.

153
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-2108 Communication 1. Data Output DP: Error is received from 1394 GW (0x3050) on Built-in circuit Poorly Poorly Faulty GLO, Printer hangs Check whether or not the printer is turned ON. If the built-in circuit breaker is OFF, turn it ON.
error occurred cannot be GMB. Decimal EdbSendError.error_code is displayed breaker is OFF. connected 1394 connected 1394 FMA, CTL circuit up. Check whether or not the 1394 cable is connected Replace the 1394 cable.
between sent to printer. on %NUM%. cable FG cable board securely.
scanner and
printer.
(IEEE1394
communication
error: Code
No.=%NUM%)
E-2109 Communication Data cannot Output DP: Error (EDB code 0x8020) is received from SCSI Same as E-1423
error occurred be sent to GW (0x1052) on main control unit. Decimal
between printer. EdbSendError.error_code is displayed on %NUM%.
scanner and
printer. (SCSI
communication
error:Code
No.=%NUM%)
W-2110 Communication Data cannot Error (EDB code 0x8020) is received when Poorly Poorly Printer is turned Printer hangs Check the power supply for printer. System restart may clears this error. Replace the SCSI cable. If another error occurred
error occurred be sent to EdbSendError.detector is other than 1394 GW on GMB or connected 1394 connected or OFF. up. Check the 1394 cable. If the printer is OFF, turn it ON. Replace the GIS20 circuit board. concurrently, take appropriate
between printer. SCSI GW on main control unit. cable FG. broken 1394 Check the circuit board: Replace the 1394 cable. Replace the main control unit. action for the error in advance.
scanner and cable FMA, GIS20, GLO. Replace the FMA circuit board.
printer. Check the SCSI cable. Replace the GLO circuit board.
(communication
error: Code
No.=%NUM%)
W-2201 Printer switch Printer power Printer power switch is ON at the beginning of the Printer power Poorly Faulty power Check the position (STANDBY or ON) of the power Turn the power switch to STANDBY. None Restart the printer.
turned to ON. switch is ON post-operational check. switch is not in connected or switch switch. Repair or replace the harness between the
at system STANDBY broken harness Check the harness between the power switch and power switch and CTL20 or PAC20.
shutdown. position. between the CTL20 or PAC20.
power switch Check the power switch.
and CTL20 or
PAC20
E-2301 Request not A printing Printer cannot perform printing in spite of no error. Normally
accepted by command is this state cannot occur.
printer. sent from a Feed section, exposure section or processing section
client when cannot operate in spite of no error.
the printer is
off-line.
W-2302 Printer is A printing While the processor operation panel is in maintenance
off-line. command is mode, the processor cannot be operated from the scanner.
Request sent from a However, the following operation is attempted from the
rejected. client when scanner.
the printer is 1. Post-operational check
off-line. 2. Test pattern printing
W-2303 Rewinding A printing Paper rewinding is in progress or has finished.
paper in command is Monitoring operation cannot be performed during this
printer. sent from a state.
client when This message is not displayed. (Definition only)
the printer is
rewinding
paper.
X-2304 Unknown 1. Incorrect
request sent command
to printer. (parameter
error, etc) is
received.
E-2305 Abnormal Abnormality is found in the backup memory during system 1. Memory 2. Insufficient 3. Loose or 4. Faulty 5. Faulty When this error occurred during ordinary operation: When this error occurred during installation: With regard to the installation Restart the system.
printer start-up. contents are charge poorly backup battery backup circuit Check the voltage.((2) If the voltage is 2.2V or Download data from floppy disk to printer and procedure after replacing the CTL20
backup SRAM information key is not found due to data corruption, cleared remaining in connected JP2 higher, the battery is normal.)→ Check JP2 on recharge battery for 1 or 2 days. circuit board, refer to Installation
memory. etc. because the backup battery. (backup jumper CTL20.((3) If JP2 is inserted into 2 and 3 pins, JP2 When this error occurred during normal Manual.
period between pin) on CTL20 is normal. operation: recharge the battery for 1 or 2
shipment and circuit board days.(2)/Set JP2 correctly.(3)/Replace the
installation is CTL20 circuit board.(4)(5)
too long.
I-2305 The data inAbnormality is When this error is displayed during software upgrade,
the printerfound in the ignore it.
backup backup
memory was memory
updated. during system
start-up.
SRAM
information
key is not
found due to
data
corruption, etc.
E-2306 Printer's Error Time data in the timer LSI is not within the following - Error during 1. Faulty 2. Faulty timer 3. Faulty - Error during software upgrade Replace the CTL20 circuit board. With regard to the installation Restart the system.
timer occurred in ranges. software backup circuit IC memory - Faulty CTL20 circuit board procedure after replacing the CTL20
abnormal. reading the Year: 1980 to 2079, Month: 1 to 12, Date: 1 to 31, Day of upgrade circuit board, refer to Installation
Scanner time time data the week: 0 to 6, Hour: 0 to 23, Minute: 0 to 59 - Faulty CTL20 Manual.
adopted. from timer IC And when reading time data twice, the difference between circuit board
at start-up. the two is within 2 seconds.

154
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
I-2307 Laser Laser Laser temperature adjustment is not completed before 1. Printing is 2. Temperature 1. Wait until the processor LCD display
temperature temperature printing. attempted control does indicates "STANDBY" state.
adjustment adjustment is Normally, this error may occur during system start-up. immediately not function (for 2. Restart the printer.
not not after the system 5 minutes).
completed in completed starts up.
exposure before
section. printing.
I-2308 Temperature Temperature Temperature adjustment of processing tanks is not
adjustment of processing completed when the control strip processing or printing is
of processing tanks does specified.
tanks is not reach the This error, if it occurs, is usually during system start-up.
process. specified This error may also occur during evaporation correction or
values. off-peak processing.
I-2309 Initializing Processor During printer initialization, a command for printing, paper
printer. initialization rewind, or post-operational check has been issued, or
is in progress paper feed error has occurred.
when the
post-
operational
check is
attempted.

I-2310 Printer is Processor is While paper feed in the processor is in progress, (1)
processing. in operation post-operational check or (2) scanner restart is attempted.
when the
post-
operational
check is
attempted.
W-2401 Paper jam D541 sensor 1. D541 sensor does not detect the leading end of paper 1. D541 2. M501, M540 3. Broken 4. Paper Initialize the printer.(1)(2) → (4) Open the middle (1) Replace D541. None Restart the system.
between does not loaded from upper magazine within 5 seconds after paper becomes faulty or M541 harness for remaining side door to check whether or not paper exists (2) Replace M501, M540 or M541.
upper cutter detect paper's cut is completed. during paper becomes faulty D541, M501, between the cutter exit and 1st feed roller (by
and middle leading end 2. D541 sensor detects abnormal feeding of paper. feed. during paper M540 or M541 lowering the green knob). (4) Remove paper.
side door within a feed.
section (4). specific time
after the paper
has been fed
from first
feeding
section.
W-2402 Paper jam D552 sensor 1. D552 sensor does not detect the leading end of paper 1. D552 2. M521, M550 3. Broken 4. Paper Initialize the printer.(1)(2) → (4) Open the lower (1) Replace D552. None Restart the system.
between does not loaded from lower magazine within 6 seconds after paper becomes faulty or M551 harness for remaining side door to check whether or not paper exists (2) Replace M521, M550 or M551.
lower cutter detect paper's cut is completed. during paper becomes faulty D552, M521, between the cutter exit and 1st feed roller (by
and lower leading end 2. D552 sensor detects abnormal feeding of paper. feed. during paper M550 or M551 lowering the green knob). (4) Remove paper.
side door within a feed.
section (2). specific time
after the paper
has been fed
from 2nd
feeding
section.
W-2403 Paper jam D541 sensor 1. D541 sensor does not detect paper's leading end within 1. D541 2. M541 3. Broken 4. Abnormal Perform the I/O check (1)(2)(3). →Check the (1) Replace D541. None Restart the system.
between does not 5 seconds after D552 has detected paper's leading end. becomes faulty becomes faulty harness for buffer memory voltage between 8 and 12 pins of U82 on the (2) Replace M541.
lower side detect paper's during paper during paper D541 or M541 (U82) on the CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected (3) Replace the harness.
and middle leading end feed. feed. CTL20 circuit in "paper exists" and less than 0.5V is detected in (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
side door within a board "no paper", the condition of buffer memory is
sections (4). specific time normal.)
after D552 has
detected
paper 's
leading end.
W-2404 Paper jam 1. D560 1. D560 sensor does not detect paper's leading end within 1. D560 2. M542 or 3. Broken 4. Abnormal Perform the I/O check (1)(2)(3). →Check the (1) Replace D560. None Restart the system.
between sensor does 4 seconds after D541 has detected paper's leading end. becomes faulty M545 becomes harness for buffer memory voltage between 2 and 18 pins of U82 on the (2) Replace M542 or M545.
middle side not detect 2. D560 sensor detects abnormal feeding of paper. during paper faulty during D560, M542 or (U90) on the CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected (3) Replace the harness.
and upper paper's feed. paper feed. M545 CTL20 circuit in "paper exists" and less than 0.5V is detected in (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
side door leading end board "no paper", the buffer memory is in normal
sections (5). within a condition.)
specific time
after D541
has detected
paper 's
leading end.
W-2405 Paper jam 1. D561 1. D561 sensor does not detect paper's leading end within 1. D560 or 2. M560 3. Broken 4. Abnormal 5. Mechanical Perform the I/O check (1)(2)(3). →Check the (1) Replace D561.
between sensor does T1 seconds after D560 has detected paper's leading end. D561 becomes becomes faulty harness for buffer memory malfunction voltage between 4 and 16 pins of U88 on the (2) Replace M561.
upper side not detect T1: faulty during during paper D560, D561 or (U88) on the CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected (3) Replace the harness.
door and paper's Paper without top registration: 3 seconds paper feed. feed. M560 CTL20 circuit in "paper exists" and less than 0.5V is detected in (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
exposure leading end Paper with top registration: 10 seconds board "no paper", the condition of buffer memory is (5)-1
section (5). within a 2. Paper is detected. normal.) If the lever is faulty, replace the sensor.
specific time (5)-1 (5)-2
after D560 Check whether or not the lever of D560 functions Remove paper.
has detected normally. (5)-3
paper 's (5)-2 If this error recurs during initialization, take an
leading end. Paper jamming occurred near D560. appropriate action. (Refer to E-2415.)

155
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-2406 Paper jam 1. D57X 1. D571, D572, D573 or D574 sensor does not detect 1. D57X 4. Skewed 5. Distribution 7. Faulty paper10. Faulty (1)(2)(3): Perform the I/O check. (1) Replace D57X. (4) Refer to Service Manual (17.2.6). Restart the system.
between sensor does paper's leading end within 25 seconds after D561 has becomes faulty paper is section door is feed function electromagneti (4): Check whether or not the height of upper feed (2) Replace M57X.
exposure not detect detected paper's leading end. during paper detected by opened by between the c valve belt is correct (11.4±1 mm). If not, paper skewing (3) Replace the harness.
and paper's feed. sensor on accident. magazine and 11. may occur. (4) Adjust the height of upper feed belt.
distribution leading end 2. M57X different row. 6. Jammed distribution Deteriorated or (5) Check whether or not the error message is (5) Guide the operator not to open any cover
section (6). within a becomes faulty paper was not section. damaged displayed. during printing.
specific time during paper removed. 8. Faulty sucker (6) Guide the operator to remove jammed
after D561 feed. distribution 12. paper.
has detected 3. Broken section Disconnected
paper 's harness for 9. Faulty harness of
leading end. D57X or M57X processor M571
10. Faulty 13. Faulty
electromagneti pump
c valve 14.
Disconnected
hose for sucker
15. Faulty
paper exit
section
W-2407 Auto-loading 1. State of Paper end sensor (D505) does not detect paper and splice 1. Paper 2. Check 3. Faulty D505 4. M501 5. Faulty buffer (1) Remove the paper magazine and check: (1) Reinstall paper. (5) With regard to the installation (1)(2) Reinstall the magazine to
of upper splice sensor sensor (D506) detect paper when starting paper incorrectly whether or not or D506 becomes faulty memory (U82, 1) whether or not paper protrusion is within 10 mm. 1) Rewind paper manually so that paper procedure after replacing the CTL20 confirm paper is loaded or
magazine and paper auto-loading. extracted from paper during paper U88) on CTL20 2) whether or not the leading end of paper is folded. protrusion is within 10 mm. circuit board, refer to Installation rewound normally.
failed. end sensor paper magazine is auto-loading. or PDC20 (2) Install another magazine and check whether or 2) Cut off the leading end of paper if it is folded Manual. (3)(4) Reinstall upper magazine
do not magazine faulty. circuit board not paper is loaded normally. (2) Replace the magazine. and perform I/O check.
change when (3)(4) Perform the I/O check. (3) Replace the sensor.
paper is (4) Replace the motor.
loaded for
specified
length.
W-2408 Auto-loading 1. State of Paper end sensor (D525) does not detect paper and splice 1. Incorrectly 2. Check 3. Faulty D525 4. M521 5. Faulty buffer (1) Remove the paper magazine and check: (1) Reinstall paper. (5) With regard to the installation (1)(2) Reinstall the magazine to
of lower splice sensor sensor (D526) detect paper when starting paper extracted paper whether or not or D526 becomes faulty memory (U84, 1) whether or not paper protrusion is within 10 mm. 1) Rewind paper manually so that paper procedure after replacing the CTL20 confirm paper is loaded or
magazine and paper auto-loading. from paper paper during paper U88) on CTL20 2) whether or not the leading end of paper is folded. protrusion is within 10 mm. circuit board, refer to Installation rewound normally.
failed. end sensor magazine magazine is auto-loading. or PDC20 (2) Install another magazine and check whether or 2) Cut off the leading end of paper if it is folded Manual. (3)(4) Reinstall lower magazine
does not faulty. circuit board not paper is loaded normally. (2) Replace the magazine. and perform I/O check.
change when (3)(4) Perform the I/O check. (3) Replace the sensor.
paper is (4) Replace the motor.
loaded for
specified
length.
W-2409 Auto- 1. State of Splice sensor (D506) remains in the state of "paper exists" 1. Check 2. Faulty paper 3. Faulty D505 4. M501 (1) Install another magazine and check whether or (1)(2) Replace the paper magazine. None (1)(2) Reinstall the magazine to
rewinding of splice sensor when M501 has rewound paper 60 mm. whether or not end detecting or D506 becomes faulty not the paper is rewound normally after (3) Replace the sensor. confirm paper is loaded or
upper and paper paper plate during paper auto-loading. (4) Replace the motor. rewound normally.
magazine end sensor magazine is auto-loading. (2) Check the operation of the magazine. (3)(4) Restart the system and
failed. does not faulty. 1) Check whether the pulley can be rotated by perform I/O check.
change when hand.
paper is 2) Check whether the detecting plate protrudes
rewound for when rewinding paper manually.
specified
length.
W-2410 Auto- 1. State of Splice sensor (D526) remains the state of "paper exists" 1. Check 2. Faulty paper 3. Faulty D525 4. M521 (1) Install another magazine and check whether or (1)(2) Replace the paper magazine. None (1)(2) Reinstall the magazine to
rewinding of splice sensor when M521 has rewound paper 60 mm. whether or not end detecting or D526 becomes faulty not the paper is rewound normally after (3) Replace the sensor. confirm paper is loaded or
lower and paper paper plate during paper auto-loading. (4) Replace the motor. rewound normally.
magazine end sensor magazine is auto-loading. (2) Check the operation of the magazine. (3)(4) Restart the system and
failed. does not faulty. 1) Check whether the pulley can be rotated by perform I/O check.
change when hand.
paper is 2) Check whether the detecting plate protrudes
rewound for when rewinding paper manually.
specified
length.
W-2411 Paper 1. The "Paper exists" information memorized at auto-loading is 1. Faulty paper 2. Jammed 3. An obstacle 4. Actuator 5. Misdiagnosis Perform the I/O check to determine the faulty (1) Replace the sensor, harness, circuit board None Restart the system and confirm the
remains in system is cleared when all paper enters the processor or jammed detecting paper remains such as a piece malfunction due to noise sensor. →Check the operation of the sensor in or power supply. LCD display on the printer
printer. started up paper is removed and no paper remains in printer. sensor in printer. of paper turns (Spring is caused by question in the I/O check. →Check the sensor (2) Remove paper. (Check whether or not indicates "Standby" state.
after the the sensor ON. broken or sensor wiring signal level on the CTL circuit board by using the paper remains between sub-scanning section Perform the I/O check to confirm
power OFF actuator is short-circuit or tester. →Determine the cause (sensor, harness, and distribution section entrance.) the sensor operates normally.
failure caught on wiring circuit board or power supply). (3) Remove obstacle for each sensor (D552,
occurred something.) malfunction D541, D560, D561, D562, D571, D572 or
during paper D573).
processing.
2. Jammed
paper
remains in
printer.
3. Paper is
detected at
sensor check
after the
cover is
closed.

156
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-2412 Upper cutter 1. Home 1. The 1st cutter home position sensor (D507) is not in 1. Faulty cutter. 2. Faulty D507 3. Poorly 4. Poorly 5. Faulty buffer 1. Check the cutter operation. 1. (5) With regard to the installation When parts are repaired or
abnormal. position "open" position when operating upper cutter. (home position connected or connected or memory (U82) 1) Check whether the cutter opens/closes normally 3) YES→Remove paper. procedure after replacing the CTL20 replaced, check the operation of
sensor or 2. The 1st cutter home position sensor (D507) is not in sensor) or broken harness broken harness on CTL20, or in the I/O check. 1) NO 2) YES 3) NO→Replace motor ASSY. circuit board, refer to Installation the cutter and sensor in the I/O
close sensor "open" position when operating upper cutter 600 ms. D508 (close for D507 or to CTL17 circuit faulty PDC20 2) Check whether or not the motor knob (green) (Refer to Service Manual.) Manual. check.
does not 3. Error occurred when opening, closing or operating upper sensor) D508 board can be rotated. 1) NO 2) NO 3) NO→Replace the cutter.
function cutter 600 ms. 3) Check whether or not a piece of paper is caught
during in the cutter blade or motor gear. 2. Replace the sensor.
operation. Check whether or not the harness is pinched or 3. Repair or replace the harness.
not.(3)(4) →Check whether or not the connector is 4. Connect the connector again
poorly connected.(3)(4) →Check the function of the 5. Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
sensor in the I/O check.(2) →Check the voltage
between 4 and 16 pins of U82 on the CTL20 circuit
board. (If more than 3.5V is detected in "open" and
less than 0.5V is detected in "close", the condition
of the buffer memory is normal.) →Check the
voltage between 6 and 14 pins of U82 on the
CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected
in "close" and less than 0.5V is detected in "open",
the condition of the buffer memory is normal.)
→Check the PDC20 circuit board.

E-2413 Lower cutter 1. Home 1. The 2nd cutter home position sensor (D527) is not in 1. Faulty cutter. 2. Faulty D527 3. Poorly 4. Poorly 5. Faulty buffer 1. Check the cutter operation. 1. (5) With regard to the installation When the parts are repaired or
abnormal. position "open" position when operating lower cutter. (home position connected or connected or memory (U84) 1) Check whether the cutter opens/closes normally 3) YES→Remove paper. procedure after replacing the CTL20 replaced, check the operation of
sensor or 2. The 2nd cutter home position sensor (D527) is not in sensor) or broken harness broken harness on CTL20, or in the I/O check. 1) NO 2) YES 3) NO→Replace motor ASSY. circuit board, refer to Installation the cutter and sensor in the I/O
close sensor "open" position when operating lower cutter 600 ms. D528 (close for D527 or to CTL17 circuit faulty PDC20 2) Check whether or not the motor knob (green) (Refer to Service Manual.) Manual. check.
does not 3. Error occurred when opening, closing or operating lower sensor) D528 board can be rotated. 1) NO 2) NO 3) NO→Replace the cutter.
function cutter 600 ms. 3) Check whether or not a piece of paper is caught
during in the cutter blade or motor gear. 2. Replace the sensor.
operation. Check whether or not the harness is pinched.(3)(4) 3. Repair or replace the harness.
→Check whether or not the connector is properly 4. Reconnect the connector
connected.(3)(4) →Check the function of the 5. Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
sensor in the I/O check.(2) →Check the voltage
between 4 and 16 pins of U84 on the CTL20 circuit
board. (If more than 3.5V is detected in "open" and
less than 0.5V is detected in "close", the condition
of the buffer memory is normal.) →Check the
voltage between 6 and 14 pins of U84 on the
CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected
in "close" and less than 0.5V is detected in "open",
the condition of the buffer memory is normal.)

E-2414 Paper width 1. Paper 1. Pulse motor controller (SVP) interruption does not occur 1. Faulty Check the operation of paper width guides in the 1. Replace the CTL20 circuit board. None When parts are repaired or
guide width guide within 15 seconds after paper width guide drives. SVPC2 (U86) I/O check. replaced, check the operation of
abnormal. does not or SVP2 (U85) the paper width guide motor
function. on the CTL20 (M563) in the I/O check.
(SVP circuit board
interruption
does not
occur within
specified
time.)

E-2415 Nip 1. Speed State of home position sensor (D547) is scanned while 1. Faulty nip 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 4. Faulty buffer 5. Faulty nip (5) Close the printer door and restart the system to (1) Replace the sensor. With regard to the installation When the parts
initialization adjustment driving nip release motor (M545) pulse by pulse. release sensor connected or connected or (U82) on the release check whether or not the error recurs. (2) Repair or replace the harness. procedure after replacing the CTL20 (sensor/harness/circuit board) are
for upper nip home This error occurs when state of the sensor does not (D547) broken harness broken harness CTL20 circuit mechanism (5)-1 (3) Repair or replace the harness. circuit board, refer to Installation repaired or replaced, check the
side door position is change when driving the motor 1000 pulses. of the nip to the CTL17 board, or faulty Faulty M543 motor (4) Replace the CTL20 or PDC20 circuit board. Manual. operation of the nip release motor
failed. not detected. release sensor circuit board PDC20 circuit (5)-2 (5)-1 (M545) in the I/O check.
(State of (D547) board Increased load on gear, cam or nip mechanism Replace the motor.
sensor does (5)-3 (5)-2
not change Check whether or not the cam is racing. →Check - Check whether or not the gear is worn.
when the whether or not the harness is pinched.(2)(3) - Check the load on the cam (by removing the
motor is →Check whether or not the connector is properly rear motor unit). If any abnormality is found,
driven for connected.(2)(3) →Check the function of the replace and grease the motor.
specified sensor in the I/O check.(1) →Check the voltage - Check the spring of nip mechanism. If any
pulses.) between 11 and 9 pins of U82 on the CTL20 circuit abnormality is found, replace the spring.
board. (If more than 3.5V is detected in "open" and - Check the operation of drive plate. If the drive
less than 0.5V is detected in "close the condition of plate is locked, replace and grease it.
the buffer memory is normal.) →Check the PDC20 - Check the operation of sintered bearing. If the
circuit board. bearing is damaged, replace it
(5)-3
Replace and grease the cam shaft.

157
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause
Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-2416 Nip 1. Exposure 1. D566 does not detect exposure nip home position when 1. Faulty soft 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 5. Faulty soft
4. Faulty buffer Check the operation of soft nip motor (M565).(5) (1) Replace the sensor. With regard to the installation When the parts
initialization soft nip home M565 is driven 2500 pulses during nip initialization. nip release connected or connected or nip motor
(U90) on the →Check whether or not the harness is (2) Repair or replace the harness. procedure after replacing the CTL20 (sensor/harness/circuit board) are
for exposure position is 2. After nip home position detection during nip initialization sensor (D566) broken harness broken harness (M565)
CTL20 circuit pinched.(2)(3) →Check whether or not the (3) Repair or replace the harness. circuit board, refer to Installation repaired or replaced, check the
section not detected. is completed normally, state of D566 does not change of the soft nip to the CTL10 board, or faulty connector is properly connected.(2)(3) →Check the (4) Replace the CTL20 or PDC20 circuit board. Manual. operation of the nip release motor
failed. (State of ("detected"→"cleared") when M565 is driven 160 pulses. release sensor circuit board PDC20 circuit function of the sensor in the I/O check.(1) →Check (5)-1 (M565) in the I/O check.
sensor does (D566) board the voltage between 8 and 12 pins of U90 on the Replace the motor.
not change CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected (5)-2
when the in "open" and less than 0.5V is detected in "close", - If the gear is worn, replace the gear.
motor is the condition of the buffer memory is normal.) - If the cam is worn, replace the sub-scanning
driven for a →Check the PDC20 circuit board. unit.
specified (5) Close the printer door and restart the system to - If the nip slider is damaged, replace the
number of check whether or not the error recurs. sub-scanning unit.
pulses.) (5)-1
Faulty M565
(5)-2
Increased load on gear, cam or nip slider
E-2417 Paper width 1. Exposure 1. D563 does not detect width guide home position when 1. Faulty width 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 4. Faulty buffer 5. Faulty width (5) Close the printer door and restart the system to (1) Replace the sensor. With regard to the installation When the parts
guide section width M563 is driven 3500 pulses during width guide guide home connected or connected or (U90) on the guide drive check whether or not the error recurs. (2) Repair or replace the harness. procedure after replacing the CTL20 (sensor/harness/circuit board) are
initialization guide home initialization. position sensor broken harness broken harness CTL20 circuit mechanism (5)-1 (3) Repair or replace the harness. circuit board, refer to Installation repaired or replaced, check the
failed. position is 2. After width guide home position detection during (D563) of the width to the CTL10 board, or faulty Positioning fork comes in contact with the width (4) Replace the CTL20 or PDC20 circuit board. Manual. operation of the width guide motor
not detected. initialization is completed normally, state of D563 does not guide home circuit board PDC20 circuit guide. (5)-1 (M563) in the I/O check.
(State of change ("detected"→"cleared") when M563 is driven 100 position sensor board (5)-2 Clarify the cause referring to E-2418.
sensor does pulses. (D563) Faulty width guide motor (M563) (5)-2
not change (5)-3 Replace the motor.
when the Check whether or not load on gear, drive belt or (5)-3
motor is sliding section is increased. →Check whether or Open the front door and inner cover and then
driven for a not the harness is pinched.(2)(3) →Check whether check whether or not the gear on M563 can be
specified or not the connector is properly connected.(2)(3) rotated by hand. If not, replace the
number of →Check the function of the sensor in the I/O sub-scanning unit or finely adjust the width
pulses.) check.(1) →Check the voltage between 4 and 16 guide.
pins of U90 on the CTL20 circuit board. (If more
than 3.5V is detected in "open" and less than 0.5V
is detected in "close", the condition of the buffer
memory is normal.) →Check the PDC20 circuit
board.

E-2418 Positioning 1. Top 1. D564 does not detect top registration home position 1. Faulty top 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 4. Faulty buffer 5. Faulty width (5) Close the printer door and restart the system to (1) Replace the sensor. With regard to the installation When the parts
fork registration when M560 is driven 1700 pulses during initialization. registration connected or connected or (U90) on the guide drive check whether or not the error recurs. (2) Repair or replace the harness. procedure after replacing the CTL20 (sensor/harness/circuit board) are
initialization home 2. After top registration home position detection during home position broken harness broken harness CTL20 circuit mechanism (5)-1 (3) Repair or replace the harness. circuit board, refer to Installation repaired or replaced, check the
failed. position is initialization is completed normally, state of D564 does not sensor (D564) of the top to the CTL10 board, or faulty Faulty M560 motor (4) Replace the CTL20 or PDC20 circuit board. Manual. operation in the I/O check.
not detected. change ("detected"→"cleared") when M560 is driven 320 registration circuit board PDC20 circuit (5)-2 (5)-1
(State of pulses. home position board Increased load on gear or brake cam. Replace the motor.
sensor does sensor (D564) (5)-3 Faulty one-way clutch (5)-2
not change 1) Abnormal rotation Check the motor gear (Feed roller rotates in
when the 2) Faulty stopper or plate spring one direction, and fork is fixed in a specific
motor is Check whether or not the harness is pinched.(2)(3) position. Only fork rotates when rotating it
driven for a →Check whether or not the connector is properly counterclockwise.) If any abnormality is found,
specified connected.(2)(3) →Check the function of the replace the parts.
number of sensor in the I/O check.(1) →Check the voltage
pulses.) between 6 and 14 pins of U90 on the CTL20 circuit
This error is board. (If more than 3.5V is detected in "open" and
deleted less than 0.5V is detected in "close", the condition
because of of the buffer memory is normal.) →Check the
software PDC20 circuit board.
improvement
.
E-2419 Distribution 1. State of home position sensor (D575) is scanned while 1. Faulty D575 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 4. Faulty buffer (5) Check whether or not the motor rotates in the (1) Replace the sensor. (6) When adjusting the timing, refer to When the parts
UP/DOWN Distribution driving up/down drive motor (M572) pulse by pulse. (M572 home connected or connected or (U90) on the I/O check. (2) Repair or replace the harness. Service Manual (17.1.10). (sensor/harness/circuit board) are
initialization up/down This error occurs when state of the sensor does not position sensor) broken harness broken harness CTL20 circuit (6) (3) Repair or replace the harness. (4) With regard to the installation repaired or replaced, check the
failed. home change when driving the motor 1200 pulses. of the D575 to the CTL10 board, or faulty 1) If the motor rotates but the distribution section (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board. procedure after replacing the CTL20 operation of the up/down motor
position is (M572 home circuit board PDC20 circuit is not raised or lowered, the internal timing belt may (5) If the harness and connector is normal but circuit board, refer to Installation (M572) in the I/O check.
not detected. position sensor) board be faulty. the motor does not rotate, replace the motor. Manual.
(State of 5. M572 does 2) Inspect the external timing belt visually. (6) Replace the internal timing belt or adjust the
sensor does not function. 3) If the external timing belt is faulty, distribution is timing of the external timing belt.
not change 6. Damaged or not smoothly raised and lowered. →Check whether
when the slipped timing or not the harness is pinched.(2)(3) →Check
motor is belt whether or not the connector is properly
driven for a connected.(2)(3) →Check the function of the
specified sensor in the I/O check.(1) →Check the voltage
number of between 17 and 3 pins of U90 on the CTL20 circuit
pulses.) board. (If more than 3.5V is detected in "open" and
less than 0.5V is detected in "close", the condition
of the buffer memory is normal.) →Check the
PDC20 circuit board.

158
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-2420 Distribution 1. 1. Distribution home position sensor (D574) remains ON 1. Faulty D574 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 4. Faulty buffer 5. Faulty M571 (5) Check the operation of M571 in the I/O check. (1) Replace the sensor. (6) Adjust the hose referring to Service When the parts
initialization Distribution when distribution motor (M571) drives 100 pulses during (M571 home connected or connected or (U90) on the (6) Check whether or not the hose comes in contact (2) Repair or replace the harness. Manual (17.1.3). (sensor/harness/circuit board) are
failed. section home initialization. position sensor) broken harness broken harness CTL20 circuit with the other parts while operating the motor in the (3) Repair or replace the harness. (4) With regard to the installation repaired or replaced, check the
position is 2. If the home position sensor is OFF when starting of the D574 to the CTL10 board, or faulty I/O check. (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board. procedure after replacing the CTL20 operation of the distribution motor
not detected. initialization, or if any error is not detected in the item 1 (M571 home circuit board PDC20 circuit (7) Check whether or not the spring between (5) If the harness and connector is normal but circuit board, refer to Installation (M571) in the I/O check.
(State of above, state of home position sensor (D574) is scanned position sensor) board paddles is installed. the motor does not rotate, replace the motor. Manual.
sensor does while driving distribution motor (M571) pulse by pulse. 5. M571 does (8) Check whether or not the sucker base and slide (6) Adjust the position of hose.
not change This error occurs when state of the sensor does not not function. shaft moves smoothly with the interlock switch (7) If the spring is disengaged, reinstall it. If
when the change when driving the motor 600 pulses. 6. M571 gear open. →Check whether or not the harness is damaged, replace it.
motor is not properly pinched.(2)(3) →Check whether or not the (8) If the sucker base and slide shaft do not
driven for a meshing due to connector is properly connected.(2)(3) →Check the move smoothly, clean the slide shaft and
specified interference of function of the sensor in the I/O check.(1) →Check grease it.
number of hose and other the voltage between 15 and 5 pins of U90 on the
pulses.) parts CTL20 circuit board. (If more than 3.5V is detected
This error is 7. Disengaged in "open" and less than 0.5V is detected in "close",
deleted or damaged the condition of the buffer memory is normal.)
because of spring between →Check the PDC20 circuit board.
software paddles
improvement 8. Suction base
. and slide shaft
malfunction

W-2421 Paper end 1. Paper end During paper loading from upper magazine, paper end Faulty D505 Check the paper in the magazine.(1) (1) Replace D505. None Check whether or not the paper
processing of sensor sensor (D505) detects paper's trailing end and all the paper end is detected properly.
upper detects in the printer enters the processor.
magazine paper end.
completed.
W-2422 Paper end 1. Paper end During paper loading from lower magazine, paper end Faulty D525 Check the paper in the magazine.(1) (1) Replace D525. None Check whether or not the paper
processing of sensor sensor (D525) detects paper's trailing end and all the paper end is detected properly.
lower detects in the printer enters the processor.
magazine paper end.
completed.
W-2423 Unknown 1. Different Magazine ID sensor (upper: D500 to D504, lower: D520 to 1. Different type 2. ID chip is (1)(2) Faulty ID sensor None (1)(2) Reinstall the magazine.
magazine ID magazine ID D524) detects different ID from the last magazine's is of paper is changed.
is set. from the last detected when replacing magazine at paper end. installed in the
magazine's magazine (ID
is detected chip is also
when changed).
replacing
magazine at
paper end.
W-2424 Magazine ID 1. ID of the Magazine ID detected by magazine ID sensor (upper: 1. Magazine (1) Faulty ID sensor None (1) Reinstall the magazine.
not installed D500 to D504, lower: D520 to D524) is not registered. settings such
registered. magazine is Magazine ID sensor scans magazine ID every 10 ms and as paper width
not determines ID number if the scanned ID matches 20 times and paper type
registered. (200 ms). for the
magazine ID
are not
registered.
W-2425 ID is 1. Magazines Magazine ID (except for "0") detected by magazine ID 1. Wrong ID (1) Faulty ID sensor None (1) Reinstall the magazine.
duplicated ID is sensor (upper: D500 to D504, lower: D520 to D524) is chip is installed.
for upper and duplicated duplicated for the upper and lower magazine.
lower for the upper Magazine ID sensor scans magazine ID every 10 ms and
magazines. and lower determines ID number if the scanned ID matches 20 times
magazines. (200 ms).
W-2426 Magazine Magazine is Magazine is not installed in the specified (upper or lower) 1. Faulty 2. Magazine is 3. ID chip is not 4. Incorrectly 1. Check the magazine ID sensor in the I/O check 1. Replace the DTM00 circuit board. None (1)(2)(3)(4) Reinstall the magazine
not loaded. not installed position when printing. sensor (upper: not installed. installed. installed (by pressing the detecting bar manually). 2. Reinstall the magazine. and confirm the magazine ID is
in the Magazine ID sensor (upper: D500 to D504, lower: D520 to D500 to D504, magazine 2. Check whether or not the magazine is installed 3. Install the ID chip. detected correctly.
specified D524) detects "0." lower: D520 to correctly. (Check the position of the magazine set 4. Replace the magazine.
(upper or D524) lever.)
lower) 3. Check the ID chip.
position. 4. Check whether or not the magazine installation is
detected in the I/O check.

E-2427 Communication Communication 1. Main CPU (SH) does not receive "start-up" notification (software) Faulty (software) →Paper feed after replacing the CTL20 Replace the CTL20 circuit board. None Paper feed after replacing the
error occurred time-out within 5 seconds when speed adjustment CPU (H8A) starts hardware circuit board CTL20 circuit board
in printer. occurred up. between
(between main between speed 2. Main CPU does not receive "paper feed starts" SH7043 and
circuit board adjustment notification from speed adjustment CPU within 15 seconds H8/2355
and paper feeding section when starting printing.
feeding system and speed 3. Main CPU does not receive "paper feed stops"
in upper side adjustment notification from speed adjustment CPU within 15 seconds
door section) CPU. when stopping printing.

E-2428 Communication Communication 1. Main CPU (SH) does not receive "start-up" notification (software) Faulty (software) →Paper feed after replacing the CTL20 Replace the CTL20 circuit board. None Paper feed after replacing the
error occurred time-out with within 5 seconds when distribution CPU (H8B) starts up. hardware circuit board CTL20 circuit board
in printer. distribution 2. Main CPU does not receive "paper feed starts" between
(between main CPU occurred. notification from distribution control CPU within 15 seconds SH7043 and
circuit board when starting printing. H8/2355
and paper 3. Main CPU does not receive "paper feed stops"
feeding system notification from distribution control CPU within 15 seconds
in distribution when stopping printing.
section)

159
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
W-2429 Magazine Magazine D580 detects magazine door open during paper 1. Missing or 2. Bent or 3. Faulty *Check the front, upper and three left-hand doors. (1) Replace the magnet and related parts. Perform printing again because the
section door section door processing. loose magnet broken interlock interlock switch (1) Check whether or not the magnet functions (2) Replace or adjust the interlock dog. paper may be fogged.
open. Close is opened D580 scans state of magazine door every 10 ms and dog correctly. (3) Replace the interlock switch.
it. during paper determines the state if the scanned state matches - Check whether or not each door is installed
processing. specified times. (open: twice (20 ms), close: 300 times (3 properly.
seconds)) - Check whether or not the magnet is missing.
(2) Check whether or not the interlock dog is bent
or broken.
W-2430 Magazine Magazine D580 detects magazine door open when starting up the 1. Missing or 2. Bent or 3. Faulty 4. Poorly 5. Faulty *Check the front, upper and three left doors. (1) Replace the magnet and related parts. None Confirm the error disappears when
section door section door system or starting printing. loose magnet broken interlock interlock switch connected or PDC20 circuit (1) Check whether or not the magnet functions (2) Replace or adjust the interlock dog. the magazine door is closed.
open. Close is opened D580 scans state of magazine door every 10 ms and dog broken harness board (PC19) correctly. (3) Replace the interlock switch.
it. during the determines the state if the scanned state matches of interlock - Check whether or not each door is installed (4) Repair or replace the harness.
operation specified times. (open: twice (20 ms), close: 300 times (3 switch properly. (5) Replace the PDC20 circuit board.
except for seconds)) - Check whether or not the magnet is missing.
paper (2) Check whether or not the interlock dog is bent
processing. or broken.
W-2431 Printer Door open is Opening state of the following door is detected. 1. Missing or 2. Bent or 3. Faulty 4. Poorly 5. Faulty *Check the front, upper and three left-hand doors. (1) Replace the magnet and related parts. None Service Manual
section door detected in Lower side door (D581), middle side door (D582), upper loose magnet broken interlock interlock switch connected or PDC20 circuit (1) Check whether or not the magnet functions (2) Replace or adjust the interlock dog.
open. printer. side door (D583), top door (D584), front door (D585) dog broken interlock board (PC19) correctly. (3) Replace the interlock switch.
Each sensor scans the state of each door every 10 ms and switch harness - Check whether or not each door is installed (4) Repair or replace the harness.
determines the state if the scanned state matches properly. (5) Replace the PDC20 circuit board.
specified times. (open: twice (20 ms), close: 300 times (3 - Check whether or not the magnet is missing.
seconds)) (2) Check whether or not the interlock dog is bent
or broken.
W-2432 Back printer Back printer Printing is performed when back printer set sensor (D544) 3. Replace 4. Poorly 5. Faulty (4) Check the harness and D544. (4) Repair or replace the harness. (5) With regard to the installation Check the function of back printer
is not is not does not detect back printer. D544. connected or CTL20 or (5) Check the voltage on CTL20 (D544 to CTL6, (5) Replace the CTL20 or PDC20 circuit board. procedure after replacing the CTL20 set sensor (D544) in the I/O check.
installed. installed. broken harness PDC20 circuit U13)/PDC20 (PC1, U71) circuit board. circuit board, refer to Installation
of D544 board Manual.
W-2433 Incorrect 1. After Magazine ID sensor (upper: D500 to D504, lower: D520 to 1. The positions (1) Check the number of ID chip installed into the
paper paper end, D524) detects the positions of the magazines reversed of the upper and lower magazines.
magazine is the positions when replacing magazine at paper end. magazines
set. of the have been
magazines reversed.
have been
reversed.
I-2434 Index print 1. Requested
not created magazine ID
because and installed
magazine magazine ID
replaced. do not match
when
printing.
I-2435 Magazine
installed.
W-2436 Magazine
with different
paper width
installed.
I-2437 Paper end
process
completed in
upper
magazine.
I-2438 Paper end
process
completed in
lower
magazine.
W-2439 Paper end
detected in
upper
magazine.
W-2440 Paper end
detected in
lower
magazine.
W-2441 Unknown
magazine ID
specified.
W-2442 Incorrect
paper width
specified.
W-2443 Paper end
detected in
magazine.

160
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-2501 Anti-dust D620 does When anti-dust shutter is opening (during initialization or 1. Disconnected 2. Disconnected 3. Tripped 4. Faulty D620 Check whether or not the shutter moves in the I/O (1) Turn OFF the system, connect the With regard to the installation Restart the printer.
shutter not function before starting exposure feed): connector of harness to circuit protector (14 pin of CTL5) check. If the shutter moves but the sensor does not connectors and restart the system. procedure after replacing the CTL20
abnormal. even if 1. Shutter is opened (by S620). S620 or D620 PDC13 on the (F4) on the or buffer (17 function, the sensor or related parts is faulty. (2) Connect the connectors and perform circuit board, refer to Installation
anti-dust 2. If D620 detects shutter opening within 500 ms, the PDC20 circuit PDC20 circuit and 3 pins of mechanical initialization. Manual.
shutter is system functions normally. board board U32) on the (3) Turn OFF the system, push the white button
operated at 3. If D620 does not function, shutter is closed and the same CTL20 circuit to reset the circuit protector and restart the
initialization. operation is performed again. board system.
If the above operation is repeated 3 times but shutter (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
opening cannot be detected, this error occurs.

E-2502 Anti-dust fan Anti-dust fan During initialization or before starting exposure feed, 1. Disconnected 2. Disconnected 3. Tripped 4. Faulty D62x 5. Faulty fan (1)(2) Connect the connectors and perform With regard to the installation Restart the printer.
malfunction. for optical state of anti-dust fan (F62x_ALM) is scanned every one harness to F620 harness to circuit protector (12 pin of CTL5) mechanical initialization. procedure after replacing the CTL20
system did second after the fan (F62x) is turned ON. to F622 PDC13 on the (F4) on the or buffer (15 (3) Turn OFF the system, push the white button circuit board, refer to Installation
not function This error occurs when "rotating" state is not detected 10 PDC20 circuit PDC20 circuit and 5 pins of to reset the circuit protector and restart the Manual.
(Rotating consecutive times. board board U32) on the system.
sensor CTL20 circuit (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board.
malfunction). board (5) Replace the fan ASSY.

E-2503 Polygon Polygon does State of polygon is scanned every one second after the 1. Disconnected 2. Disconnected 3. Tripped 4. Poorly 5. Poorly (1)(2) Turn OFF the system, connect the Restart the system to confirm the
malfunction. not function polygon motor (M623) is turned ON. harness to harness to circuit protector connected or connected or connectors and restart the system. exposure section initialization is
(Rotating This error occurs when "locking" state is not detected 30 OPT1 CTL18 on the CP2 on the broken harness broken harness (3) Turn OFF the system, push the white button completed normally.
sensor consecutive times. CTL20 circuit CTL20 circuit of JND1-1 of JND1-2 to reset the circuit protector and restart the
malfunction). State of polygon is scanned during initialization or before board board connector connector, or system.
starting exposure feed. faulty polygon (4)-1
motor unit Connect the JND1-1 connector. If the harness is
broken, replace ROS.
(4)-2
Replace ROS.

E-2504 AOM driver AOM fan State of AOM fan (F_AOM) is scanned every one second Disconnected Disconnected Tripped circuit Power is not 4. Faulty sensor Check whether or not the power is supplied to the - Connect the connector. With regard to the installation Open the rear cover and circuit
cooling fan malfunction after 24V is supplied. connector for connector protector F1 on supplied to the (26 pin of CTL5) fan. →Check the LED on the PDC20 circuit board. - Reset the circuit protector. procedure after replacing the CTL20 board mounting plate, and check
malfunction. (Rotating This error occurs when "rotating" state is not detected. AOM driver (PDC15) on the the PDC20 PDC20 circuit or buffer (17 →Check the connector for the fan and PDC20 - Replace the circuit board. circuit board, refer to Installation whether or not the AOM driver
sensor cooling fan PDC20 circuit circuit board board. (Check and 3 pins of circuit board. →Check the circuit protector on the - Replace the fan. Manual. cooling fan operates properly.
malfunction). board whether or not U33) on the PDC20 circuit board. →Check the CTL20 circuit
the D14 (yellow CTL20 circuit board.
LED) lights on board, or faulty
the PDC20 fan
circuit board.)

E-2505 FM cooling Frame State of frame memory fan (F_MEM) is scanned every one 1. Disconnected 2. Faulty FM 3. Faulty sensor 4. Faulty sensor Check the harness to FMC cover. (1) →Check (1) Connect the connector. With regard to the installation Restart the system and check the
fan memory fan second after 24V is supplied. connector for cooling fan (F589, F590; 1 (13 pin of CTL5) whether or not the fan rotates. (2) →Check the (2) Replace the fan. procedure after replacing the CTL20 display on the operation panel and
malfunction. malfunction This error occurs when "rotating" state is not detected. FM cooling fan and 4 pins of or buffer (17 PDC20 circuit board. (3) →Check the CTL 20 circuit (3) Replace the PDC20 circuit board. circuit board, refer to Installation monitor.
(Rotating PDC14) or IF and 3 pins of board. (4) Replace the CTL20 circuit board. Manual.
sensor (U32, U33, U8, U100) on the
malfunction). PC18), or faulty CTL20 circuit
fan board, or faulty
fan

E-2506 Exposure Exposure State of frame exposure section cooling fan (F_EXP) is 1. Disconnected 2. Disconnected 3. Faulty fan 1. Open the rear cover to check whether or not the (1)(2) Turn OFF the system, connect the
section section fan scanned every one second after 24V is supplied. fan connector connector connector under the fan duct is connected properly. connectors and restart the system.
cooling fan malfunction This error occurs when "rotating" state is not detected. (F585 or F586) (PDC15) on the 2. Check the connection of the harness on the (3) Replace the fan.
malfunctions. (Rotating PDC20 circuit CTL20 circuit board.
sensor board
malfunction).

W-2507 Condition Density Condition setup is not performed for the magazine ID of the 1. Condition 1. The system requests condition setup again. None (1) After condition setup, reinstall
setup for measurement loaded paper. setup for the the magazine.
present paper is not Even if condition setup is already performed, the system loaded paper is
not performed for requests condition setup again in the following cases: not performed.
performed. the installed - Paper end
magazine. - Paper type is changed.
- Master magazine is changed.
- LUT is cleared.
- Time setting is changed more than 2 hours.

E-2508 Communication Connection Reply from the LDD20 circuit board is not received within 1 1. Poorly 2. Poorly 3. Poorly 4. Faulty LDD20 5. Faulty CTL20 Disconnect and then connect the connector If the connector is connected properly: - Restart the system to confirm the
error occurred in error between second when a command for controlling laser is sent. connected or connected or connected circuit board circuit board securely. (1) Replace the harness. exposure section initialization is
printer (between LDD20 and This error may occur even if the laser is not in operation broken harness broken harness connector LDD1 (2) Replace the LDD20 circuit board. completed normally.
main circuit CTL20 circuit because temperature control is performed. between LDD2 between CTL8 on the LDD20 (3) Replace the CTL20 circuit board. - Check whether or not "Printer
board and boards or LDD3 on the or CTL9 on the circuit board or Temperature Display (456)"
LDD20 circuit occurred. LDD20 circuit CTL20 circuit PWA5 on the functions normally.
board on laser board and the board and the power supply
unit). CTL20 circuit LDD20 circuit unit
board board

161
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com

No. Message Factor Error Detection Method Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Possible cause Investigation Procedure Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/ Solution/Adjustment/
1 2 3 4 5 Check1 Check2 Check3
E-2509 Abnormal R Abnormal After the system is turned ON, setting value read from 1. Poorly 2. Tripped 3. Faulty 4. Faulty 5. Faulty FDD20 (1) Disconnect and connect the connector with the (1) Disconnect and then reconnect the (1) Restart the system to confirm
laser (R-LD) data read R-EEPROM is outside the following ranges. connected circuit protector EEPROM on EEPROM on circuit board label on the harness facing ROS. connector securely. the exposure section initialization is
information. from 0002: Limit current (0 to 1100) connector (CP805) on the the JMR20 the JMR20 (2) If the circuit protector is tripped: (2) completed normally.
EEPROM in 0003: Deterioration detection current (0 to 1100) (LDD4) on the LDD20 circuit circuit board circuit board Turn OFF the system, disconnect the LDD12 If the THA20 circuit board or related parts are (2) Check whether or not the
laser unit at 0007: Light source ID (fixed to 1) LDD20 circuit board (hardware (corrupted data) connector and restart the system. If the CP805 trips faulty: displayed values on "R Laser
startup. 0012: PD current (0 to 20000) board trouble) again, the THA20 circuit board and the related parts - Repair or replace the harness of LDD12. (R-LD) Data (45D)" are the same
0014: Shipping year (1998 to 2200) are normal (ROS and the related parts may be - Install the THA20 circuit boards correctly. as those on the attached
0015: Shipping month (1 to 12) faulty). - Replace the THA20 circuit boards. parameter sheet.
0016: Shipping day (1 to 31) (3) Check whether or not the displayed values on "R If ROS or related parts are faulty:
Laser (R-LD) Data (45D)" are the same as those on - Repair or replace the harness of LDD4, LDD5,
the parameter sheet stuck inside the magazine LDD6 or LDD9, or replace ROS.
door. - If the JMR20, JMG20 or JMB20 circuit board is
faulty, replace ROS.
(3) If the displayed values do not match, JMR20
circuit board is faulty. Replace ROS.
(4) Replace the LDD20 circuit board.

E-2510 Abnormal G Abnormal After the system is turned ON, setting value read from 1. Poorly 2. Tripped 3. Faulty 4. Faulty 5. Faulty FDD20 (1) Disconnect and connect the connector with the (1) Disconnect and then reconnect the (1) Restart the system to confirm
laser data read G-EEPROM is outside the following ranges. connected circuit protector EEPROM on EEPROM on circuit board label on the harness facing ROS. connector securely. the exposure section initialization is
(G-SHG) from 0002: Limit current (0 to 6000) connector (CP805) on the the JMG20 the JMG20 (2) If the circuit protector is tripped: (2) completed normally.
information. EEPROM in 0003: Deterioration detection current (0 to 6000) (LDD6) on the LDD20 circuit circuit board circuit board Turn OFF the system, disconnect the LDD12 If the THA20 circuit board or related parts are (2) Check whether or not the
laser unit at 0007: Light source ID (fixed to 2) LDD20 circuit board (hardware (corrupted data) connector and restart the system. If the CP805 trips faulty: displayed values on "G Laser
startup. 0012: PD current (0 to 20000) board trouble) again, the THA20 circuit board and the related parts - Repair or replace the harness of LDD12. (G-SHG) Data (45E)" are the same
0013: Temperature control (1300 to 3700) are normal (ROS and the related parts may be - Install the THA20 circuit boards correctly. as those on the attached
0014: Shipping year (1998 to 2200) faulty). - Replace the THA20 circuit boards. parameter sheet.
0015: Shipping month (1 to 12) (3) Check whether or not the displayed values on "G If ROS or related parts are faulty:
Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E)" are the same as those - Repair or replace the harness of LDD4, LDD5,
on the parameter sheet stuck inside the magazine LDD6 or LDD9, or replace ROS.
door. - If the JMR20, JMG20 or JMB20 circuit board is
faulty, replace ROS.
(3) If the displayed values do not match, JMG20
circuit board is faulty. Replace ROS.
(4) Replace the LDD20 circuit board.

E-2511 Abnormal B Abnormal After the system is turned ON, setting value read from 1. Poorly 2. Tripped 3. Faulty 4. Faulty 5. Faulty FDD20 (1) Disconnect and connect the connector with the (1) Disconnect and then reconnect the (1) Restart the system to confirm
laser data read B-EEPROM is outside the following range. connected circuit protector EEPROM on EEPROM on circuit board label on the harness facing ROS. connector securely. the exposure section initialization is
(B-SHG) from 0002: Limit current (0 to 6000) connector (CP805) on the the JMB20 the JMB20 (2) If the circuit protector is tripped: (2) completed normally.
information. EEPROM in 0003: Deterioration detection current (0 to 6000) (LDD9) on the LDD20 circuit circuit board circuit board Turn OFF the system, disconnect the LDD12 If the THA20 circuit board or related parts are (2) Check whether or not the
laser unit at 0007: Light source ID (fixed to 3) LDD20 circuit board (hardware (corrupted data) connector and restart the system. If the CP805 trips faulty: displayed values on "B Laser
startup. 0012: PD current (0 to 20000) board trouble) again, the THA20 circuit board and the related parts - Repair or replace the harness of LDD12. (B-SHG) Data (45F)" are the same
0013: Temperature control (1300 to 3700) are normal (ROS and the related parts may be - Install the THA20 circuit boards correctly. as those on the attached
0014: Shipping year (1998 to 2200) faulty). - Replace the THA20 circuit boards. parameter sheet.
0015: Shipping month (1 to 12) (3) Check whether or not the displayed values on "b If ROS or related parts are faulty:
0016: Shipping day (1 to 31) Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F)" are the same as those - Repair or replace the harness of LDD4, LDD5,
on the parameter sheet stuck inside the magazine LDD6 or LDD9, or replace ROS.
door.